} 


m  MEM©mAM 
Gnarlcs   Jusselyn 


IMAI 

EDUC. 


I  IRf?APV 


SPIRIT  INTERCOURSE 


SPJKIT  INTKUCOr'RSK:  It*  Theory  and  Practice. 
Ry  J.  Ilouat  McKenzIe.  New  York :  Mitchell 
Kennerley. 

The  most  salient  feature  of  Mr.  McKcnzie's 
book  is  the  author's  surety  concerning:  the 
niArvels  of  which  he  writes.  It  contains  mach 
general  discussion  of  the  subject  of  spirit  in- 
tercourse from  the  standpoint  of  the  entirely 
faithful  believer,  but  the  major  portion  of  its 
jiajjes  is  devoted  to  accounts  of  spiritistic 
phenomena,  elaboration  or  theories  as  to 
astral  planes  and  those  who  inhabit  them, 
description  of  objective  phenomena,  expla- 
nation of  and  advice  concerning  communica- 
tions witli  the  other  world  and  much  detailed 
description  of  affairs,  laws,  manners,  and 
customs  which  the  author  is  quite  sure  are 
features  of  the  life  after  death. 


SPIRIT  INTERCOURSE 


ITS  THEORY  AND  PRACTICE 


BY 


J.  Hewat  McKenzie 


NEW  YORK 

MITCHELL  KENNERLEY 

1917 


COPYRIGHT     191 7    BY 
MITCHELL  KENNERLEY 


ED'JG. 
PS, 'CM. 
LIDRARY 


PRINTED  IN  AMERICA 


IF  THERE  IS  ANYTHING  IMPORTANT  OR  HELPFUL 

IN  THIS  BOOK, 

MUCH    OF   IT  IS   DUE    TO  THE    STIMULATING   INFLUENCES 
THAT  HAVE  POURED  FROM  SPIRITUAL  SOURCES  THROUGH 

MY   WIFE, 

TO   WHOM.  I    DEDICATE    IT   WITH    GRATEFUL   AFFECTION 


P15775 


CONTENTS 

PAGB 

Preface  i 

CHAPTER  I 
Facts  Worth  Knowing  12 

Treatment  of  mediums  by  the  Christian  Church,  p.  19. 
Rise  of  modern  spiritualism,  p.  21.  Limited  education 
of  mediums,  p.  28.  Spirituahstic  phenomena  a  science, 
p.  29.    Instruments  used  by  psychic  scientists,  p.  32. 

CHAPTER  n 

Science  of  the  Soul  35 

Facts  proved,  p.  36.  Body,  soul  and  spirit,  p.  37. 
Premature  burial,  p.  43-  Soul  travelling  in  sleep, 
p.  44.  Dreams,  p.  45.  Hypnotic  experiments,  p.  47- 
Transition  through  death,  p.  48. 

CHAPTER  HI 
Materialization  ^ 

Psycho-plastic  full-form  materialization,  p.  63.  Shell 
materialization,  p.  75.  Fluidic  materializadon,  p.  78. 
AstraHzation,  p.  80.  Etheric  skin  envelope,  p.  81. 
Mechanical  ghosts,  p.  83.  Psycho-plastic  transfigura- 
tion, p.  84.     Materialization  of  animals,  p.  87. 

CHAPTER  IV 
Mediumship:  Objective  Phenomena  ^       89 

Table  tilting,  p.  93.  Spirit  rapping,  p.  99.  Automatic 
writing,  p.  100.  Psychic 'slate  writing,  p.  loi.  Spirit 
paindng,  p.  loi.  Spirit  photography,  p.  102.  Unlock- 
ing of  doors,  p.  107.  Levitation,  p.  107.  Apports,  p.  108. 
Trumpet  mediumship,  p.  no.  DemateriaHzation,  p. 
III.  Houdini's  platform  demonstration,  p.  114.  Mrs. 
Thompson's  demonstration,  p.  116.  Miss  Fay's 
demonstration,  p.  1 18.    Japanese  demonstration,  p.  1 19. 

V 


vi  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  V 

PAGE 

Mediumship:  Subjective  Phenomena  122 

Clairvoyance,  p.  122.  Psychoraetr}',  p.  127.  Telepathy 
and  soul  projection,  p.  130.  Mrs.  Zancig's  demonstra- 
tion, p.  131.     Spirit  healing,  p.  136. 

CHAPTER  VI 
First  Steps  to  Spirit  Intercourse  139 

Advice  to  beginners,  p.  139.  Dangers,  p.  146.  Diffi- 
culties, p.  148.  Attitude  of  materialist  and  idealist, 
p.  150.  Magazines  recommended,  p.  151.  London 
Spiritualist  Alliance,  p.  152.  Instruments  for  be- 
ginners, p.  153.  Treatment  of  mediums,  p.  153. 
What  to  expect,  p.  155.  Planchette,  p.  160.  Table 
tilting,  p.  164.  Automatic  writing,  p.  167.  Public 
seances,  p.  168.  Developing  circles,  p.  169.  Natural 
law  at  work,  p.  170.  Importance  of  psychic  phe- 
nomena, p.  172,  Communication  and  communion, 
p.  173- 

CHAPTER  VII 
The  Culture  of  the  Soul  175 

Family  worship,  p.  175.  The  sanctum,  p.  181.  Spirit 
communion,  p.  183.  Aspiration,  p.  187.  Diet,  p.  188. 
Exercise,  189.  Self-control,  p.  189.  Soul  culture 
a  science,  p.  191.  Concentration,  p.  191,  Medita- 
tion, p.  191. 

CHAPTER  VIII 
Laws  Operating  in  Spirit  Spheres  196 

Introduction,  p.  196.  The  new  superphysical  con- 
tinents, p.  197,  198.  Descriptive  tal)lc  of  spirit  spheres, 
p.  202.  Foofl,  p.  205.  Clothing,  p.  205.  Occupations, 
p.  209.  Buildings,  p.  2T I.  Marriage,  p.  214.  Language, 
p.  215.  Animals,  p.  216.  Flowers,  p.  218.  Rejuvena- 
tion, p.  220.  Travelling,  p.  221.  Time  and  space,  p. 
222.  Religions,  p.  224.  Transition  from  sphere  to 
sphere,  p.  225.     Reincarnation,  p.  227. 


CONTENTS  Vil 

CHAPTER  IX 

PAGE 

Life  after  Death  228 

Geography  of  spirit  spheres,  p.  228.  Reality  of  super- 
physical  continents,  p.  229.  Lowest  astral  world,  or 
Hades,  p.  230.  Animal  spheres,  p.  230.  Planetary 
spheres,  p.  230.  Distance  from  earth,  p.  230.  Atmos- 
pheres, p.  232.  Origin  of  spirit  spheres,  p.  233,  Per- 
manency of  superphysical  continents,  p.  234,  Future 
exploration,  p.  235.  Earthquakes,  p.  236.  Lowest 
astral  world,  p.  238.  Degree  of  light,  p.  239.  Dante's 
conception,  p,  239.  Nature's  reformatories,  p.  240. 
Approximate  population,  p.  242.  Methods  of  advance- 
ment, p.  247.  Sensualists'  reformatory,  p.  247. 
Drunkards'  pit,  p.  249.  A  hell  of  the  Epicureans, 
p.  254.  Middle  astral  world,  p.  255.  Habitations, 
p.  256.  The  retired  policeman,  p.  259.  Vanity  fair, 
p.  262.  The  house  of  the  harpy,  p.  266.  Upper 
astral  plane,  p.  268.  Second  sphere,  p.  270.  Head- 
quarters of  various  religions,  p.  271.  The  rehgious 
maniac,  p.  272.  Third  sphere,  the  Summer  Land, 
p.  275.  Dwellings,  p.  275.  Light,  p.  276.  Pubhc 
buildings,  p.  278.  Colleges,  p.  279.  Children's  educa- 
tion, p.  280.  Pet  animals,  p.  282.  Music,  p.  282. 
Knowledge  of  earth,  p.  282.  Fourth  sphere,  or  Sphere 
of  Comparison,  p.  283.  Fifth  sphere,  or  Intellectual 
Plane,  p.  284.  Sixth  sphere,  or  Love  Plane,  p.  285. 
Seventh  sphere,  the  Christ  Plane,  p.  286. 

Conclusion         •  289 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE 


Man  as  a  Triune  Being  facing  38 

Man's  Soul  departing  from  Body  at  Death    facing  48 

Psycho-Plastic  Materialization  facing  64 

Spirit  Photographs  facing  .  104 

Earth  and  its  Super-Physical  Spheres  197 

The  Earth,  Venus  and  Mars,  surrounded  by  their 

Spirit  Spheres  198 


SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

PREFACE 

THE  author  desires  to  bring  before  his  read- 
ers some  facts  dealing  with  the  latest  evi- 
dence for  the  continuity  of  life  beyond 
death,  verified  by  himself  during  many  years  of 
psychical  research.  To  some  readers  much  of  the 
matter  will  be  startlingly  new,  and  the  facts  difficult 
to  believe.  To  others,  who  will  accept  the  phe- 
nomena without  question,  because  of  previous  ex- 
perience, the  theories  adduced  therefrom  may  not 
be  wholly  acceptable.  The  facts  so  far  tran- 
scend ordinary  experience  that  some  cannot  do 
otherwise  than  reject  them,  until  fuller  knowledge 
prevails  upon  the  whole  subject.  When  first 
brought  into  contact  with  students  of  this  science 
the  writer  himself  treated  the  statements  made  by 
them  as  unworthy  of  belief,  and  he  quite  under- 
stands the  natural  scepticism  of  the  man  or  wo- 
man who  is  at  present  entirely  ignorant  of  the 
subject.      The  fact  of  the  startling  phenomena, 


2  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

however,  both  subjective  and  objective,  does  not 
rest  upon  mere  statement,  but  upon  natural  law, 
and  this  may  be  verified  by  anyone  who  feels  dis- 
posed to  prove  the  statements  by  experiment,  ob- 
servation, and  study.  Many  of  the  more  impor- 
tant facts  recorded  have  been  proved  by  sustained 
experiment,  by  the  most  eminent  men  of  physical 
science  throughout  the  world,  whose  evidence  and 
testimony  have  been  carefully  tabulated  in  their 
published  w^orks.  A  list  of  books  containing  such 
evidence  will  be  found  on  pages  294  and  295. 

It  Is  generally  conceded  that  knowledge  regard- 
ing the  continuity  of  life  is  of  supreme  importance 
to  the  human  race,  and  yet  at  the  same  time  it  must 
be  confessed  that  there  is  no  subject  less  known 
or  understood  by  the  general  public.  For  cen- 
turies the  facts  available  were  reserved  for  the 
few,  and  the  garbled  accounts  which  reached  the 
general  public  were  mixed  with  superstitious  be- 
liefs, persistently  attacked  by  Ignorant  and  prej- 
udiced critics,  exploited  by  charlatans,  and  sys- 
tematically cold-shouldered  by  well-meaning  but 
fearful  religious  professors  of  all  shades  of  opin- 
ion. The  time  is  more  than  ripe  for  the  subject 
to  be  boldly  examined  by  every  truth  lover,  openly 
recognized  as  a  supremely  valuable  branch  of  nat- 
ural science,  and  rescued  from  the  hands  of  ob- 
scurantists and  wonder-mongers. 


PREFACE  3 

During  the  past  quarter  of  a  century  many 
eminent  men  have  risked  their  reputation,  and 
spent  much  time  and  money  with  this  object  in 
view — men  whose  names  stand  in  the  foremost 
rank  of  science,  art,  and  commerce  throughout  the 
world,  and  to  name  even  a  few  of  the  best  known 
would  fill  several  pages  of  this  book.  Fortunately, 
psychic  facts  do  not  depend  upon  eminent  names 
for  their  support,  as  much  of  the  most  valuable 
information  has  been  received  and  preserved  by 
humble  investigators.  The  facts  may  be  verified 
by  any  honest  inquirer  to-day,  but  in  spite  of  the 
comparative  ease  with  which  this  may  be  done,  the 
majority  of  the  Western  race,  even  those  who 
claim  to  have  received  a  good  education,  are  en- 
tirely ignorant  of  the  possibilities  of  spirit  inter- 
course, and  believe  the  subject  only  receives  the 
attention  of  neurotic,  superstitious,  or  mentally 
unhinged  individuals.  This  idea  is  unfortunately 
encouraged  by  many  representatives  of  the  Chris- 
tian Church,  who,  for  the  sake  of  their  own  belief, 
should  be  the  last  to  oppose  these  facts,  as  they, 
beyond  all  others,  profess  to  believe  the  testimony 
of  ancient  documents  in  favor  of  spirit  inter- 
course. This  attitude  of  mind,  which  can  accept 
unverifiable  ancient  testimony,  and  reject  reliable 
modern  evidence,  is  unfortunate,  and  renews  again 
the  ancient  quarrel  between  the  exponents  of  re- 


4  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

liglon  and  of  science,  who  ought  to  be  the  closest 
of  allies,  when  objective  facts,  at  least,  are  under 
discussion.  The  position  of  the  Church  on  this 
subject  Is  not  only  unreasonable  and  open  to  the 
ridicule  of  that  section  of  the  community  calling 
itself  rationalist,  but  It  also  closes  the  door  to 
those  proofs  of  a  future  life  which  the  Christian 
Church  so  sadly  needs.  If  it  hopes  to  meet  the  ever- 
rising  stream  of  questions  from  Intelligent  doubt- 
ers within  Its  own  borders. 

The  writer  was  a  member  of  the  Christian 
Church  for  thirty  years,  but  during  that  time  he 
received  no  satisfactory  evidence  that  man  had  a 
soul,  or  that  a  spiritual  world  existed,  although  he 
diligently  sought  for  such  evidence.  What  he 
failed  to  discover  within  the  Church  he  at  last 
found  amongst  those  whom  It  despised  and  re- 
garded as  ignorant  and  uneducated,  and  enemies 
to  Its  teaching.  The  evidence,  when  found,  en- 
tirely revolutionized  his  whole  outlook  on  life, 
for  it  proved  to  him  without  doubt  that  man  has  a 
soul,  and  that  this  soul  continues  to  live  beyond 
death.  This  knowledge  not  only  brought  rich 
mental  satisfaction,  throwing  a  searching  light 
upon  problems  of  life  which  had  hitherto  remained 
unanswerable,  but  it  opened  up  communication 
with  beings  whose 'Influence  and  words  stimulated 
thought,  Inspired  action,  and  awakened  spiritual 


PREFACE  5 

perceptions  which  had  been  hitherto  dormant, 
bringing  Into  his  life  the  same  joy  and  help  which 
it  has  brought  to  miUIons  of  others.  After  long 
and  careful  experiment  he  decided  to  resign  a 
lucrative  occupation  in  order  to  devote  at  least 
some  years  of  his  time,  without  recompense,  to 
make  known  the  simplicity  and  value  of  this  new 
science  to  humanity.  Some  of  the  matter  in  this 
book  has  been  given  in  the  form  of  lectures  to 
audiences,  numbering  many  thousands,  in  London, 
Edinburgh,  and  Glasgow  in  the  autumn  of  19 15, 
but  in  addition,  much  new  matter,  hitherto  unpub- 
lished, will  be  found  in  it. 

The  author  wishes  to  bring  his  facts  before 
ordinary  folks,  natural  men  and  women  who  have 
no  pre-conceived  opinions  in  favor  of  any  religion 
or  philosophy  of  life,  and  there  are  many  such,  for 
it  Is  openly  stated  by  churches  of  all  denominations 
that  they  have  failed  to  win  the  suffrages  of  the 
common  people.  The  book  is  addressed  primarily 
to  those  who  have  an  open  mind  to  pursue  truth  for 
its  own  sake,  and  who  can  honestly  and  candidly 
say:  ''I  do  not  know,  but  would  like  to  know  if 
man  really  lives  beyond  death.  I  cannot  accept 
the  testimony  of  ancient  writings,  however  sacred 
they  may  be  considered,  on  such  an  important 
matter,  and  I  should  like  to  hear  what  present  day 


6  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

science  has  to  say  on  the  subject,  if  psychic  science 
has  really  any  facts  to  offer.'' 

Knowing  how  the  general  public  shun  hard 
words  and  laborious  thinking,  the  author  has  used 
the  simplest  expressions  to  convey  his  meaning,  so 
that  those  who  are  entirely  ignorant  of  the  subject 
may  read  with  understanding.  The  book,  there- 
fore, is  not  a  stiff  and  learned  one,  written  by  a 
professor  for  professors,  but  a  human  book,  writ- 
ten with  the  object  of  helping  humanity  to  under- 
stand a  subject  of  profound  importance.  The  lit- 
erary form  may  betray  the  stamp  of  a  business 
mind  and  a  certain  amount  of  haste,  but  against 
that  the  reader  may  value  clarity  of  thought  and 
simplicity  of  language,  as  it  is  the  writer's  desire 
to  speak  of  things  called  spiritual  in  modern  terms. 
How  important  this  is  when  dealing  with  super- 
physical  realms  and  spiritual  principles  can  best 
be  understood  by  calling  to  mind  the  contradictions 
which  have  arisen  in  the  past  between  the  literal 
and  symbolical  Interpretation  of  Biblical  writings, 
which  produced  volumes  by  the  thousand  to  prove 
that  certain  verses  of  Scripture  meant  one  thing, 
and  another  equally  great  number  to  prove  that 
they  meant  exactly  the  reverse,  leaving  the  poor 
readers  bewildered  and  doubtful. 

Modern  minds  desiring  to  grasp  the  rudiments 
of  a  new  science  have  little  time  to  spend  upon  the 


PREFACE  7 

author  who  begins  to  speak  of  It  In  poetry,  using 
all  kinds  of  imagery  and  symbolical  and  literal 
language  alternately.  Believing  them  to  be  heart- 
ily sick  of  such  stuff,  when  entering  the  realm 
of  science,  the  author  has  endeavored  to  place 
before  his  readers  plain  facts,  without  using  any 
allegorical  imagery,  therefore  the  words  used  and 
the  statements  made  are  to  be  read  and  understood 
in  their  ordinary  meaning. 

The  book  Is  written  by  a  business  man  for  busi- 
ness men  and  women  on  a  subject  which  they  have 
left  too  long  In  the  hands  of  their  religious  teach- 
ers. Let  the  readers  ask  themselves:  '''IFhat 
facts  has  the  Church  given  to  the  world  in  the  way 
of  actual  proofs  that  men  have  souls,  or  that  there 
is  a  spiritual  world?  Is  it  the  Church's  duty  to 
investigate  natural  phenomena  relating  to  this? 
If  so,  what  has  it  done  towards  the  encourage- 
ment of  psychical  res e arch  f  If  the  answers  to 
these  questions  are  In  the  negative,  why,  therefore, 
leave  the  matter  In  their  hands?  If  they  have 
neglected  to  till  their  own  field,  then  the  manage- 
ment of  an  important  part  of  It  must  be  taken  over 
by  others. 

The  human  race  in  Western  lands  besieges  the 
doors  of  death  for  an  answer  to  the  question,  "If 
a  man  die,  shall  he  live  again?"  Psychic  science 
has  had  the  only  substantial  morsel  of  food  to  offer 


8  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  mourner,  and  thousands  of  unhappy  mourners 
during  the  present  world-war  have  become  happy 
and  confident  by  means  of  this  knowledge.  By 
following  the  directions  in  the  chapter,  ''First 
Steps  to  Spirit  Intercourse,"  it  may  be  proved  In  a 
very  short  time  by  any  sincere  and  Intelligent  per- 
son, that  a  spiritual  force  exists  in  nature,  by 
which  those  whom  we  call  "the  dead"  can  mani- 
fest their  presence.  Men  and  women  of  ordinary 
capacity,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  may  prove 
this.  Neither  faith  nor  credulity  Is  necessary  to 
success,  for  those  who  are  honest  doubters  often 
achieve  the  best  results. 

The  facts  of  psychical  science  are  revolution- 
izing the  world's  materialistic  theories.  From  the 
knowledge  thus  attained  must  arise  a  spiritual  rev- 
olution, and  an  entirely  new  religion  which  might 
be  termed,  "The  Science  of  Living."  It  is  pre- 
posterous to  believe,  as  some  do,  that  all  that  can 
be  known  regarding  man's  soul  was  given  to  the 
world  1,900  years  ago,  and  that  because  nothing 
is  related  in  the  Jewish  Scriptures  about  the  state 
of  man  beyond  death,  therefore  nothing  can  be 
known.  The  early  Christian  Is  stated  to  have 
had  proofs,  but  the  modern  Christian  has  none. 
The  New  Testament  story  of  the  Resurrection 
may  satisfy  those  who  are  content  to  take  their  re- 
ligion ready-made,  but  is  it  good  enough  for  the 


PREFACE  9 

honest  seeker  of  truth  to-day?  Nothing  reliable 
is  known  regarding  the  witnesses  of  these  ancient 
marvels,  the  stories  may  be  true,  or  they  may  be 
false,  but  it  is  unreasonable  to  suppose  that  twen- 
tieth century  men  and  women  can  rest  their  con- 
fidence on  so  important  a  subject  on  the  statement 
of  ancient  Galilean  fishermen.  In  infancy  men 
irrationally  believe,  in  youth  they  question,  but 
in  manhood  they  demand  to  know.  This  book  is 
written  for  those  who  want  to  know.  What  psychi- 
cal science  has  proved  from  observation  and  ex- 
periment is  here  recorded,  but  it  is  not  suggested 
that  the  reader  shall  accept  everything  or  anything 
as  the  writer's  final  verdict.  Most  of  the  state- 
ments made  have  been  checked  and  rechecked  and 
verified  as  far  as  it  is  humanly  possible.  The 
days  of  infallible  writers  and  writings  have  passed 
away,  though  there  are  still  teachers  of  spiritual 
and  occult  law  who  yield  to  the  temptation  of 
writing  in  dogmatic  language,  making  it  extremely 
difficult  for  them  later  to  correct  mistakes,  but 
the  author  does  not  intend  thus  to  limit  himself. 
He  desires  heartily  to  acknowledge  his  indebt- 
edness to  those  in  spiritual  spheres  who  have  cheer- 
fully devoted  generous  assistance  to  him  in  this 
work,  and  the  book  would  lack  many  of  its  most 
interesting  detlails  but  for  their  kindly  labors. 
One  helper  especially  may  be  mentioned,  his  per- 


lO  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

mission  having  been  received — Professor  William 
James,  late  of  Harvard  University,  America — 
who  has  devoted  much  time  in  his  post-mortem 
state  in  the  study  of  the  geographical  position  of 
spirit  spheres,  and  has  assisted  particularly  in 
that  branch  of  the  subject.  It  has  been  impossible 
to  put  into  this  book  a  tithe  of  the  information 
received  from  him,  but  on  another  occasion  fuller 
particulars  may  be  given.  The  writer  feels  great- 
ly honored  in  his  association  with  so  unique  a  mind, 
so  devoted  a  truth-seeker,  and  so  charming  a 
friend,  as  this  most  capable  of  modern  psycholo- 
gists. 

While  many  deep  and  profound  problems  arise 
out  of  the  statements  made  in  the  book,  the 
author's  sincere  desire  is,  that  through  the  evi- 
dence contained  in  it,  one  essential  fact  will  ap- 
pear clear  and  untarnished,  that  "there  is  no 
death" ;  that  the  great  impenetrable  wall  which 
men  have  been  told  separates  them  from  their  be- 
loved is  gone,  and  that  only  a  thin  veil,  easily 
drawn  aside,  stands  between  the  living  and  the 
so-called  "dead."  None  need  mourn  needlessly, 
none  need  refuse  to  believe  that  men  are  spirits 
now,  and  laying  down  the  veil  of  flesh  at  death 
step  into  another  world  and  continue  their  jour- 
ney, taking  with  them  all  of  real  value,  and  pass 
on  to  another  opportunity  for  further  education. 


PREFACE  1 1 

Instead  of  resentment  at  a  seemingly  chaotic  Uni- 
verse and  an  arbitrary  Power,  men  will  see  by  the 
aid  of  this  knowledge  an  ordered  path,  walking  In 
which  they  may  sensibly  grow  Into  beauty  of 
character,  and  perceive  the  working  of  a  beneficent 
Providence,  with  which  Is  associated  In  many 
grades  of  excellence  and  usefulness,  beings  who 
have  passed  from  this  world  to  the  next,  who  de- 
sire to  work  In  the  great  order  of  mutual  service 
which  must  be  the  keynote  of  any  new  aspect  of 
religion  which  will  hold  humanity  in  the  future. 

I,  Stanley  Gardens,  The  Author 

London,  W. 


CHAPTER  I 

FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING 

It  is  true  most  of  the  men  of  learning  in  Europe 
have  given  up  all  accounts  of  apparitions  as  ''old 
wives^'  fables.  I  am  sorry  for  it,  and  with  my 
latest  breath  will  I  bear  testimony  against  giving 
up  to  infidels  one  of  the  greatest  proofs  of  the 
invisible  world,  I  mean  that  of  apparitions  con- 
firmed by  the  witnesses  of  all  ages. — John  Wes- 
ley. 

As  for  the  spiritualistic  superstitions  which  were 
rife  amongst  us,  he  was  almost  ashamed  to  men- 
tion them.  ''Old  wives'^  fables  about  ghostly  ap- 
paritions had  been  popular  always  and  every- 
where, but  that  was  not  the  kind  of  immortality 
that  Christianity  taught,  or  that  sensible  men 
would  desire.  Even  when  superstition  masquer- 
aded in  a  scientific  dress  the  less  we  had  to  do  with 
it  the  better. — Extract  from  sermon  by  Dean 
Inge,  Christian  Minister,  October,  19 15. 

/  am  absolutely  convinced  that  communication 
between  beings  still  in  the  flesh  and  the  so-called 
"dead''  is  more  frequently  made  than  most  people 

12 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  1 3 

suppose.  It  may  not  he  wise  or  healthy-minded 
to  dwell  much  upon  these  supernormal  occurrences, 
but  no  one  could  deny  them  who  knows  the  evi- 
dence.— Extract  from  article  by  Rev.  R.  J.  Camp- 
bell^ Christian  Minister,  October,  19 15. 

SPIRIT  Intercourse  is  a  subject  as  old  as  hu- 
manity, and  testimony  regarding  it  is  to  be 
found  in  the  records  of  all  ancient  civiliza- 
tions. Egypt,  India,  China,  Japan,  Greece,  and 
Rome  bear  witness  to  its  facts,  both  upon  monu- 
ments of  stone  and  in  written  records,  while  sav- 
age tribes  of  many  countries  have  known  and 
practised  it  in  various  forms,  often  associated  wnth 
peculiar  rites,  which  continue  to  the  present  day. 
Most  of  the  great  religions  have  taken  their  rise 
from  directions  which  purport  to  have  been  re- 
ceived from  enlightened  spirits,  who,  it  is  pre- 
sumed, have  returned  to  earth  to  instruct  man- 
kind. Every  country  and  age  has  also  possessed 
persons  called  prophets  or  seers,  whose  successors 
in  our  own  day  are  named  "sensitives"  or  "me- 
diums." These  seers,  both  ancient  and  modern, 
undoubtedly  were  the  possessors  of  gifts  which 
marked  them  out  from  their  fellows.  Some  were 
clairvoyant — clear-seers — others  clalraudlent — 
clear-hearers — others  could  prophesy,  or  heal,  or 
speak  in  unknown  tongues,  and  in  the  majority  of 


14  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

cases  they  claimed  that  these  gifts  were  exercised 
under  the  instruction  of  spirit-beings.  The  Del- 
phic Oracles  and  the  dalmon  of  Socrates  are  the 
two  most  popularly  quoted  examples  from  ancient 
history.  The  Bible  contains  many  similar  rela- 
tions, from  those  associated  with  Jesus  to  other  in- 
cidents in  the  Old  and  New  Testaments.  These 
were  not  signs  and  wonders  only,  as  so  often 
stated,  but  took  place  under  well-recognized  con- 
ditions, which  twentieth  century  psychic  science 
has  verified  as  conforming  to  the  laws  governing 
all  such  manifestations  wherever  they  take  place. 
The  ancient  seers  were  loved  by  some  as  fav- 
orites of  the  gods,  and  feared  by  others  as  in- 
dividuals with  magical  powers  who  might  whim- 
sically destroy  whoever  or  whatever  came  under 
their  condemnation.  Sometimes  these  supernor- 
mal individuals  used  their  great  gifts  to  elevate 
and  instnict  the  people  amongst  whom  they  dwelt, 
at  other  times  they  employed  them  for  mean  and 
contemptible  ends.  They  had  the  ability,  so  they 
claimed,  to  see  into  spiritual  states,  and  converse 
with  spiritual  beings,  from  whom  they  received 
wise  counsel  and  advice  for  themselves  and  for 
those  who  came  to  them  for  help  and  Instruction. 
When  the  leading  prophets  and  seers  of  a  country 
were  noble  and  just,  the  people  prospered,  but 
when   they   used  their  psychic  gifts   for   self-ag- 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  1 5 

grandlzement  and  taught  falsities  as  truth,  the 
people  lapsed  into  barbarities,  and  indulged  in 
many  vicious  practices.  Their  power  and  impor- 
tance may  be  realized  when  it  is  remembered  that 
kings,  governors,  and  generals,  before  embarking 
upon  any  new  campaign,  made  it  an  inv^ariable 
practice  to  inquire  of  the  gods,  through  these  seers, 
whether  their  venture  would  be  successful  or  other- 
wise; at  other  times  they  sought  for  guidance  re- 
garding new  legislation,  or  the  appointment  of  a 
new  judge  or  governor,  or  the  remedy  to  be  taken 
for  the  cure  of  disease.  The  practice  of  consult- 
ing reputable  seers  indulged  in  by  ancient  kings  is 
not  by  any  means  obsolete  to-day,  for  it  is  well 
known  that  nearly  every  crowned  head  in  Europe 
is  more  or  less  interested  in  seership,  and  fre- 
quently invite  clairvoyants  and  demonstrators  of 
other  psychic  powers  to  visit  them. 

So  great  was  the  power  and  influence  exercised 
by  the  ancient  prophet,  that  the  ruling  king  was. 
sometimes  of  secondary  importance  in  the  eyes  of 
the  people.  This  led  to  many  complications,  and 
sometimes  the  seer  found  himself  confined  to  a 
dungeon,  or  exiled,  and  not  infrequently  on  the 
occasion  of  a  subsequent  crisis,  recalled  in  order  to 
exercise  his  gifts  in  the  national  interest.  These 
highly  sensitive  persons  who  had  the  gift  of  seer- 
ship have  been  of  incalculable  benefit  to  the  human 


1 6  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

race,  not  only  bringing  enlightenment  by  their 
messages,  but  also  redeeming  nations  from  ma- 
terialistic delusions  and  animalism,  by  consistent- 
ly proclaiming  life  to  be  a  spiritual  reality.  Many 
of  the  most  valuable  records  of  their  work  have 
been  destroyed,  often  by  the  order  of  the  Church, 
whole  libraries  suffering  this  fate,  and  so  we  pos- 
sess to-day  only  incomplete  and  distorted  refer- 
ences regarding  them,  and  even  these  have  been 
interpreted  wrongly  by  ignorant  historians.  But 
some  have  given  ample  attention  to  the  subject, 
notably  Plutarch,  who  in  his  "Lives"  of  the  heroes 
of  Greece  and  Rome  gives  many  instances  of  the 
importance  with  which  psychic  manifestations  and 
mediumistic  gifts  were  regarded  by  the  greatest 
rulers  of  these  nations.  Probably  it  is  on  this 
account  that  Plutarch  is  discounted  as  an  historian 
by  certain  critics  entirely  ignorant  of  psychic  facts, 
but  when  the  subject  is  more  fully  and  sympathet- 
ically studied,  the  world  may  find  in  such  records 
a  key  to  many  problems  which  have  long  exer- 
cised the  minds  of  scholars.  For  example,  it  has 
formed  an  endless  subject  of  controversy  as  to  how 
a  writer  with  such  limited  education  as  Shake- 
speare is  presumed  to  have  received,  should  have 
been  able  to  produce  such  profound  philosophy  as 
may  be  found  in  his  plays,  and  to  deal  accu- 
rately  and   sympathetically   with   conditions    and 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  1 7 

places  which  he  had  presumably  never  experienced 
or  visited.  Information  derived  from  spirit 
sources  claims  that  these  writings  were  the  inspired 
thoughts  of  a  great  mind  in  spiritual  realms, 
passed  through  the  medium  of  Shakespeare  who 
collaborated  with  Francis  Bacon.  It  is  claimed 
that  the  unseen  inspirer  was  Euripides,  the  Greek 
tragedian,  who  used  Shakespeare  as  his  mouth- 
piece, and  the  sublime  thoughts  which  inspire  the 
reader  of  the  plays  owe  their  form  and  setting  to 
the  callaboration  of  Bacon.  This  Is  a  possible  and 
probable  explanation  of  the  problem.  ^ 

Strange  though  it  seems,  it  is  true  that  wherever 
a  country  Is  poor  in  prophets  or  seers,  the  people 
perish  from  lack  of  vision.  It  was  so  In  Pales- "V^< 
tine,  where  the  Jews  In  the  first  century  had  sunk 
into  a  materialism  so  gross  that  the  vast  majority 
were  convinced  that  death  was  the  end  of  all.  It 
may  be  Imagined  how  startled  and  Incredulous 
many  were,  when  the  rumor  reached  them,  that 
the  teacher,  Jesus,  whom  the  authorities  had  cruci- 
fied, had  manifested  his  existence  after  death  to 
some  of  his  companions.  This  strange  fact  of  the 
resurrection,  which  disturbed  the  Jews  of  that  day, 
and  which  has  been  shouted  from  the  house-tops 
by  Christian  priests  for  1,900  years,  was  but  the 
operation  of  a  natural  law,  strange  to  the  people 
of  Palestine,  but  well  known  to  many  of  the  In- 


I  8  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

habitants  of  countries  of  the  East.  The  frequent 
appearance  of  Jesus  to  his  friends,  after  his  death 
and  burial,  was  the  great  fact  which  brought  the 
Christian  Church  into  being,  and  not  exclusively 
the  teaching  of  Jesus,  as  is  so  often  claimed.  Lack- 
ing the  phenomenon  of  his  resurrection,  regarded 
still  by  a  large  portion  of  Christendom  as  unique 
and  miraculous,  there  seemed  every  likelihood  of 
Christianity  proving  a  still-birth,  but  with  that 
assured  knowledge,  the  disciples  developed  a  faith 
which  veritably  moved  mountains.  The  original 
members  of  the  early  Christian  community  un- 
doubtedly knew  of  spirit  Intercourse,  if  the  New 
Testament  records  are  to  be  accepted,  for  there 
it  is  clearly  defined  again  and  again  how  spirits 
were  to  be  tested  and  dealt  with.  Other  Gospels 
and  Epistles  were  not  included  when  the  New 
Testament  Canon  was  established,  because  they 
spoke  too  freely  of  this  thing.  It  is  interest- 
ing to  notice  how  an  Institution  may  gradually 
lapse  from  practices  originally  inculcated,  and  re- 
vert to  a  position  which  constitutes  almost  a  total 
antithesis  of  Its  original  attitude.  The  cultivation 
of  spiritual  "gifts"  undoubtedly  went  on  under 
the  Instruction  of  the  early  Church,  and  included 
all  well-known  phases  of  psychic  manifestation,  as 
well  as  the  ''graces"  to  which  Christianity  to-day 
gives  its  sole  attention.     Later  we  find  the  seers 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  1 9 

brought  under  the  private  domination  of  the 
priests  of  the  Church,  who  gradually  reserved 
them  for  their  exclusive  use,  so  that  they  might 
have  superior  knowledge  and  power  beyond  that 
possessed  by  the  people.  Later  still,  during  the 
fifteenth,  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries  the 
ecclesiastical  powers  not  only  prohibited  the  use 
of  seers  to  the  public,  but  made  the  exercise  of 
psychic  gifts  a  capital  offence.  During  these  three 
centuries  the  Christian  Church  fell  to  a  depth  of 
barbarity  in  its  treatment  of  mediums  unsurpassed 
by  the  most  depraved  nations  of  any  age.  Its  lead- 
ers hunted  out,  often  by  the  most  disreputable 
means,  these  unfortunate  sensitives,  whom  they 
termed  witches  and  sorcerers,  and  destroyed  them 
by  burning  at  the  stake,  stoning  on  the  common, 
or  drowning  in  the  public  pond.  The  history  of 
this  atrocious  work  is  written  fully  by  Lecky  In 
his  history  of  Rationalism  in  Ew-ope^  and  In  the 
records  of  civil  and  ecclesiastical  courts.  It  is 
estimated  that  in  Europe  during  these  centuries 
three  million  unfortunate  men  and  women  were 
done  to  death  as  witches  and  sorcerers,  at  the  in- 
stigation of  the  Church,  and  this,  In  the  name  of 
Christ,  the  lover  of  mankind,  and  In  a  manner  so 
repulsive  that  the  details  cannot  here  be  printed. 
The  authorization  claimed  for  the  vile  deeds  was 
a  line  of  an  ancient  Scripture,  "Thou  shalt  not 


20  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

suffer  a  witch  to  live."  It  Is  very  evident  in  read- 
ing these  pitiful  records  that  only  a  percentage  of 
those  supposed  to  be  witches  and  sorcerers  had 
medlumistic  gifts,  but  anyone  was  liable  to  be 
seized  and  tortured  If  a  fellow-citizen  chose  to 
lodge  a  charge  of  sorcery  against  him.  But  this 
wholesale  slaughter  of  millions  doubtless  included 
the  best  mediums  of  these  centuries,  people  with 
rare  psychic  gifts,  and  the  result  of  the  rapid  ex- 
termination of  those  with  developed  or  latent 
medlumistic  powers,  was  to  eliminate  from  the  na- 
tions of  Europe  some  of  nature's  finest  forces,  just 
as  a  breeder  of  animals  may  eradicate  any  special 
trait  which  he  may  think  undesirable  by  killing  off 
the  young  possessing  such.  Abnormal  psychic 
gifts  are  undoubtedly  partly  hereditary,  and  whole- 
sale destruction  of  this  kind  would  naturally  stamp 
those  natural  powers  out  of  the  race. 

The  persecution  in  the  seventeenth  century  of 
the  Quakers,  who  suffered  death  and  exile  in  very 
large  numbers,  further  depleted  the  spiritual 
forces  in  Britain  which  had  gathered  strength 
enough  to  give  their  message  once  more.  When 
It  Is  claimed  that  Christianity  has  redeemed  the 
world  from  superstition,  ignorance,  and  material- 
ism, sound  arguments  might  easily  be  found  to 
prove  just  the  reverse,  e.g.^  the  actions  recorded 
above,  a  colossal  blunder  which  no  other  religion 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  2  1 

has  e^.^er  committed.  Regulation  of  the  gifts  may 
have  been  necessary — St.  Paul  and  others  fully 
recognized  this — but  only  crass  stupidity  and  big- 
otry could  have  adopted  for  centuries  such  a  pol- 
icy as  the  obliteration  of  that  gift  of  the  gods 
which  demonstrates  spirit  realities. 

The  Western  world  Is  only  now  beginning  to 
recover  from  this  infamous  blunder,  and  realize 
how  serious  the  damage  has  been,  for  the  rise  of 
materialism  in  the  eighteenth  and  nineteenth  cen- 
turies was  its  outcome,  and  is  coincident  with  the 
years  during  which  men  received  little  or  no  evi- 
dence of  a  spiritual  world  or  of  spiritual  beings. 
Amongst  the  ranks  of  physical  scientists,  so  long 
held  in  the  bondage  of  materialism,  a  change  is 
proceeding,  and  a  more  spiritual  philosophy  of  life 
is  becoming  general,  this  being  brought  about  en- 
tirely through  the  supernormal  gifts  of  physical 
mediumship,  which  for  a  quarter  of  a  century  have 
been  closely  studied  by  many  amongst  them  who 
are  beginning  to  realize  as  a  fact,  that  behind  the 
physical  universe  stands  a  spiritual  one.  It  can- 
not be  claimed  that  this  newly  awakened  sympathy 
to  spiritual  realities  is  in  any  way  due  to  the 
Christian  Church,  for  that  institution  is  more 
powerless  to-day  to  demonstrate  spirit  power  than 
ever  it  has  been.  Neither  can  it  be  claimed  that 
intelligent   and  humane   reform   in   witch-baiting 


22  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

took  Its  rise  within  the  Church  as  a  result  of  any 
enlightened  realization  of  its  error,  for  ecclesias- 
tics still  regard  all  mediums  as  enemies  of  truth, 
and  many  would,  if  they  dared,  place  the  heaviest 
penalties  upon  them.  But  the  civil  law  does  not 
permit  of  this,  thanks  to  the  rise  of  reason  and 
common  sense  inculcated  by  noble  and  fearless 
philosophers,  such  as  Voltaire,  Hume,  and  others, 
who  so  earnestly  fought  in  the  past  for  the  right  of 
individual  freedom  of  thought. 

The  attitude  of  many  ecclesiastics  towards  psy- 
chic manifestations  Is  exactly  what  It  was  during 
the  Middle  Ages,  and  except  for  a  few  noble  ex- 
ceptions, they  diligently  close  their  eyes  to  this 
twentieth  century  science.  They  still  talk  about 
the  resurrection  of  one  called  Jesus,  who  lived 
nineteen  hundred  years  ago,  and  remain  In  com- 
plete Ignorance  of  the  fact  that  what  they  call 
resurrection,  takes  place  In  psychic  laboratories 
every  day  throughout  the  world.  They  elaborate 
with  great  emphasis,  and  seeming  reverence,  the 
testimony  regarding  life  after  death  of  St.  Paul 
and  St.  Peter,  of  whose  veracity  they  are  Ignorant, 
and  Ignore  the  testimony  of  living  men  of  Integ- 
rity, who  have  proved  that  all  men  live  after  death 
by  natural  law,  and  can  show  themselves  In  physi- 
cal form  where  the  conditions  which  govern  the 
phenomena  are  provided.     They  still  prefer  the 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  23 

miraculous  to  the  natural,  the  cemetery  of  the  past 
to  the  living  world  of  to-day. 

Some  two  years  ago  a  remarkable  book  was 
published  in  Paris  called  Materialization^  the  work 
of  Baron  von  Schrenck  Notzing,  a  distinguished 
German  physicist,  and  Mme.  Bisson,  widow  of  a 
well-known  Frenchman.  The  book  has  not  yet 
been  translated  into  English  owing  to  the  war, 
but  has  had  a  wonderful  circulation  on  the  Con- 
tinent, creating  widespread  controversy  amongst 
the  most  eminent  professors  owing  to  its  revela- 
tions of  startling  psychic  facts,  by  the  use  of  pho- 
tography, as  to  the  nature  of  the  process  of 
materialization,  by  which  those  who  have  passed 
on  through  death  may  again  clothe  themselves  in 
matter.  The  book  contains  over  200  photographs, 
taken  during  the  experiments  which  were  con- 
ducted for  three  years  in  Paris  by  a  reliable  circle, 
which  included  several  able  physicists.  Up  to  the 
present  the  Christian  Church  has  ignored  the  book. 
This  is  indeed  a  strange  attitude  towards  evidence 
which,  beyond  all  others,  would  help  to  redeem 
Christianity  from  its  materialist  scepticism  and 
revivify  a  dying  institution,  dying  from  want  of 
faith  in  its  original  foundation  truth.  F.  W.  H. 
Myers,  the  nineteenth  century  psychic  scientist,  in 
his  book.  Human  Personality,  vol.  2,  p.  288,  utters 
a  word  to  which  all  Christians  might  well  give 


24  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

heed:  "I  venture  now  on  a  bold  saying:  for  I 
predict  that,  In  consequence  of  the  new  evidence, 
all  reasonable  men  a  century  hence  will  believe  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus,  whereas,  in  default  of  the 
new  evidence,  no  reasonable  man  a  century  hence 
would  have  believed  It." 

Ghostly  visitors,  mysterious  rappings,  levltatlon 
of  solid  articles  of  furniture,  flying  stones,  un- 
accountable bell  ringings,  etc.,  have  always  been 
known,  but  until  recent  years  no  earnest  attempt 
has  been  made  to  understand  the  laws  governing 
such  phenomena.  In  this  country,  as  in  many 
others.  It  was  looked  upon  as  an  Ill-omen  to  see  a 
ghost  or  apparition,  for  the  witnesses  generally 
supposed  that  it  indicated  that  they  or  one  nearly 
related  to  them  would  shortly  die.  This  fear 
naturally  led  all  who  beheld  such  strange  phe- 
nomena to  hastily  retreat,  or  if  seen  while  in  bed, 
to  immediately  draw  the  blankets  over  their  heads 
and  refrain  from  ever  referring  to  it  again.  The 
new  method  of  meeting  a  ghost  Is  very  different, 
since  psychical  research  became  a  science.  A  spon- 
taneous visit  from  a  disembodied  spirit  is  an  honor 
not  too  often  vouchsafed,  and  deserves  to  be  treat- 
ed with  every  respect  and  an  endeavor  to  dis- 
cover the  reason  of  the  visit.  No  longer  Is  the 
so-called  "spirit"  Insulted  by  the  spectator  run- 
ning away,  but  rather  attacked  with  questions  and 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  25 

the  camera  focussed  upon  him  until  he,  instead  of 
the  mortal,  retreats. 

A  great  change  in  the  attitude  of  the  public 
towards  ghosts  began  in  America  in  1847  ^^ 
Rochester,  when  strange  knockings  upon  the  walls 
of  the  home  of  the  Fox  sisters  took  place.  These 
continued  steadily  for  years,  and  attracted  the  at- 
tention of  people  from  all  parts  of  America,  who 
came  to  witness  the  manifestations.  Investigation 
by  men  of  repute  established  the  fact  that  these 
rappings  were  caused  by  intelligent  forces,  and 
were  quite  Independent  of  any  ordinary  means  of 
creation.  Out  of  the  phenomena  at  Rochester 
arose  an  extensive  movement  in  America  called 
Spiritualism,  and  numerous  societies  were  estab- 
lished by  Interested  students  for  the  Investigation 
of  psychic  phenomena,  and  for  the  propaganda  ot 
the  knowledge  obtained.  Similar  societies  quickly 
sprang  up  In  Great  Britain,  France  and  Germany, 
and  an  accumulation  of  facts  of  so  startling  a  na- 
ture were  recorded,  that  in  1870  Sir  William 
Crookes  devoted  several  years  to  a  close  investi- 
gation of  the  subject,  publishing  the  remarkable 
results  in  an  essay  entitled.  Researches  in  the  Phe- 
nomena of  Spiritualism,  and  bearing  testimony 
to  the  facts  on  two  occasions  before  the  British 
Association.  Alfred  Russel  Wallace,  another 
noble  pioneer  among  the  men  of  science  who  inter- 


26  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

ested  themselves  at  this  time,  also  bore  an  un- 
flinching testimony  to  the  reality  of  spirit  inter- 
course in  his  book,  Miracles  and  Modern  Spiritu- 
jalism. 

<  The  Theosophical  Society,  established  for  the 
(  study  of  psychic  science  and  the  various  religions 
of  mankind,  took  its  rise  from  these  early  spirit- 
ualistic movements  in  1875.  It  has  done,  and 
continues  to  do,  valuable  work  in  bringing  be- 
fore the  public  ancient  writings  upon  psychic  sci- 
ence, and  has  also  exercised  a  powerful  influence 
in  stimulating  interest  in  all  forms  of  occult  re- 
search. Its  chief  function  to-day,  however,  is 
rather  theoretical  than  practical,  and  only  a  very 
limited  number  of  its  members  have  any  real  claim 
to  be  called  occultists. 

Through  the  testimony  of  so  many  eminent 
witnesses  of  these  marvels  called  spiritualistic,  and 
in  order  to  test  the  numerous  stories  of  ghosts 
which  were  believed  to  haunt  certain  houses,  the 
Society  for  Psychical  Research  was  formed  in  Eng- 
land in  1882,  and  contains  in  its  large  membership 
many  famous  names.  Professor  Bergson,  of 
Paris,  was  the  President  for  19 15.  Since  then  sim- 
ilar societies  have  been  established  in  various 
parts  of  the  world  under  the  same  name,  notably 
in  France,  Italy,  and  the  United  States.  In  the 
latter,  the  names  of  Professor  William  James  and 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  27 

of  Professor  Hyslop,  of  Harvard,  are  notewor- 
thy. The  annual  conclusions  of  this  Society  are 
published  in  book  form,  and  issued  as  The  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  and 
may  be  seen  in  many  public  libraries  throughout 
Britain.  Like  many  other  institutions,  the  method 
of  the  Society  is  somewhat  conservative,  and  in- 
clined to  be  painfully  slow.  Its  conclusions  will 
seem  somewhat  dry  and  involved  to  the  ordinary 
reader,  but  good  work  in  explanation  of  telepathy 
and  hypnotism  has  been  done. 

It  would  be  difficult  to  estimate  the  number  of 
individuals  in  England,  America,  France,  and  Ger- 
many who  are  directly  or  indirectly  interested  in 
spirit  intercourse,  but  their  numbers  now  reach 
many  millions,  and  year  by  year  rapidly  increase. 
The  great  loss  of  life  occasioned  by  the  war  is 
bringing  many  investigators  into  touch  with  soci- 
eties which  can  demonstrate  the  truth  that  life 
persists  after  death,  and  this  knowledge  reacting 
on  the  general  public,  and  on  religious  and  social 
problems,  must  gradually  elevate  and  inspire  the 
future  conduct  of  many  institutions  seeking  to 
make  way  for  better  days  for  humanity. 

One  of  the  great  difficulties  attending  the  sub- 
ject of  spirit  intercourse  to-day  is  the  limited  num- 
ber of  well-developed  mediums  available  for  pub- 
lic use.     In  nearly  every  town  of  any  size  there 


28  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

are  to  be  found  people  with  mediumistic  gifts  par- 
tially developed.  These  are  chiefly  to  be  found 
among  the  working-class  population,  and  their 
services  are  often  given  quite  freely,  or  are  recom- 
pensed so  poorly  that  they  are  unable  to  supply  an 
environment  suitable  for  scientific  investigation. 
So  powerful,  too,  has  been  the  prejudice  against 
those  practising  their  psychic  gifts  professionally, 
chiefly  from^  the  antipathy  and  teaching  of  the 
Church,  that  the  work  has  been  largely  neglected 
by  the  cultured  classes,  and  left  in  the  hands  of 
those  who  are  principally  outside  the  religious 
bodies  and  indifferent  to  criticism. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  mediums  are  usually 
drawn  from  what  are  termed  the  uneducated 
classes.  This  is  to  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact 
that  those  who  have  received  a  liberal  training  in 
a  school  or  college  have  become  too  positive  for 
their  minds  to  be  easily  influenced  by  spiritual 
forces.  The  reader  must  not  assume,  however, 
that  this  Implies  that  mediums  possess  weak  men- 
tality. It  only  means  that  their  minds  are  more 
plastic  than  those  who  are  full  of  their  own  and 
others'  set  Ideas.  Works  of  a  highly  original 
nature  are  not  often  produced  by  those  called 
"school-men,"  such  have  usually  been  given  to  the 
world  by  men  and  women  often  regarded  by  their 
compeers  as  technically  uneducated.     This   fact 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  29 

accords  with  the  prev-ious  statement,  but  an  ex- 
planation of  it  can  only  be  fully  grasped  by  a  study 
of  psychology  and  the  facts  of  psychic  science. 
The  time  may  rapidly  be  approaching  when  mem- 
bers of  the  cultured  classes  will  devote  more  time 
and  money  to  their  own  and  others'  training  in 
order  to  give  more  suitable  conditions  for  the 
cultivation  and  demonstration  of  spiritual  gifts; 
but  without  the  brave  and  persistent  efforts  of 
the  humble  sensitives  who  continued  to  exercise 
their  gifts,  often  in  the  face  of  fines  and  impris- 
onment, many  would  still  be  in  the  grip  of  a  ma- 
terialistic philosophy,  and  the  world  owes  such 
workers  a  great  debt  for  labors  performed  most 
heroically  and  cheerfully. 

When  schools  and  colleges  are  established  for 
the  training  of  students  in  this  science  astonishing 
results  will  be  achieved,  and  that  time  may  be  ad- 
vanced by  the  sympathetic  help  and  attention  of 
men  and  women  of  leisure  and  means  who  have 
profited  from  the  science,  and  realize  how  greatly 
humanity,  as  a  whole,  would  benefit  if  its  truths 
were  more  generally  known. 

Some  scientific  minds  still  vigorously  attack 
psychic  phenomena,  but  the  majority  are  now  ex- 
ceedingly careful  of  their  utterances  regarding  it. 
Sir  Ray  Lankester  Is  amongst  those  who  deny 
that  it  has  any  right  to  be  called  a  science.    Science 


30  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

means  actual  knowledge,  ascertained  by  observa- 
tion, experience  and  Induction,  and  psychic  science 
Is  understood  exactly  In  this  sense.  It  is  acknowl- 
edged that  Sir  Ray  Lankester  is  a  material  scien- 
tist of  no  mean  standing,  but  until  he  is  prepared 
to  investigate  psychic  forces  In  a  serious  and  sym- 
pathetic fashion,  his  judgment  on  the  matter  may 
be  regarded  as  a  pure  opinion,  and  not  a  scientific 
pronouncement.  No  man  can  fail  to  prove  the 
genuineness  of  these  facts  who  is  willing  to  de- 
vote such  necessary  time  and  attention  as  he  would 
give  to  any  other  branch  of  study,  and  the  major- 
ity of  those  who  do  investigate  have  to  acknowl- 
edge that  the  spiritualistic  hypothesis  is  the  only 
one   which  covers   all  the   facts   available. 

The  writer  is  proud  to  call  himself  a  rationalist, 
remembering  how  much  good  work  has  been  ac- 
complished by  rationalists  in  the  past,  but  those 
who  ignore  any  law  in  nature,  testified  to  as  fact 
by  reliable  witnesses,  who  have  nothing  to  gain 
by  doing  so,  are  no  longer  entitled  to  the  name  of 
Rationalist,  but  are  rather  enemies  to  progressive 
thought.  Millions  of  intelligent  people  through- 
out the  world  have  examined  the  phenomena  for 
themselves,  and  according  to  Alfred  Russel  Wal- 
lace, ten  times  as  much  proof  is  forthcoming  as  to 
its  reality  as  would  be  demanded  In  any  other 
branch  of  science. 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  3  I 

If  psychic  manifestation  was  only  due  to  acci- 
dent, then  it  would  be  impossible  for  many  occult 
workers  to  demonstrate  their  psychic  powers  day 
after  day  in  the  music-halls  and  on  public  plat- 
forms throughout  the  world  as  they  now  do.  The 
manifestations  known  as  spiritualistic  phenomena 
are  dealt  with  in  the  following  pages,  and  an 
explanation  supplied  of  the  occult  forces  at  work 
whereby  these  are  accomplished. 

The  methods  by  which  the  psychic  scientist 
arrives  at  his  results  in  these  pages  may  seem 
somewhat  complex  to  the  amateur,  but  the  evi- 
dences rest  upon  actuality  no  less  real  than  those 
of  any  other  material  science.  While  results  vaiy 
considerably  owing  to  the  human  factor  involved 
in  all  psychic  manifestations,  yet  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  accident  or  chance  governing  them,  for 
all  manifestation  throughout  life,  whether  that  of 
material  or  spiritual  science,  is  ordered  and  con- 
trolled by  the  laws  of  nature. 

Those  underlying  some  of  the  manifestations 
are  difficult  to  comprehend,  because  of  the  subtle 
forces  working  behind  the  phenomena,  and  because 
these  forces  are  beyond  material-sense  perception, 
without  the  use  of  instruments,  but  this  difficulty 
is  not  one  confined  alone  to  psychic  science.  If 
in  psychic  manifestation  the  conditions  are  pro- 
vided, the  results  are  always  the  same.     The  law 


32  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

whereby  a  ghost  can  be  materialized  to-day  or  to- 
morrow, at  home  or  abroad,  at  five  o'clock  or  ten 
o'clock,  during  the  night  or  the  morning,  as  may 
be  desired.  Is  known  just  as  thoroughly  to  the  psy- 
chic scientist  as  the  law  governing  electricity  is 
known  to  the  electrician. 

One  of  the  principal  difficulties  which  meets 
every  psychic  scientist  Is  that  of  obtaining  the 
right  material  or  instrument  for  producing  the 
phenomena,  but  just  as  an  electrician  through  long 
years  of  study  and  practice  has  secured  the  mech- 
anism and  material  for  supplying  electric  power 
and  light,  so  will  the  psychic  scientist  by  similar 
study  and  experiment  succeed  more  and  more  as 
the  years  advance,  in  procuring  the  necessary  ma- 
terial for  psychic  manifestations,  and  will  be  able 
to  provide  with  much  more  certainty  results  that 
are  to-day  secured  with  difficulty. 

Every  psychic  scientist  who  wishes  to  produce 
materialized  forms  or  the  manifestation  of  spirit- 
ual powers,  requires  a  psychically  developed  man 
or  woman  of  such  a  constitution  as  will  provide 
the  necessary  conditions.  Such  a  medium  can  be 
manufactured  by  the  scientist,  provided  he  has 
time,  and  can  find  one  who  is  willing  to  devote 
himself  to  psychic  development.  The  various  In- 
struments used  are  as  follows: 

I.  A    materializing    medium,    i.e.,    one    from 


FACTS   WORTH    KNOWING  33 

whose  body  can  be  culled  that  essence,  which,  when 
solidified,  provides  conditions  for  a  spirit  to  con- 
struct a  physical  form  in  which  to  manifest. 

2.  A  photographing  medium,  i.e.,  one  from 
whose  body  may  be  drawn  emanations  to  clothe 
the  spirit  form  to  be  photographed. 

3.  A  clairvoyant  medium,  i.e.,  one  who  has  de- 
veloped a  sight  w^hich  can  look  into  planes  of 
superphysical  matter. 

4.  A  clairaudient  and  telepathic  medium,  i.e., 
one  who  Is  able  to  receive  sound  and  thought 
w^aves  from  those  functioning  in  the  superphysical 
world. 

5.  An  Impressionable  or  trance  medium,  who 
can  be  controlled  by  discarnate  intelligences. 

With  these  Instruments  any  ordinary  person 
may  conclusively  prove  all  that  Is  asserted  In  this 
book  without  any  prolonged  study  or  development. 

From  Instructions  received  from  spiritual  beings 
one  may  learn,  but  only  after  prolonged  study  and 
practice,  how  to  detach  one's  own  soul  from  the 
physical  body,  enter  into  spiritual  spheres,  see  for 
oneself  that  world  which  men  dwell  in  after  death, 
and  bring  back  Into  the  conscious  brain  a  clear  re- 
membrance of  all  that  has  been  seen,  touched,  or 
heard  while  functioning  in  these  spiritual  spheres. 
This  latter  development  few  will  be  able  to  secure, 
for  It  requires  long,  persistent,  self-sacrificing  prac- 


34  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

tices  to  accomplish  it,  which  few  are  willing  to 
make,  n^r  is  it  advisable,  except  for  those  who 
wish  to  become  teachers  of  advanced  spiritual 
knowledge.  The  reader  must  understand,  how- 
ever, that  in  psychic  science  the  material  evi- 
dence is  procurable  through  man's  ordinary  senses 
by  his  eyes,  ears,  hands,  nose,  mouth,  and  with 
the  full  use  of  his  reason,  which  is  all  that  any 
physicist  employs.  Other  instruments  of  a  most 
delicate  nature  are  sometimes  employed,  but  these 
need  not  here  be  detailed.  Some  of  the  simpler 
ones  are  mentioned  in  the  chapter  on  ^'First  Steps 
to  Spirit  Intercourse"  as  suitable  for  use  by  stu- 
dents just  entering  into  the  subject. 


CHAPTER  II 

SCIENCE    OF    THE    SOUL 

The  records  of  the  Society  for  Psychical  Re- 
search have  actually  proved  to  my  mind,  first,  sur- 
vival pure  and  siiuple,  the  persistence  of  the  spir- 
it's life,  as  a  structural  law  of  the  universe;  sec- 
ond, that  between  the  spiritual  and  the  material 
worlds  an  avenue  of  communication  does  in  fact 
exist;  third,  that  the  surviving  spirit  retains,  at 
least  in  some  measure,  the  memories  and  loves 
of  the  earth, — F.  W.  H.  Myers,  Poet  and  Essay- 
ist. 

WHILE  many  theologians  and  rationalists 
have  been  laboriously  marking  time, 
psychic  scientists  have  been  pressing  for- 
ward at  a  daily  accelerated  speed  during  the  pres- 
ent century,  and  are  now  ready  to  present  their 
carefully  verified  facts  for  the  consideration  of 
the  general  public.  The  great  crisis  which  has 
come  upon  the  nations  compels  all,  who  have  any 
reliable  sources  of  knowledge  which  can  add  to 

35 


36  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  faith  and  comfort  of  the  world,  to  disclose 
them.  Many,  both  within  and  without  the 
Church,  and  in  the  ranks  of  free-thought,  have 
from  time  to  time  cast  inquisitive  and  uneasy 
glances  at  the  "Cinderella  of  the  Sciences,"  and 
have  wondered  whether  she  would  really  develop 
into  a  true  princess.  Their  anxiety  may  now  be 
set  at  rest,  for  she  has  grown  big  enough  and 
gracious  enough  to  be  presented  for  their  courte- 
ous examination. 

Psychical  science  has,  amongst  other  things,  con- 
clusively proved : 

1.  That  at  the  death  of  the  body  man  continues 
to  function  as  a  conscious  being. 

2.  That  he  functions  after  death  in  a  refined 
spirit-body  or  soul,  which  has  substance  and 
weight,  and  which  can  be  seen  and  photographed. 

3.  That  this  soul  existed  within  the  physical 
body  during  life,  and  is  organic,  having  brain, 
nerves,  blood-vessels,  heart,  etc. 

4.  That  the  soul  can  communicate  in  various 
ways  with  persons  on  earth  both  before  and  after 
death. 

5.  That  the  world  in  which  the  soul  dwells  after 
the  death  of  the  body,  lies  immediately  around 
the  physical  earth. 

6.  That  a  man  while  alive  may  leave  his  physi- 
cal body,  and  by  the  use  of  his  soul,  may  explore 


SCIENCE   OF   THE    SOUL  37 

spheres  of  refined  physical  states,  commonly  called 
the  spiritual  world. 

THE  SOUL. 

The  soul  of  man  has  ever  been  one  of  the  most 
profoundly  interesting  of  studies  to  the  human 
race.  The  term  "soul"  has  rather  an  obscure 
meaning  in  the  English  language,  for  it  is  used 
sometimes  to  indicate  the  "ego"  or  thinking  part 
of  man,  and  at  other  times  to  describe  his  spirit- 
body,  and  this  alternative  use  of  the  word  has  led 
to  much  confusion  of  thought.  It  will,  therefore, 
be  necessary  to  define  the  meaning  of  the  word 
as  used  in  this  book.  Man,  in  ancient  Scriptures, 
has  been  described  as  a  triune  being,  viz. :  Body, 
Soul,  and  Spirit.  This  description,  though  not 
scientifically  correct,  roughly  maps  out  his  three 
great  divisions.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  soul 
of  man  has  seven  envelopes  or  bodies,  one  within 
the  other,  and  these  are  used  by  the  spirit  on 
each  of  the  seven  planes  of  the  spiritual  world  to 
which  he  rises  after  death.  Let  it  be  understood 
that  these  seven  bodies  intermingle  with  each  other 
atomically,  much  in  the  same  way  as  various  gases 
might  interblend,  and  do  not  lie  as  skins,  one 
within  the  other.  Taking  man,  therefore,  as  a 
triune  being,  the  Body  refers  to  that  physical  form 
which  at  death  is  buried,  decomposes,  and  returns 


38  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

to  dust.  The  Soul  Is  the  spirit-body,  a  superphysi- 
cal  counterpart  of  man's  physical,  which,  when 
seen,  Is  often  referred  to  as  a  "ghost."  The 
Spirit  of  man  Is  that  which  Is  often  termed  the 
"ego"  or  thinking  part  of  man,  which,  so  far  as 
psychic  science  is  concerned.  Is  a  mystery  and  form- 
less, but  which  animates  the  soul.  Having  mas- 
tered these  definitions  by  terms — ^body,  soul,  and 
spirit — the  reader  will  do  well  to  remember  them, 
and  to  note,  that  where  the  words,  a  "spirit"  or 
"spirits,"  are  used  to  describe  those  in  the  spirit 
spheres,  the  term  Is  used  for  convenience,  and  is 
meant  to  imply  the  combination  of  "soul"  and 
"ego."  Before  describing  the  soul,  it  is  necessary 
to  remark,  that  the  physical  body  is  thrown  off 
by  the  soul  at  death,  returns  to  the  dust  from 
which  it  originated,  and  is  never  resurrected  as 
has  been  so  irrationally  taught  and  believed  by 
many  religious  teachers.  Such  a  conception  is  to- 
day unworthy  of  serious  discussion  by  intelligent 
readers  In  the  light  of  our  knowledge  of  chemical 
action  and  the  laws  affecting  the  decomposition  of 
all  matter. 

The  soul  of  man  is  a  superphysical  structure, 
so  refined  in  Its  nature  that  It  is  invisible  to  ordi- 
nary eyesight.  It  is  animated  by  the  spirit,  and 
gives  form  to  the  living  physical  body  of  man 
which  is  built  upon  It.     The  soul  dwells  within 


Tojnce  p.  38 


BODY 

(physical; 


SOUL 

(ghost) 


SPIRIT 

(EGOj 


MAN    AS    A    TRIUNE    BEING 


SCIENCE    OF   THE    SOUL  39 

the  physical  body  of  man  during  his  life  on  earth, 
and  withdraws  at  death,  continuing  to  function  in 
spiritual  spheres.  Within  the  soul  are  to  be  found 
organs,  exactly  duplicating  those  of  the  physical 
body,  even  to  the  minutest  atom,  brain,  blood-ves- 
sels, nerves,  heart,  lungs,  etc.,  all  composed  of 
superphysical  matter.  In  outward  shape  it  is  ex- 
actly similar  to  the  human  form,  and  in  facial  and 
general  appearance  bears  the  closest  resemblance 
to  the  physical  body. 

The  author  is  not  here  prepared  to  enter  into 
any  discussion  as  to  the  origin  of  the  soul  of  man 
before  birth.  He  considers  it,  however,  as  certain, 
that  it  had  an  individual  existence  before  birth 
into  the  physical  form,  and  by  the  power  of  the 
spirit  is  the  moulder  of  the  physical  body,  but  such 
proofs  as  one  could  term  scientific  are  not  yet 
forthcoming.  The  soul  of  man  born  into  the 
womb  of  woman  at  conception,  grows  and  expands 
to  maturity  along  with  the  physical  body  of  the 
foetus,  but  after  maturity  does  not  become  decrepit 
or  atrophied  in  its  atomic  structure,  like  the  physi- 
cal. It  takes  upon  itself  the  outward  appearance 
of  age,  along  with  its  physical  form,  but  when 
freed  by  death  from  the  body  gradually  resumes 
buoyant  maturity.  This,  however,  is  governed  by 
the  spirit  within,  and  will  be  explained  in  a  later 
chapter  on   "Life   After   Death." 


40  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

It  may  be  asked  what  evidence  psychic  science 
can  produce  to  prove  that  the  soul  has  a  similar 
organic  structure  to  that  of  the  physical  body. 
Such  evidence  Is  provided  through  clairvoyance 
and  in  the  seance  room.  Though  unseen  by  the 
ordinary  physical  eyesight,  the  soul  Is  clearly  seen 
when  it  separates  from  the  body  at  death,  by  those 
who  possess  clairvoyant  sight,  and  who  place  them- 
selves en  rapport.  It  has  been  described  on  thou- 
sands of  occasions  as  resembling  In  every  way 
the  earth-body  as  far  as  form  goes.  It  would 
therefore  be  Irrational  to  suppose  that  organs  such 
as  eyes,  ears,  nose,  and  mouth,  which  are  clearly 
seen  to  be  used  by  a  spirit,  did  not  have  corre- 
sponding internal  nerves  attached  to  a  brain  centre 
within  the  soul.  But  the  best  evidence  for  their 
existence  Is  found  in  the  seance  room,  where  dis- 
carnate  beings,  who  once  lived  on  earth,  return 
from  spiritual  spheres  and  show  therriselves  in  a 
body  which  reproduces  the  physical  form  laid 
down  at  death  in  all  its  organic  details.  Materi- 
alization is  a  purely  physical  proof,  and  when  It 
takes  place  can  be  seen  by  all  present.  Clairvoy- 
ance depends  upon  the  individual  testimony  of 
one  who  can  see  matter  in  its  higher  rates  of 
vibration.  A  third  proof  is  furnished  by  the  tested 
and  assured  fact  of  spirit  photography.  It  is  also 
testified  to  by  discarnate  beings,  who  state  that  in- 


SCIENCE   OF   THE   SOUL  4I 

ternal  organs  are  still  used  by  them  in  the  spiritual 
world,  but  this  cannot  be  offered  as  scientific  proof. 
The  matter  of  which  the  "soul"  of  man  is  com- 
posed is  of  such  a  refined  nature  as  to  be  invis- 
ible to  ordinary  eyesight,  br.t  is  nevertheless  real. 
It  has  a  luminous  or  phosphorescent  appearance 
when  seen  by  a  clairvoyant,  and  also  when  it  be- 
comes visible  to  the  physical  eyesight  of  man  as  a 
ghost.  Souls  at  death  vary  considerably,  both  in 
weight  and  in  appearance.  Where  the  life  has 
been  virtuous,  the  spirit-body  is  both  lighter  in 
weight  and  in  coloring  than  where  one  has  spent 
his  earthly  years  in  a  gross  form  of  living.  In 
the  case  of  the  latter,  the  soul,  in  coloring  and 
appearance,  is  very  similar  to  a  cobweb,  and 
weighs  somewhere  about  one  ounce,  whereas  the 
soul  of  a  spiritual  man  at  death  may  weigh  less 
than  one-sixteenth  of  an  ounce.  This  extreme 
density  of  the  soul  is  of  very  brief  duration,  and 
within  the  first  hour  succeeding  death  seventy-five 
per  cent  of  the  grosser  matter  composing  it  will 
evaporate.  The  portion  of  the  soul  which  evapo- 
rates may  be  sensed  by  many  people  in  the  death- 
chamber  by  its  peculiar  pungent  odor,  and  where 
soul  projection  takes  place  in  a  materializing 
laboratory,  the  same  odor  is  often  noticed.  In 
physical  life  the  soul  of  man  may  partly  leave 
the  body,   during  sleep,  in  a   fainting  fit,  under 


42  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

anaesthetics,  or  In  advanced  states  of  hypnosis.  In 
all  such  cases  It  must  be  clearly  understood  that 
the  soul  Is  only  partly  separated  from  the  physical 
form.  An  Illustration  will  be  found  facing  page 
48,  showing  the  soul  of  a  dead  soldier  leaving  the 
body,  and  hovering  In  an  unconscious  state  about 
a  foot  above  It,  but  still  connected  by  a  fine  lumi- 
nous cord,  attached  to  the  feet  of  the  soul  and  to 
the  head  of  the  physical  body.  When  this  lumi- 
nous cord,  which  the  author  terms  the  "psychic  um- 
bilical cord,"  severs,  death  is  complete,  and  the 
soul  is  free.  This  cord  is  composed  of  many  fine 
strands,  each  strand  running  from  the  brain,  lungs, 
heart,  etc.,  of  the  spirit  body,  or  soul,  to  the  brain, 
lungs,  heart,  etc.,  of  the  physical  body.  The  soul, 
when  it  leaves  the  body  of  man  at  death,  escapes 
through  the  skull  suture,  but  in  sleep  or  trance  It 
issues  from  the  region  of  the  chest,  and  by  this 
means  holds  a  vital  connecting  link  with  the  bodily 
organs.  Even  though  the  soul  may  be  separated 
from  the  living  body  by  a  thousand  miles,  the 
elastic  nature  of  the  connecting  cord  allows  full 
freedom.  So  long  as  the  soul  controls  the  physical 
organism  through  the  psychic  cord,  the  laws  of 
decomposition  cannot  attack  the  body,  but  once  the 
cord  is  severed,  death  Inevitably  takes  place. 

It  has  been  claimed  In   ancient  writings  that 
Jesus  raised  the  dead,  but  psychic  science  declares 


SCIENCE    OF   THE    SOUL  43 

that  where  the  psychic  cord  has  been  completely 
severed,  nothing  can  reunite  the  soul  and  the  body. 
The  incidents  recordeci  can  be  accounted  for,  when 
we  remember  how  easily  the  uninstructed  may  mis- 
take the  trance  state  for  death,  and  it  is  just  pos- 
sible that  this  explains  the  stories  of  the  raising 
of  the  dead  recorded  in  the  New  Testament. 
There  are  numerous  cases  on  record  where  indi- 
viduals have  been  placed  in  their  coffins  as  dead, 
and  who  have  awakened  just  before  burial.  There 
have  also  been  cases  known  where  people  have 
been  buried  alive  by  their  relatives,  who  were 
under  the  belief  that  they  w^ere  dead,  when  in 
reality  the  so-called  dead  were  in  trance  or  sus- 
pended animation,  this  being  presumed  from  evi- 
dences available  within  the  coffins  at  a  subsequent 
date.  The  only  sure  sign  of  death  is  the  begin- 
ning of  decomposition.  The  trance  state,  simu- 
lating death,  is  more  common  in  the  East  than 
amongst  Europeans,  owing  to  the  nature  and  hab- 
its of  the  people.  Indian  fakirs  can  eject  their\ 
souls,  and  allow  the  physical  body  to  be  placed 
in  a  sealed  coffin,  to  be  buried  many  feet  beneath' 
the  ground,  and  to  remain  there  for  several 
months.  When  dug  up  and  brought  to  the  surface,  ( 
the  seals  broken  and  the  coffin  opened,  the  body  \ 
will  be  found  in  trance,  but  fresh  and  healthy,  / 
and  within  a  few  hours  will  be  able  to  resume  ^ 


44  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

normal  life.  In  such  a  case  the  psychic  cord  has 
remained  Intact,  while  the  soul  during  these 
months  has  dwelt  in  spiritual  spheres.  When  such 
facts  are  known  to  science,  the  story  of  Jesus 
bringing  the  dead  to  life  can  be  understood  as  an 
error  of  judgment  on  the  part  of  the  historian. 
At  least  It  would  be  rational  for  us  to  accept  this 
explanation,  rather  than  the  miraculous  one,  es- 
pecially when  Jesus  himself  refers  to  some  of  the 
cases  as  being  "asleep."  It  is  quite  possible  that 
Jesus,  possessing  clairvoyant  sight,  as  we  may 
judge  from  other  Incidents,  saw  the  soul  of  the  so- 
called  "dead"  person,  still  attached  to  the  physical 
body,  or  he  may  have  received  Information  by 
other  psychic  means,  that  the  Individual  termed 
dead  was  merely  entranced. 

Those  who  leave  the  body  during  sleep  or  trance 
usually  function  upon  the  first,  second  or  third 
sphere  of  the  spiritual  world.  The  strange  experi- 
ences of  the  soul  in  these  states  can  frequently  be 
remembered  when  a  return  Is  made  to  normal  con- 
sciousness, but  some  are  Incapable  of  remembering 
anything  at  all  of  their  superphysical  journeys. 
A  variety  of  causes  may  explain  this  difference, 
but  it  Is  principally  due  to  the  inability  of  some 
to  bring  back  the  memory  of  their  subconscious 
experiences  into  the  conscious  physical  brain,  while 
others  have  only  a  confused  memory  of  what  they 


SCIENCE   OF   THE    SOUL  45 

have  been  about,  as  if  it  were  a  dream.  When  it 
is  realized  that  it  is  the  separated  brain  organism 
of  the  soul  that  is  used  during  sleep  or  trance, 
and  not  the  physical  brain,  a  clearer  understanding 
of  why  many  are  unable  to  remember  subconscious 
experiences  will  be  evident.  Let  it  be  fully  under- 
stood that  a  soul,  while  the  physical  body  is  asleep, 
may  be  detached  from  the  body  and  wander  into 
spiritual  spheres,  or  visit  other  persons  and  places 
on  earth.  While  this  goes  on  the  physical  brain 
Is  completely  ignorant  of  the  fact,  and  it  is  only 
upon  the  return  of  the  soul  into  the  physical  or- 
ganism that  it  is  able  to  reflect  its  soul  experi- 
ences upon  the  physical  brain.  In  the  great  major- 
ity of  cases,  however,  the  soul  entirely  fails  to 
bring  back  into  the  physical  consciousness  any  re- 
membrance whatever,  but  the  experience  is  not 
obliterated  so  far  as  the  soul  brain  is  concerned, 
for  it  retains  a  permanent  record  which  acts  as  the 
subconscious  memory.  Dim  memories  of  visits  to 
strange  surroundings  and  strange  people  while 
asleep  are  often  referred  to  as  dreams,  but  they 
are  nevertheless  often  very  real  incidents.  Such 
dreams  are  at  times  so  startling,  that  the  spirit 
easily  brings  them  back  into  the  physical  brain 
and  imprints  the  vivid  incidents  upon  it,  so  that 
they  are  clearly,  remembered  on  awakening,  but 
where  the  experiences  are  of  a  simple  and  ordi- 


46  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

nary  kind,  it  frequently  happens  that  they  are  not 
sufficiently  impressed  to  be  reflected  by  the  spirit- 
ual brain  upon  the  physical.  The  spirit  or  con- 
scious ego  of  the  soul  needs  development,  if  men 
desire  to  remember  their  dreams,  and  this  can  be 
done  by  certain  occult  practices  known  to  psychic 
students.  The  action  of  the  subconscious  memory, 
which  has  been  so  misunderstood,  and  has  led  to 
many  complications  in  the  understanding  of  psychic 
law,  especially  by  the  Psychical  Research  Society, 
is  nothing  more  than  the  memory  of  our  soul 
brain,  which  holds  within  it  facts  learnt  in  super- 
physical  states,  but  which  it  has  not  been  able  to 
bring  into  the  conscious  memory  or  physical  brain. 
These  can  be  tapped  in  hypnotic  states.  The  more 
refined  the  physical  brain,  the  more  clearly  will  it 
receive  the  imprint  of  the  subconscious  experiences 
of  the  soul.  For  this  reason  individuals  of  a  gross 
nature  seldom  remember  their  dreams,  but  the 
highly  developed  man  and  woman,  such  as  the  poet 
and  artist,  find  many  helpful  suggestions  through 
the  inspiration  of  dreams.  The  ordinary  man 
laughs  at  them,  and  supposes  all  dreams  to  have 
their  origin  in  the  stomach,  or  in  a  lively  imagina- 
tion. This  belief  is  partly  correct,  and  is  not  at 
all  unreasonable  when  one  considers  the  kind  of 
dream  that  is  frequently  related  at  the  breakfast 
table.    But  from  time  to  time  his  complacent  theo- 


SCIENCE    OF   THE    SOUL  47 

rles  are  rudely  disturbed  when  he  has  a  particular- 
ly vivid  dream,  or  when  his  wife  or  some  other 
friend  relates  dreams  which  show  cognizance  of 
Incidents  taking  place  thousands  of  miles  away, 
quite  unknown  to  the  dreamer's  physical  conscious- 
ness, and  which  are  subsequently  verified,  or  when 
coming  events  are  predicted  which  in  due  course 
occur. 

HYPNOTIC  EXPERIMENTS  WITH  THE  SOUL. 

The  soul  of  man  may  be  ejected  from  the  physi- 
cal body  of  a  sensitive  subject,  by  a  hypnotist, 
through  the  operation  of  magnetic  passes  and  the 
exercise  of  will  power.  The  professional  hypno- 
tist is  usually  ignorant  of  this  fact  even  when  he 
has  accomplished  it,  for  many  exercising  this  power 
are  quite  ignorant  of  psychic  science.  He  may 
not  see  the  ejected  soul,  nor  its  connecting  cord 
with  the  physical,  although  he  can  perceive  some 
of  its  effects.  Professors  of  the  art  divide  hyp- 
notic sleep  into  three,  six,  or  nine  degrees,  but 
these  are  purely  artificial  divisions.  In  the  case 
of  a  subject  fully  hypnotized,  in  what  one  might 
term  the  ninth  degree,  the  soul  is  fully  expelled 
from  the  body.  While  in  this  state  a  lancet  may 
be  driven  Into  the  flesh  without  the  subject  being 
conscious  of  any  pain.  The  reason  for  this  Is 
not  generally  understood,  but  It  results  from  the 


48  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

fact  that  the  soul  of  the  subject  Is  at  that  moment 
standing  outside  the  physical  body,  and  while  there 
the  body  is  not  susceptible  to  pain  or  any  sense 
of  feeling,  for  it  Is  through  the  soul  that  the 
spirit  of  man  senses  pain.  The  soul  of  a  hypno- 
tized subject  may  be  despatched  upon  an  errand 
by  the  mere  suggestion  of  the  hypnotist,  and  travel 
long  distances,  entering  closed  rooms,  and  may 
describe  through  its  physical  organism  all  that  it 
witnesses  by  means  of  the  psychic  cord,  which 
connects  it  with  the  physical  body  like  a  telephone 
wire.  Such  exhibitions  are  uncommon,  for  there 
are  but  a  limited  number  of  subjects  sufficiently 
sensitive  to  be  capable  of  such  a  performance. 

TRANSITION  THROUGH  DEATH. 

Having  explained  something  of  the  nature  and 
powers  of  the  soul,  it  will  now  be  possible  for 
readers  to  understand  that  natural  process  called 
(death,  which  has  to  many  appeared  a  most  mysteri- 
ous and  often  cruel  operation  of  nature.  This 
need  no  longer  be  the  case,  for  the  phenomena  of 
death  is  now  well  understood  by  the  occult  scien- 
tist. In  the  light  of  the  new  science  death  loses 
its  terrifying  aspect,  and  appears  nothing  more 
than  a  necessary  and  entirely  natural  transition,  a 
birth  into  a  higher  and  nobler  state.  Theology, 
both  Christian  and  pagan,  has  cast  around  death 


man's  soul  departing  from  body  at  death 

SHOWING  THE  PSYCHIC  UMBILICAL  CORD 

From  a  painting  by  G.  Parlby,  under  the  direction  of  J.  Hewat  McKenzie  To  face  p.  48 


CO*       ^ 


SCIENCE   OF   THE   SOUL  49 

theories  both  repulsive  and  foolish,  and  through 
this  teaching  fear  has  entered  Into  the  hearts  of 
civilized  men  such  as  a  natural  man  would  never 
have  imagined.  (Psychic  science  proves  conclusive- 
ly that  death  is  something  to  be  met  calmly,  and 
accepted  as  a  boon  by  the  whole  human  family 
when  it  occurs  in  a  normal  way.)  When  death 
overtakes  the  young,  or  those  in  the  prime  of  life, 
grief  is  excusable,  but  a  knowledge  of  psychic  sci- 
ence will  make  this  also  wear  a  more  natural  and 
less  sorrowful  aspect.  If  through  the  doors  of 
death  there  is  a  world  of  life,  love,  and  light,  there 
Is  no  need  for  the  tears  and  mourning  we  spend 
on  our  loved  ones,  and  If  In  addition  we  can  see 
them  or  hear  from  them,  then  death  loses  the 
power  to  sting,  and  the  grave  is  robbed  of  vic- 
tory. A  few  after  death  may  reside  In  darkness, 
sadness,  and  despair  for  a  time,  but  this  applies 
only  to  those  who  have  lived  an  extremely  savage. 
Ignorant,  and  cruel  existence  here/^for  the  great 
majority  of  mankind  immediately  after  death  pass 
on  to  rejoice  in  a  life  superior  to  that  of  earth. 
What  occurs  at  the  moment  of  death,  when  the 
soul  slips  away  from  its  fleshly  tenement,  varies 
somewhat,  according  to  the  cause  of  death  and  the 
age  of  the  individual.  The  separation  of  a  soul 
from  its  body  Is  in  some  cases  slow,  and  in  others 
rapid,  for  such  separation  may  begin  months  be- 


so  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

fore  death,  as  in  the  case  of  old  age,  lingering 
illness  or  disease,  whereas  with  those, in  the  prime 
of  life,  days  and  weeks  may  elapse  before  sever- 
ance is  thoroughly  completed,  even  after  the  body 
is  buried.  Death,  which  appears  to  some  mor- 
tals as  a  horrible  nightmare,  often  comes  to  the 
individual  experiencing  it  as  a  sweet  sleep  and  a 
pleasant  awakening  on  the  other  side  within  a  few 
hours,  surrounded  by  loving  friends  and  the  beau- 
ties of  celestial  scenery.  The  twitching  face  and 
chilled  body,  which  disturb  the  onlooker  at  a  death- 
bed, are  usually  unfelt  by  the  departing  spirit, 
the  twitching  being  due  to  the  tentacles  of  the  soul 
snapping  from  the  nerve  centres  of  the  body. 

The  life  of  man  lies  within  the  soul,  and  when 
it  is  completely  severed  from  the  body,  as  at  death, 
the  latter  immediately  begins  to  decay.  The  idea 
that  man's  physical  organism  leads  a  separate  and 
individual  existence  of  its  own  is  a  popular  de- 
lusion. The  whole  physical  structure  of  man  is, 
during  life,  permeated  and  controlled  by  the  soul, 
which  interpenetrates  every  nerve  cell  and  atom, 
holds  the  physical  together,  and  protects  it  against 
dissolution.  ,  The  living  inner  force  of  man  which 
we  call  life  is  still  a  mystery  to  the  majority  of  the 
human  race,  and  even  those  whose  work  it  is  to 
understand  the  body  and  keep  it  from  disease,  are 
equally   ignorant,   and  labor  under  many  wrong 


SCIENCE   OF   THE   SOUL  5 1 

Ideas  concerning  the  seat  of  life.  This  state  of 
affairs  is  likely  to  last  for  centuries,  unless  in  the 
medical  curriculum  practical  psychology  is  includ- 
ed as  an  integral  part  of  study.  Professors  of 
medicine  still  teach  that  man's  blood  is  pumped 
through  the  blood-vessels  by  the  heart,  and  are 
seemingly  quite  ignorant  of  the  fact  that  the  en- 
ergy of  a  thousand  hearts  would  be  insufficient  to 
pump  the  blood  through  the  miles  of  blood-vessels 
of  the  human  body.  (They  are  unconscious  of 
the  fact  that  the  heart,  instead  of  acting  as  an 
engine  of  energy,  is  just  the  reverse,  and  acts  as 
a  governor  or  brake  upon  the  blood  flow.  The 
heart  plays  the  same  part  in  the  control  of  the 
human  machinery  that  the  governor  of  an  engine 
plays,  and  just  as  the  governor  is  driven  by  the 
energy  within  the  engine,  so  also  is  the  heart  driven 
by  the  energy  within  the  human  machine.  The 
human  engine  is  driven  by  electric  forces  which 
flow  through  its  nervous  system,  the  power  being 
generated  from  the  atmosphere  by  the  lungs.  This 
magnetic  energy  is  drawn  from  nature's  store- 
house, the  atmosphere,  by  the  power  of  the  soul 
acting  upon  the  physical  organism  and  by  no  other 
means.  Eject  the  soul  from  the  body,  as  one  can 
do  In  the  deepest  hypnotic  trance,  and  the  breath- 
ing stops,  the  blood  ceases  to  flow,  and  suspended 
animation  is  the  result,  the  body  taking  upon  Itself 


; 


52  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  appearance  of  death,  which  would  certainly  re- 
sult if  the  psychic  umbilical  cord  was  severed.)  All 
bodies  belonging  to  the  animal  and  vegetable  king- 
doms, including  man,  are  animated  by  magnetic 
currents  very  similar  in  their  nature  and  operation 
to  the  power  which  drives  our  electrical  machin- 
ery. Food,  through  its  chemical  action,  provides 
conditions  by  which  the  electric  forces  are  stored, 
but  separated  from  the  animal  organism  and  its 
soul,  has  no  energy  value. 

A  description  of  the  actual  passing  of  the  spirit 
from  a  person  dying  in  old  age,  who  has  lived  a 
normal  life,  neither  very  good  nor  very  bad,  may 
be  of  interest.  In  this  case  the  soul  tentacles 
will  sever  from  the  nerve  centres  almost  as 
easily  as  a  ripe  apple  will  fall  from  the  tree, 
whereas  in  youth,  through  accident  or  disease, 
the  soul  will  cling  to  the  body  very  much  as  a 
green  apple  does  to  its  brarich,  and  force  is  re- 
quired to  break  it  away.  By  the  assistance  of  a 
developed  clairv^oyant,  who  can  describe  the  pass- 
age of  the  soul  which  he  sees  as  it  leaves  the  body, 
confirmed  by  numerous  conversations  w^hich  the 
writer  has  had  with  those  called  dead,  the  follow- 
ing facts  have  been  secured: — 
•J^  The  soul  of  man  at  death  begins  to  contract 
at  the  extremities  of  the  feet  and  of  the  fingers, 
shrinking  upwards  towards  the  trunk,  and  leaving 


SCIENCE    OF   THE   SOUL  53 

the  limbs  stiff  and  cold.  The  soul  being  of  a 
luminous  nature,  the  clairvoyant  perceives  that  the 
limbs  are  in  darkness,  while  the  trunk  and  head  of 
the  body  show  luminosity  where  it  still  dwells. 
From  the  lower  parts  of  the  trunk  the  soul  then 
withdraws  upwards  towards  the  chest  and  neck 
and  head.  While  this  withdrawal  is  going  on,  a 
fine,  luminous  vapor  or  essence  pours  forth  from 
the  brain  suture,  and  rising,  forms  a  cloudy  ap- 
pearance just  above  the  body,  hovering  there,  and 
increasing  In  height  and  width,  as  the  soul 
matter  exudes  from  the  head.  This  emanation 
rises  to  a  height  and  width  of  seven  or  eight  feet, 
and  so  remains  for  some  hours  after  the  heart  has 
ceased  to  beat.  The  cloud  then  contracts  in  size, 
and  more  and  more  assumes  a  human  form,  lying 
about  a  foot  above  the  physical  body.  The  face 
and  features  next  appear,  presenting  an  exact  like- 
ness of  the  dead  body,  but  somewhat  younger  in 
appearance.  During  this  operation  the  spirit  re- 
mains totally  unconscious  of  Its  surroundings,  and 
may  continue  to  sleep  quietly  for  some  hours.  If  by 
that  time  It  does  not  wake  of  its  own  accord,  It  is 
carried  by  spirit  relatives  or  friends  first  to  the 
upper  astral  plane,  immediately  adjoining  the 
earth,  w^here  It  may  rest  for  a  time,  until  it  regains 
consciousness,  and  later  passes  on  to  the  second  or 
third  sphere,   to  whichever  it  is   attuned.      The 


54  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

awakening  usually  occurs,  In  such  a  case  as  has 
been  described,  within  a  few  days  after  arrival. 
Where  great  suffering  has  been  experienced  for 
months  previous  to  death,  or  where  severe  mental 
or  physical  strain  has  been  known,  the  spirit  may 
lie  asleep  for  weeks,  or  even  months,  carefully 
tended  by  those  who  set  themselves  apart  to  ren- 
der this  service.  When  one  dies  who  has  lived  a 
spiritual  life,  the  passing  over  is  both  beautiful  and 
easy,  for  the  soul,  having  already  perfected  itself, 
arises  from  the  body  almost  as  quickly  as  one 
rises  from  bed.  In  such  a  case,  unconsciousness  is 
only  of  a  few  moments'  duration,  and  one  shuts 
his  eyes  upon  the  physical  life,  to  open  them  al- 
most immediately  upon  the  faces  of  beloved  spir- 
its who  congregate  around  the  death-bed,  unseen 
by  the  mourners,  yet  none  the  less  there,  and  these 
Immediately  usher  the  new-born  soul  into  the  next 
world.  When  one  suddenly  awakes  In  this  fash- 
ion. In  full  consciousness,  receiving  the  words  of 
welcome  from  spirit  relatives  and  friends,  he 
usually  turns  to  look  with  surprise  upon  the  physi- 
cal body  which  he  has  just  vacated.  He  sees  the 
watchers  weeping  at  the  bedside,  and  tries  to  at- 
tract their  attention  by  touching  them,  but  soon 
perceives  that  his  friends  are  blind  to  his  presence, 
and  quite  unconscious  of  his  touch.  Occasionally 
spirits  succeed  In  showing  themselves  within  the 


SCIENCE    OF    THE    SOUL  55 

first  few  weeks  of  death,  and  while  the  soul  is  still 

somewhat  dense.    This  effort  by  the  spirit  to  prove 

its  continued  existence  gives  no  less  satisfaction 

to  the  celestial  than  to  the  mortal  when  crowned 

with  success. 

i  .  .  . 

In  the  case  of  a  soldier  shot  in  the  prime  of  life, 

the  separation  of  the  soul  from  the  body  is  com- 
paratively slow,  and  where  so  severe  a  shock  as 
death  by  a  bursting  shell  is  received,  the  spirit  may 
be  unconscious  for  some  considerable  time  before 
it  awakes  in  its  new  sphere  of  action.  It  must  be 
understood,  however,  that  although  the  spirit  has 
received  such  a  shock,  no  hurt  is  done  to  the  soul 
itself,  except  in  so  far  as  the  astral  form,  or  the 
outer  body  of  the  soul,  is  concerned,  which  takes 
some  little  time  to  withdraw  itself  from  the  physi- 
cal atoms.  It  frequently  happens  that  one,  suffer- 
ing from  a  violent  death  In  the  prime  of  life,  takes 
many  weeks  to  wake  up  to  a  full  consciousness 
that  he  has  left  his  body.  He  may,  during  this 
_tisi£*^u.tomatIcally  travel  through  space  to  his  dis-- 
tant  home  on  earth,  and  see  his  loved  ones,  with-" 
out  being  aware  that  he  has  passed  through  death, 
viewing  them  as  one  would  in  a  dream.  \This  ex- 
perience, however,  is  hot  common,  for^^such  a  vis- 
itor Is  usually  conscious  of  his  actions,  but  when 
it  does  happen,  is  probably  due  to  a  strong  love 
link  which  connects  him  with  his  friends  at  home, 


•   V 


56  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

and  through  this  magnetic  power  of  love  he  is 
drawn  towards  them.  These  wanderers  are  care- 
fully guarded  and  guided  by  superior  spirits,  whose 
loving  duty  it  is  to  attend  them  while  they  follow 
this  strong  desire  to  reach  their  friends,  and 
though  these  guardians  may  be  unseen  by  the  wan- 
derer, they  are,  nevertheless,  capable  of  speedily 
bringing  him  into  such  surroundings  as  will  wake 
him  to  a  full  realization  of  his  new  condition. 

Friends  and  relations  should  realize  the  im- 
portance of  loving  thoughts  sent  out  to  the  re- 
cently departed,  for  such  thoughts  are  the  most 
helpful  stimulation  the  soul  can  receive  in  his  early 
days  in  his  new  sphere,  they  are  to  him  as  meat 
and  drink  to  a  starving  man.  Much  of  the  wan- 
dering done  in  spirit  spheres  during  the  days  im- 
mediately following  death,  is  due  to  the  lack  of 
intelligent  instruction  while  In  the  body,  which 
would  enable  one  to  realize  what  he  is  likely  to 
expect  after  death.  Thousands  of  young  men  are 
meeting  their  death  on  the  battle-fields  of  Europe, 
many  of  them  remaining  unconscious  for  a  time 
of  what  has  happened,  but  fortunately,  these  are 
at  once  helped  by  bands  of  soldiers  in  the  spiritual 
spheres  who  have  themselves  recently  passed  out 
of  the  body,  and  having  awakened  to  their  new 
condition,  have  organized  themselves  under  the 
leadership    of    intelligent    spirits     from     higher 


SCIENCE   OF   THE   SOUL  57 

spheres,  and  by  means  of  whose  Instructions,  and 
owing  to  the  density  of  their  more  earthly  condi- 
tions, are  able  to  help  the  dreaming  ones  Into 
full  consciousness  of  spirit  life. 

When  mortals  of  a  low  order,  who  have  lived  a 
dissolute,  savage  and  selfish  life,  pass  out  of  the 
body,  they  do  not  rise  above  the  first,  second,  or 
third  degree  of  the  astral  plane,  but  immediately 
enter  some  reformatory,  and  after  being  subjected 
to  a  training  which  may  continue  for  many  months 
or  years  their  spirits  are  educated  and  their  souls 
purified,  and  they  rise  to  the  second  and  third 
spheres.  A  picture  of  those  lower  spheres  will  be 
given  in  the  chapter  dealing  with  "Life  after 
Death."  The  conditions  of  society  there  are  so 
sad  and  disagreeable,  that  a  description  of  them 
can  be  anything  but  cheerful  reading  for  the  man 
or  woman  who  lives  a  disorderly  life  on  earth. 

CHILDHOOD. 

Where  death  takes  place  in  childhood,  either  In 
very  early  years  or  later  In  youth  up  to  the  age  of 
seven  or  eight,  these  young  souls  immediately 
gravitate  to  the  third  sphere,  where  they  receive 
their  education,  and  the  gracious  ministration  and 
attention  of  loving  friends  who  rear  them  to  ma- 
turity. In  the  case  of  children  of  older  growth, 
It  depends  upon   their  character  as  to   whether 


58  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

they  will  go  at  once  to  the  third  sphere  or  stop 
upon  the  second,  or  even  lower,  but  the  stay  upon 
the  lower  spheres,  that  Is,  upon  the  first  and  sec- 
ond, Is  usually  very  brief.  Children  below  the 
age  of  ten  are  never  seen  on  the  lower  astral 
planes,  and  only  a  very  few  children  of  older 
growth  are  to  be  found  there,  these  usually  being 
youths  from  ten  or  twelve  years  upwarcis,  who 
have  contracted  extremely  disagreeable  practices, 
and  who,  until  they  learn  to  surmount  the  causes 
of  such,  will  have  to  remain  in  these  conditions. 
In  the  case  of  babes  dying  in  early  years,  they 
are  often  mothered  by  those  who  upon  earth  have 
been  denied  the  satisfaction  of  the  maternal  in- 
stinct, or  it  may  be  by  a  relative  or  friend  of  the 
physical  mother,  who  undertakes  their  care.  Still- 
born children  in  every  stage  after  quickening  live 
their  life  upon  spirit  spheres,  and  many  a  mother 
upon  her  arrival  in  spirit  life  is  surprised  and 
delighted  to  find  these  little  ones,  whom,  perhaps, 
she  never  expected  would  have  a  heavenly  life, 
grown  to  maturity,  and  ready  to  give  her  welcome. 
The  writer  has  watched  babes  in  celestial  realms 
grow  from  year  to  year,  from  prattling  children 
to  a  beautiful  maturity.  These  delightful  little 
ones  develop  qualities  of  a  highly  spiritual  charac- 
ter, and  become  the  personification  of  love  and 
beauty,  far  surpassing  that  of  children  who  have 


SCIENCE   OF   THE   SOUL  59 

been  trained  on  earth.  One  of  these  little  ones 
termed  still-born,  entered  spirit  life  nearly  twenty 
years  ago,  and  although  in  no  way  related,  the 
writer  has  watched  her  grow,  and  she  is  now  a 
beautiful  being  on  the  fourth  sphere.  During  this 
time  she  has  been  a  constant  object  of  curiosity, 
amusement  and  instruction,  and  the  value  of  her 
friendship  and  help  is  more  than  one  feels  dis- 
posed to  reveal.  Though  her  home  is  in  the  heav- 
ens, she  is  to  the  writer  quite  as  real  as  any  of 
the  children  of  his  own  family,  for  she  Is  a  con- 
stant visitor  to  earth,  leaving  her  happy  home  to 
please  by  her  presence  one  who  loves  her  and 
lives  in  the  valley  of  mists.  This  child-woman 
Is  a  wonderful  combination  of  love  and  wisdom, 
artless,  sweet  and  simple,  and  she  possesses  an 
Insight  into  spiritual  realities  far  surpassing  an 
advanced  earth  mortal,  her  conversation  being  a 
liberal  education.  The  days  of  fairies  have  not 
yet  passed  away  so  long  as  such  beings  can  visit 
the  earth. 


CHAPTER  III 

MATERIALIZATION 

That  intelligent  beings  may  exist  around  and 
amongst  us,  unperceived  during  our  whole  lives^ 
and  yet  capable  under  certain  conditions  of  mak- 
ing their  presence  known  by  acting  on  ^natter,  will 
be  inconceivable  to  some  and  will  be  doubted  by 
many  more,  but  we  venture  to  say  that  no  man 
acquainted  with  the  latest  discoveries  and  the  high- 
est  speculations  of  modern  science,  will  deny  its 
possibility. — Professor  Alfred  Russel  Wal- 
lace, F.R.S.,  "Miracles  and  Modern  Spiritual- 
ism." 

THE  word  '^materialization,"  used  in  con- 
nection with  psychic  science,  is  a  term  ap- 
plied to  that  physical  creation  which  it  is 
possible  to  construct  in  the  psychic  laboratory, 
which  represents  in  form  and  features  those  called 
"the  dead,"  and  which  a  spirit  desiring  to  mani- 
fest again  on  earth  may  use.  There  is  no  greater 
wonder  in  all  nature  than  this  strange  manifesta- 
tion, and  it  is  not  surprising  that  upon  a  similar 

60 


MATERIALIZATION  6 1 

occurrence  taking  place  In  the  excellent  conditions 
afforded  in  the  "upper  room"  In  Jerusalem,  the 
disciples  of  Jesus  were  able  to  assert  that  their 
Master  lived.  It  Is  upon  such  physical  manifesta- 
tion that  many  men  have  built  their  confidence 
in  a  future  life.  When  a  man  once  witnesses  a 
clear  materialization  of  one  whom  he  has  lost 
through  death,  he  can  never  again  doubt  that 
man  Is  a  spiritual  being. 

Through  such  phenomena  and  by  means  of 
psychic  photography  this  materialistic  age  is  awak- 
ening to  a  realization  of  the  facts  of  the  post-mor- 
tem state.  When  conditions  are  favorable,  and 
the  laws  governing  materialization  are  known,  a 
man  may  to-day  walk  the  floor  of  his  own  private 
room  arm-in-arm  with  a  beloved  friend  who  has 
passed  away  through  death.  It  is  now  possible 
for  one  to  continue  the  conversation  which  was 
interrupted  by  death,  and  to  renew  the  close 
friendly  relationship  broken  by  the  loss  of  the 
physical  body.  To  prove  to  a  sceptical  world  that 
these  forms  are  a  physical  reality,  the  living  and 
the  so-called  "dead"  may  sit  side  by  side  and  be 
photographed  together. 

There  are  various  forms  of  materialization, 
each  medium  demonstrating  according  to  his  par- 
ticular gift.  In  the  ordinary^  materialization 
seance  room,  where  promiscuous  gatherings  are 


62  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

held,  the  results  are  often  uncertain  and  most  un- 
satisfactory. It  Is  unreasonable  to  suppose  that 
a  chance  gathering  of  men  and  women  of  vari- 
ous temperaments,  opinions,  and  desires  can  se- 
cure satisfactory  results  by  the  payment  of  a  few 
shillings,  yet  there  are  many  who,  from  one  or 
two  such  experiments,  pose  as  judges,  and  reject 
the  science  as  uncertain  and  beyond  the  control 
of  known  laws.  This  method  of  investigation 
has  brought  the  whole  subject  into  disrepute.  One 
can  imagine  the  limited  advance  that  medicine, 
chemistry,  psychology,  or  biology  would  make 
under  such  conditions.  These  and  other  branches 
of  science  have  been  long  endowed,  and  necessary 
conditions  observed  for  the  successful  prosecution 
of  research  work,  but  the  science  of  the  soul  has 
been  unfortunately  left  to  every  Tom,  Dick,  and 
Harry  to  exploit  when  they  felt  so  inclined  and 
had  an  odd  hour  to  spare  to  play  with  the  subject. 
Doubtless,  sooner  or  later,  this  inadequacy  of  at- 
tention will  be  recognized,  but  it  is  high  time  that 
scientific  experts  should  give  it  their  serious  con- 
sideration, for  there  is  nothing  deserving  of  more 
attention,  or  more  likely  to  offer  a  richer  field  for 
exploration  in  the  future.  In  the  meantime  psy- 
chic science  suffers  the  fate  of  every  new  science, 
often  finding  its  adherents  among  cranks  and  char- 
latans, but  here  and  there  are  a  few  noble  men 


MATERIALIZATION  63 

and  women  whose  Interest  has  been  secured,  who 
are  not  afraid  to  champion  neglected  causes,  and 
who  steadily  devote  themselves  to  the  elucidation 
of  its  hidden  laws. 

PSYCHO-PLASTIC  FULL-FORM  MATERIALIZATION. 

The  most  important  phase  of  materialization  is 
that  of  the  solid  form.  This  is  represented  by  a 
complete  structure  which  may  weigh  several  stones, 
and  which  Is  an  exact  counterpart  of  the  human 
body,  moving  and  acting  with  the  full  use  of 
limbs,  and  capable  of  walking  and  of  talking. 
When  these  forms  are  constructed  under  ideal  con- 
ditions the  appearance  is  altogether  natural,  but 
when  conditions  are  unfavorable,  they  frequently 
present  a  somewhat  unnatural  appearance,  simi- 
lar to  a  badly  constructed  wax-work  figure,  incapa- 
ble of  proper  movements,  and  unable  to  speak. 
The  length  of  life  of  such  forms  is  governed  by 
the  time  occupied  in  giving  them  birth,  and  the 
continuity  of  the  conditions  necessary  to  their 
production.  These  forms  may  frequently  last 
without  collapsing  for  half  an  hour,  but  if  only 
some  minutes  are  taken  in  their  creation  they  will 
exist  but  for  a  few  minutes.  Total  darkness  is 
essential  to  their  birth,  for  light  quickly  disinte- 
grates them,   and  under  the   rays  of  electric  in- 


64  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

candescent  lamps  they  melt  still  more  rapidly,  like 
snow  under  the  rays  of  the  sun. 

The  substance  which  goes  to  compose  these 
forms  is  called  "psycho-plastic  matter,"  and  is 
drawn  from  the  body  of  a  psychically  developed 
man  or  woman  called  a  materializing  medium,  by 
operators  from  the  spirit  side  of  life.  Psycho- 
plastic  matter,  solidified  so  as  to  withstand  Hght, 
has  been  placed  under  a  microscope,  and  is  found 
to  be  dissimilar  in  its  cellular  structure  to  that  of 
either  the  animal  or  vegetable  kingdom.  The  es- 
sence, as  it  exudes  In  its  early  stages  from  vari- 
ous parts  of  the  medium's  body,  is  of  a  fluidic  and 
vapory  nature,  and  under  good  conditions  may  be 
seen  with  the  physical  eye  as  it  issues.  This  vapory 
substance  falls  like  a  dense  fog  upon  the  floor  of 
the  laboratory,  and  is  distinctly  cold  to  the  touch, 
being  usually  from  fifteen  to  twenty  degrees  be- 
low the  atmospheric  temperature  of  the  room.  In 
ordinary  practice,  when  full-form  materialization 
is  to  be  secured,  a  curtained  cabinet  is  necessary. 
In  which  the  medium  is  placed  and  surrounded  by 
the  curtains.  The  fluid  is  there  collected,  and  kept 
from  dispersing  throughout  the  chamber,  for  It  Is 
of  such  a  semi-elastic  nature  while  in  this  early 
stage,  as  to  be  easily  confined  by  any  soft  woven 
material.  The  process  of  accumulating  this 
vapory  essence  may  continue  for  an  hour  or  more, 


PSYCHO-PLASTIC    MATERIALIZATION 

Here  is  illustrated  two  psycho-plastic  creations  taken  by  flashlicrht  in  London,  one  being  in  full 
form,  the  other  in  course  of  constniction  The  former  is  controlled  by  a  spirit  being,  while  the  latter 
is  composed  of  psycho-plastic  matter  only  To  face  p.  64 


MATERIALIZATION  6^ 

and  during  this  time  It  Is  gradually  solidified  by 
unseen  intelligences  into  a  substance  very  similar 
in  appearance  and  touch  to  bakers'  dough.  If  this 
substance  be  held  In  the  hand  and  subjected  to 
light,  it  quickly  melts  Into  what  is  popularly 
termed  "thin  air,"  but  as  a  matter  of  fact,  it  really 
returns  to  the  body  of  the  medium  as  an  invisible 
essence.  The  reason  for  the  necessity  of  dark- 
ness in  a  materializing  laboratory  is  therefore  quite 
obvious,  but  unfortunately,  many  who  have  taken 
part  in  such  experiments,  have  not  always  been 
able  to  understand  this.  There  are  those  who 
profess  to  have  seen  materialization  take  place  in 
the  light,  but  the  author  does  not  believe  this  to 
be  possible,  and  certainly  has  never  known  of 
such  a  thing.  It  Is  possible  to  get  the  material- 
ized form  to  exhibit  itself  in  the  light,  either  that 
of  subdued  daylight  or  electric  light,  but  only  after 
It  has  been  fully  solidified  in  a  darkened  cham- 
ber. Where  such  a  form  has  been  seen  from  time 
to  time  it  has  undoubtedly  been  built  up  in  some 
darkened  recess  immediately  at  hand.  The  neces- 
sity for  darkness  during  materialization  is  in  har- 
mony with  the  creation  of  all  animal  and  vegetable 
structures,  as  the  former  are  built  In  the  darkness 
of  the  womb  of  the  animal  body,  and  the  latter 
within  the  darkness  of  the  soil.  The  question  of 
the  dark  seance  is  an  important  one,  for  where  it 


66  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

Is  necessary  to  produce  phenomena  in  this  manner, 
fraud  may  find  a  ready  entrance.  As  it  is  impos- 
sible to  change  the  order  of  nature  and  to  create 
the  phenomena  by  any  other  means,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  see  that  all  students  are  protected 
against  fraud  by  careful  precautions,  which  can 
be  easily  procured  without  detriment  to  the  me- 
dium or  the  phenomena.  Any  medium  who  objects 
to  such  reasonable  precautions  must  be  rejected, 
or  the  manifestations  held  as  doubtful  in  their 
origin.  There  is  no  doubt  whatever  that  impos- 
tures have  been,  and  are,  offered  to  the  public 
as  genuine  materializations,  not  only  by  those  in- 
capable of  giving  such  phenomena,  but  also  by 
those  who  undoubtedly  possess  the  materializing 
power.  After  acknowledging  that  fraud  has  oc- 
curred in  promiscuous  sittings  for  materializations, 
the  author  desires  to  state  that  probably  ninety 
per  cent,  of  the  charges  of  fraud  are  fallacious, 
and  though  honestly  believed  by  those  who  make 
them,  a  fuller  knowledge  of  the  laws  would  re- 
remove  many  misapprehensions.  These  manifes- 
tations are  surrounded  with  complex  problems, 
because  the  minds  of  the  experimenters  influence 
the  medium  to  a  very  great  extent,  and  only  those 
well  versed  in  the  subtleties  of  the  subject  can  pass 
final  judgment  upon  them. 

Having  described  the  manner  in  which  the  ma- 


MATERIALIZATION  67 

terlal  which  goes  to  the  fonnatlon  of  these  forms 
Is  collected,   it  is  now  necessary  to   explain  the 
methods  of  construction,  and  how  departed  enti- 
ties may  manifest  their  presence  by  its  use.     As 
soon  as  the  psycho-plastic  essence  is  collected  in 
sufficient  quantity  to  provide  matter  to  construct  a 
form,  the  medium  is  placed  in  a  deeper  trance  by 
means  of  magnetic  passes   from  the  controllmg 
spirit,  who  is  usually  in  charge  at  these  demon- 
strations.    By  this  means  the  soul  of  the  medium 
Is  partly  ejected  from  his  body,  he  being  then  m 
what  hypnotists  would  call  the  "ninth  degree"  of 
hypnosis.     Another  spirit  operator  or  assistant, 
who  may  be  described  as  the  artist,  is  now  ready 
to  place  over  the  medium's  ejected  soul  the  psycho- 
plastic  matter  which  has  been  prepared,  and  begms 
to  mould  it  by  the  use  of  his  own  materiahzed 
hands  into  a  human  form,  resembhng  the  appear- 
ance  of  the   spirit  who   wishes   to  manifest  his 
presence,  usually  that  of  a  relative  or  friend  of  one 
of  the  persons  in  the  seance   room.     When  the 
spirit  artist  has  completed  this  work  of  mould- 
.  Ing,  spending  most  of  his  time  in  creating  a  good 
likeness   in  the   face,   adding  psycho-plastic  hair, 
beard,  eyes,  etc.,  the  body  is  enveloped  in  a  flowing 
white  garment,  also  made  from  the  same  substance, 
which  really  hides  much  of  the  necessary  incom- 
pleteness of  the  lower  part  of  the  form.     The  m- 


68  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

telllgence  who  wishes  to  manifest,  whom  we  may 

describe  as  Mr.  A ,  then  steps  forward,  and 

enters  this  psycho-plastic  mould,  and  by  Intense 
will  power  takes  control  of  It,  and  further  modifies 
it  to  a  still  more  accurate  representation  of  his 
earthly  body.  It  will  now  be  understood  that 
within  this  psycho-plastic  matter  two  souls  reside 
for  the  time  being — ^^that  of  the  medium,  and  that 

of  Mr.  A —.     Here  begins  a  peculiar  struggle 

between  the  two  opposing  minds,  each  working 
upon  the  psycho-plastic  matter,  the  one  conscious- 
ly, that  is  Mr.  A ,  and  the  other  unconscious- 
ly, the  entranced  medium.  There  Is  always  a  pow- 
erful tendency  for  the  medium's  influence  to  pre- 
dominate from  time  to  time,  unless  Mr.  A 

has  well  developed  will  power.  It  frequently  hap- 
pens that  a  composite  likeness  is  the  result,  the 
features  presenting  partly  the  appearance  of  those 
of  the  medium,  and  partly  the  appearance  of  Mr. 

A .     This  resemblance  to  the  medium  causes 

many  amateur  Investigators  to  suppose  that  the 
medium  Is  cheating  by  impersonating  the  spirit, 
for  in  the  darkness  it  is  not  always  possible  to 
see  the  medium  and  the  form  at  the  same  time,  as 
only  a  very  subdued  light  illuminates  these  forms 
when  completed,  unless  conditions  are  exception- 
ally good.  It  Is  necessary  to  explain  that  a  spirit, 
in  entering  a  solid  object  such  as  this  psycho-plas- 


MATERIALIZATION  69 

tic  matter,  passes  Into  It  as  easily  as  one  on  earth 
would  pass  Into  water,  It  being  a  peculiarity  of  soul 
substance  that  It  can  Interpenetrate  physical  mat- 
ter. One  soul  may  also  Interpenetrate  another 
soul  with  similar  ease,  unless  where  a  positive  will 
Is  exercised  against  such  entrance. 

Where  experienced  spirits  are  manifesting,  who 
have  through  long  years  of  practice  managed  to 
surmount  the  difficulties,  a  magnificent  representa- 
tion is  secured,  having  all  the  accurate  appearance 
of  a  normal  living  man.  Under  such  circum- 
stances these  materlahzed  forms  may  converse, 
dance,  or  sing,  and  are  capable  of  partaking  of 
food  and  drink,  all  of  which  disappear  In  a  man- 
ner most  unaccountable  to  the  uninitiated.  The 
forms  will  sometimes  dematerialize  as  if  going 
through  the  floor,  but.  In  fact,  the  matter  which 
composes  them  disappears  from  the  base  of  the 
form,  melting  where  it  touches  the  floor,  and  grad- 
ually passing  Into  the  fluidic  state,  returns  to  the 
medium.  Where  conditions  are  good  the  psychic 
umbilical  cord  between  the  medium  and  his  soul 
Is  unseen,  but  where  they  are  disturbed  in  any 
way  while  the  materialized  form  is  manifesting, 
the  cord  may  become  visible,  because  it  tends  to 
draw  to  Itself  a  portion  of  the  fluidic  matter  In  its 
vicinity,  and  a  most  peculiar  manifestation  may 
then  be  seen,  showing  the  body  of  the  medium 


70  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

connected  with  a  kind  of  luminous  string  stretch- 
ing from  his  chest  to  the  back  of  the  materiahzed 
form,  and  swaying  about  as  the  form  advances  or 
retires. 

The  drapery  which  envelopes  the  materialized 
figure  is  of  an  interesting  character,  similar  in 
texture  to  a  pure,  fine,  white  gossamer  web,  which, 
when  handled,  is  of  a  slightly  elastic  nature.  This, 
when  exposed  to  light,  melts,  but  In  some  cases 
where  the  material  has  been  subjected  to  a  stronger 
solidifying  process  than  usual,  a  piece  may  be  cut 
from  the  garment  by  permission,  and  kept  for 
some  weeks  or  months  before  disintegrating.  This 
fabric  has  also  been  carefully  examined  on  many 
occasions  under  the  microscope,  and  according  to 
experts,  differs  considerably  from  any  known  tex- 
ture of  earth.  The  soul  or  foundation  of  the  fab- 
ric seems  to  be  produced  in  spirit  spheres,  and 
when  dipped  into  the  psycho-plastic  matter  takes 
upon  itself  a  physical  form. 

Where  the  psycho-plastic  essence  is  Insufficient 
in  quantity  to  create  a  full  form,  the  head,  chest, 
and  arms  alone  may  be  constructed,  and  where  the 
quantity  is  still  further  limited,  the  spirit  operators 
may  solidify  only  a  hand  and  an  arm,  or  even  a 
hand  alone.  When  this  Is  the  case  It  Is  somewhat 
startling  to  observe  a  hand  moving  about  in  space, 
as  If  unattached,  but  it  is  really  controlled  by  a 


MATERIALIZATION  7 1 

spirit  operator,  who  is  showing  his  hand  in  solid 
form. 

Before  passing  on  to  other  phases  of  material- 
ization, it  is  necessary  to  understand  that  while 
the  experiments  are  proceeding  some  mediums  are 
fully  entranced,  some  only  partly  so,  and  others 
are  nearly  normal.  Even  though  the  medium  may 
sometimes  sit  outside  the  cabinet,  a  portion  of  his 
soul  is  projected  from  his  body,  and  the  psycho- 
plastic  essence  drawn  from  him  is  carried  into  the 
cabinet,  where  it  is  built  up  into  a  form.  It  is 
upon  this  soul  projection  that  all  forms  are  ma- 
terialized. Much  may  be  said  in  favor  of  normal 
control  as  against  trance  for  such  experiments,  but 
where  a  medium  is  fully  entranced  better  results 
are  usually  secured,  and  less  strain  is  felt  by  them. 
Many  failures  to  arrive  at  success  are  due  to  the 
entranced  medium  unconsciously  refusing  to  allow 
his  soul  to  be  ejected  by  his  spirit  control.  This 
is  often  caused  by  fear  on  the  part  of  the  me- 
dium that  the  experimenters  are  likely  to  interfere 
with  the  phenomena,  and  his  fear  will  be  such  that 
the  soul  will  hold  tenaciously  to  the  body  in  spite 
of  strong  efforts  on  the  part  of  the  operators  to 
withdraw  it.  A  number  of  difficulties  have  also 
to  be  surmounted  by  spirits  before  they  can  take 
upon  themselves  a  material  form  in  the  psychic 
laboratory,  and  of  these  many  persons  who  sit  at 


72  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

seances  are  totally  ignorant.  Because  one  has  be- 
come a  spirit  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  every- 
thing is  immediately  possible  to  it,  and  that  where 
one  spirit  succeeds  in  manifesting,  another  should 
also  be  able  to  do  so.  Frequent  disappointment 
is  felt  by  new  investigators,  when  departed  friends 
are  unable  to  surmount  the  difficulties  and  mani- 
fest clearly  on  the  first  occasion. 

Spirits  of  a  high  order  seldom  materialize,  and 
when  they  do  it  is  for  some  very  important  end; 
the  spirits  most  likely  to  manifest  hail  from  the 
first,  second,  or  third  spheres  of  the  spirit-world. 

The  vibrations  from  music  and  singing  are  a 
great  help  towards  success,  for  they  not  only  as- 
sist the  flow  of  psychic  essence,  but  also  stimulate 
the  workers  behind  the  veil  who  are  operating  the 
forces.  Music  also  helps  to  harmonize  the  sitters, 
who,  under  its  influence,  may  become  more  pas- 
sive mentally,  and  so  can  give  more  assistance  to 
the  operator,  and  improve  the  conditions  into 
which  the  manifesting  presence  will  enter.  These 
are  the  principal  reasons  why  music  and  song  have 
always  played  an  important  part  in  all  such  ex- 
periences. New  investigators  are  often  puzzled 
and  inclined  to  scoff  at  the  many  times  the  word 
"conditions"  is  used  in  connection  with  seances  of 
all  kinds,  but  the  word  simply  means  that  certain 
known  laws  which  assist  the  manifestation  must 


MATERIALIZATION  73 

be  In  operation  before  successful  results  can  be 
obtained.  This  applies  to  everything  on  earth, 
but  because  the  laws  affecting  the  materializing 
process  are  little  known,  sitters  sometimes  think 
that  the  mention  of  conditions  Is  only  an  excuse 
to  cover  failure.  If  It  Is  remembered  that  the  In- 
strument used  Is  not  a  machine,  but  flesh  and 
blood,  with  a  will  and  emotions  not  always  under 
control,  the  position  will  be  more  fully  appre- 
ciated. Harmonious  conditions  between  the  sit- 
ters Is  a  sine  qua  non  for  exceptional  success,  and 
yet  this  can  rarely  be  obtained  In  seance  rooms, 
where  people  sit  together  who  have  never  met  be- 
fore. Careful  physical  preparation,  such  as  bath- 
ing and  fasting,  especially  from  alcoholic  liquors, 
was  always  required  from  those  who  visited  an- 
cient temples  to  consult  the  oracle,  and  prepara- 
tion of  the  mind  by  meditation  was  also  enjoined. 
Only  in  comparatively  few  Instances  do  modern 
Investigators  prepare  In  such  a  manner.  In  the 
East,  days  are  sometimes  devoted  to  the  produc- 
tion of  such  phenomena  by  the  same  people;  In 
the  West,  the  sitters  like  to  get  It  over  In  an  hour 
or  two,  so  that  they  may  not  miss  dinner  or  the 
theatre.  The  weather  has  a  most  important  ef- 
fect upon  the  success  of  a  seance,  the  best  results 
Invariably  being  obtained  In  fine,  clear  weather. 
This  Is  why  much  better  materializing  effects  are 


74  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

obtained  In  the  United  States,  and  especially  In 
California,  where  damp,  muggy  weather  seldom 
hinders  the  outflow  of  the  essence.  The  restric- 
tion Invariably  imposed  In  a  materializing  seance, 
that  students  are  not  to  touch  the  medium  or  mani- 
festing presence  without  permission.  Is  absolutely 
necessary,  for  the  forms  which  appear  are  con- 
structed upon  the  sensitive  soul  of  the  medium, 
and  when  unexpectedly  touched  a  shock  Is  ex- 
perienced, and  the  form  immediately  withdraws 
to  his  physical  organism.  The  medium's  body  Is 
sometimes  reduced  to  half  Its  normal  weight  by 
the  withdrawal  of  psycho-plastic  essence,  and  for 
the  time  being  his  vitality  is  lowered.  The  sud- 
den striking  of  a  light,  or  the  clutching  of  a  form, 
hits  the  medium  with  a  force  like  an  electric  shock, 
and  many  sensitives  have  been  grievously  injured 
by  foolish  triflers  in  this  way.  Forms  may  be 
touched  where  permission  Is  granted  by  the  spirit 
operators,  who  are  able  first  to  isolate  the  medium 
from  such  shock.  The  wonder  Is  that  those  who 
possess  such  a  gift  sit  for  the  general  public  at  all, 
so  grave  Is  the  risk,  but  when  these  experiments 
are  in  wise  hands,  no  risk  at  all  is  entailed,  for 
the  operators  are  most  careful  of  the  health  of 
the  medium,  and  from  time  to  time  will  spontane- 
ously offer  to  sitters  an  opportunity  to  view  and 
handle  the  form  in  a  good  light,  while  the  me- 


MATERIALIZATION  75 

dium  Is  seen  quite  clearly  at  the  same  time.  Al- 
though this  process  of  materialization  is  one  of 
the  most  Important  facts  In  the  world  of  natural 
science,  and  Is  Imperatively  needed  for  the  en- 
lightenment of  humanity,  yet  it  is  a  fact  that  it 
does  not  tend  to  develop  spirituality  in  those  who 
long  continue  to  view  Its  wonders.  Unless,  there- 
fore, the  subject  Is  being  studied  In  the  Interests 
of  science.  It  Is  wise  to  leave  the  phenomena  as 
soon  as  one  has  secured  adequate  proofs  of  con- 
tinued existence,  for  around  the  psychic  labora- 
tory congregate  spirits  of  a  gross  order,  whose 
Influence  may  be  anything  but  elevating.  Some  of 
these  are  necessary,  being  more  capable  of  manip- 
ulating the  physical  matter  than  spirits  of  a  more 
exalted  type.  This  form  of  physical  phenomena 
may  in  future  be  raised  to  a  much  higher  level  by 
better  conditions  being  provided  by  the  sitters  and 
operators. 

SHELL  MATERIALIZATION. 

This  form  of  materialization  Is  commonly 
adopted  where  a  limited  supply  of  psycho-plastic 
matter  is  available,  and  by  this  method  more  rapid 
creation  of  forms  rhay  be  produced,  providing  a 
more  varied  programme  than  is  commonly  to  be 
got  in  the  seance  for  full-form  phenomena.  The 
soul  of  the  medium  Is  projected  about  a  foot  In 


76  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

front  of  him,  and  upon  this  Is  moulded  the  psy- 
cho-plastic matter  In  the  likeness  of  the  manifest- 
ing spirit.  When  completed,  the  spirit,  Mr. 
A ,  enters  the  materialized  shell,  and  his  con- 
centrated win  power  moulds  the  mask  or  shell  to 
a  more  accurate  reproduction  of  his  former  phys- 
ical features  than  the  spirit  modeller  has  pro- 
duced. These  masks  are  often  very  shallow,  be- 
ing little  more  than  a  slightly  curved  flat  surface, 
similar  to  a  theatrical  mask,  so  that  the  observer 
when  looking  behind  it  views  seemingly  empty 
space.  Such  masks,  however,  often  present  a 
most  excellent  likeness  of  the  Individual  desiring 
to  manifest.  All  the  illustrations  In  Baron  von 
Schrenck  Notzlng's  book  on  Materialization  rep- 
resent such  shell  forms,  and  a  reference  to  it  will 
help  the  reader  to  a  better  understanding  of  this 
particular  phase.  The  spirit  artist  in  working 
up  the  mask  labors  under  several  serious  disad- 
vantages, first,  because  he  is  usually  working  be- 
tween two  planes  of  matter,  that  of  the  physical 
and  the  astral  world,  and  while  thus  moulding  the 
shell  he  is  often  quite  unable  to  see  his  spirit 
model,  for  if  he  places  himself  upon  the  astral 
plane,  where  the  spirit  is,  he  is  out  of  touch  with 
the  physical  plane,  where  the  matter  rests  upon 
which  he  is  operating,  and  so  he  must  learn  to 
adjust  himself  to  both.     This  may  partly  explain 


MATERIALIZATION  77 

why  serious  blunders  are  sometimes  made,  such 
as  forgetting  to  place  hair  on  the  head,  etc.,  and 
some  of  the  grotesque  figures  which  appear  In 
the  psychic  laboratory  at  times  are  the  result  of 
these  difficulties  of  the  spirit  artist.  All  students 
of  this  subject  should  learn  to  be  sympathetic 
with  this  worker,  for  not  only  has  he  these  con- 
ditions to  contend  with,  but  further  complications 
often  arise  through  spirits  desiring  to  manifest 
who  may  have  considerably  changed  their  appear- 
ance since  passing  from  the  earth,  and  who  fall 
to  remember  their  old  form.  These  differences 
In  a  spirit  may  be  due  to  the  loss  of  deep  facial 
lines,  once  caused  by  worry  or  ill-health.  They 
may  have  grown  considerably  older  or  even 
younger  In  appearance,  slimmer  or  stouter,  darker 
or  fairer,  though  the  usual  tendency  Is  for  a  spirit 
to  grow  more  fair.  Their  plan  of  halrdressing 
may  have  altered,  or  beards  or  moustaches  been 
discarded,  and  considering  all  these  possibilities, 
especially  with  those  who  have  been  In  splrlt-llfe 
for  some  years,  some  of  the  difficulties  of  the 
artist  may  be  realized.  A  spirit  who  has  recently 
passed  from  the  body  can  often  give  an  excellent 
manifestation  of  himself  in  the  seance  room  owing 
to  his  memory  being  still  fresh  regarding  his 
earthly  appearance,  and  the  soul  being  still  of  a 
somewhat  physical  nature;  but  those  who  have 


78  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

left  earth  for  ten  or  twenty  years,  and  have  been 
busily  engaged  In  the  new  world  with  thoughts  and 
occupations  that  have  been  deeply  Interesting,  find 
that  the  effect  of  their  new  thought  has  been  al- 
most to  revolutionize  their  features  and  form 
through  the  action  of  the  mind  upon  the  soul, 
often  giving  them  a  beauty  far  transcending  their 
earthly  appearance.  Spirits  laboring  under  such 
difficulties  sometimes  look  up  an  old  photograph 
or  picture  of  themselves  on  earth,  and  reproduce 
from  it  an  astral  counterpart,  from  which  the 
artist  may  copy,  modelling  his  shell  to  Its  appear- 
ance. 

FLUIDIC   MATERIALIZATION. 

Fluldlc  materialization  Is  quite  different  from 
that  of  the  psycho-plastic  materialization,  the 
latter  being  the  creation  of  a  solid  body,  the  for- 
mer of  a  fluldic  body,  somewhat  more  closely  re- 
sembling the  orthodox  ghostly  type  and  luminous 
In  appearance.  The  spontaneous  ghost  so  com- 
monly talked  about  and  sometimes  seen  Is  prob- 
ably In  a  very  large  number  of  cases  of  the  fluldic 
nature  now  about  to  be  described.  Such  ghostly 
forms  may  range  from  a  degree  of  refinement  so 
rare  that  only  those  with  very  keen  eye-sight  can 
perceive  them,  to  that  of  a  degree  where  a  slight 
resistance  would  be   felt  by  the  hand  if  passed 


MATERIALIZATION  79 

through  them.  In  cases  where  the  ghost  Is  clearly 
manifest  to  the  ordinary  eye,  the  substance  is 
similar  to  a  damp  cobweb,  but  with  a  distinct  phos- 
phorescent luminosity.  These  have  for  their 
foundation  a  portion  of  the  human  soul,  usually 
that  of  the  medium,  and  it  Is  upon  this  structure 
that  the  particles  of  matter  are  built  by  which  they 
become  visible.  Such  appearances  are  frequently 
called  "astrallzations,"  but  such  a  term  Is  Incor- 
rect, for  a  fluidic  materialization  under  good  con- 
ditions has  the  power  of  speech,  and  may  talk  as 
rationally  In  answer  to  questions  as  any  mortal, 
but  with  an  astrallzation  this  is  impossible.  When 
highly  condensed,  the  clothing  has  a  peculiar 
heavy  movement,  as  If  loaded  with  moisture,  and 
swings  v^ery  much  as  a  heavily-beaded  lace  gar- 
ment might  upon  a  dancing  girl.  The  matter 
which  goes  to  compose  these  bodies  Is  drawn  by 
the  manifesting  entity  from  the  body,  or  bodies, 
of  persons  in  the  Immediate  neighborhood.  As 
an  article  when  electrically  connected  within  a 
plating  vat,  draws  to  itself  refined  particles  of 
silver  from  the  bar  deposited  within  the  vat,  so, 
much  In  the  same  way,  does  the  celestial  visitor 
draw  refined  particles  of  matter  upon  his  soul 
'  through  magnetic  attraction. 


8o  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

ASTRALIZATION. 

The  appearance  called  an  "astrallzatlon'*  de- 
rives its  name  from  the  spirit  body  of  discarnate 
man  which  functions  upon  the  astral  plane  or 
lowest  sphere  of  the  spirit  world.  It  must  not  be 
supposed  that  all  spirits  manifesting  as  astraliza- 
tions  are  souls  who  have  not  yet  risen  above  the 
astral  plane,  for  those  upon  higher  planes  may 
also  show  themselves  as  such.  The  difference  be- 
tween souls  of  varying  degrees  of  advancement  is 
manifested  in  their  power  to  illuminate  the  form 
by  which  they  make  their  presence  known.  The 
lowest  or  astral  beings  have  a  dull  phosphorescent 
appearance,  some  of  the  very  lowest  being  of  a 
dusky  hue,  but  the  higher  spirits  show  themselves 
in  brighter  raiment,  some  appearing  in  a  glow  of 
golden  light.  The  latter  are,  unfortunately  for 
the  world,  seldom  met  with,  or  seen  only  by  the 
clairvoyant,  but  where  a  circle  of  highly  devel- 
oped experimenters  meets  regularly,  such  will 
sometimes  manifest,  and  this  should  become  more 
common  as  the  inhabitants  of  earth  learn  to  de- 
velop themselves  and  make  a  study  of  the  laws  on 
which  the  phenomena  rest.  An  astralization  is 
produced  by  a  spirit-being  drawing  upon  itself  a 
fine  coating  of  earth  matter,  sometimes  by  acci- 
dent, and  at  other  times  by  design.  In  the  former 
case  a  spirit  may  quite  unconsciously,  while  travel- 


MATERIALIZATION  8 1 

ling  near  the  earth,  enter  Into  a  magnetic  current 
arising  from  the  earth's  soil,  which  for  the  mo- 
ment clothes  his  soul  with  a  coating  of  matter. 
The  spirit  may  be  entirely  Ignorant  of  this,  until 
his  attention  Is  called  to  It  by  some  startled  mortal 
staring  in  his  direction,  and  only  then  does  he 
realize  that  he  has  become  visible.  Other  spirits 
can  accomplish  it  by  Intention,  when  conditions  are 
suitable,  but  this  does  not  often  happen,  and  it  is 
probably  more  often  owing  to  accident  rather  than 
to  design,  when  souls  become  manifest  as  astral- 
Izatlons. 

ETHERIC  SKIN  ENVELOPE. 

This  phase  of  spirit  power  far  surpasses  any 
other  form  of  manifestation,  for  by  It  one  is  able 
to  get  a  representation  of  the  departed  exactly  as 
they  live  In  spirit  spheres,  with  lively  movement, 
dress,  and  coloring.  With  most  forms  of  ma- 
terialization there  is  a  rigidity  of  form  and  fea- 
ture, and  a  great  lack  of  natural  coloring,  but  with 
the  etheric  skin  envelope,  every  line  in  the  face, 
every  smile  that  moves  across  it,  every  detail  of 
the  dress,  even  to  the  buttons  and  the  thread  by 
which  they  are  attached  may  be  seen  in  minutest 
detail.  These  beautiful  creations,  though  looking 
to  the  casual  observer  most  real  and  solid,  are  just 
the  reverse,  being  constructed  of  a  skin  so  refined 


82  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

that  the  finest  sheet  of  gold-leaf  is  as  heavy  armor 
plate  compared  to  it.  The  matter  is  so  fine  that 
it  is  hopeless  to  try  to  feel  it,  for  the  magnetic 
power  issuing  from  the  fingers  causes  disintegra- 
tion as  the  hand  approaches  it.  This  etheric  skin 
is  constructed  from  a  soul  essence,  by  discarnate 
operators,  who  collect  it  and  form  it  into  a  wide 
sheet.  The  spirit  who  wishes  to  manifest  Is  sub- 
jected to  magnetic  treatment  on  the  spirit  side  of 
life,  which  makes  his  soul  and  all  attached  to  him 
attractive  to  this  etheric  skin,  and  he  is  wrapped 
in  It  as  one  might  be  In  a  sheet.  When  within  this, 
the  spirit  immediately  becomes  visible  to  ordinary 
physical  eyesight,  and  while  he  has  no  power  of 
speech  an  extremely  free  movement  Is  possible. 
After  one  spirit  has  manifested  for  a  moment,  the 
etheric  skin  is  unwound  and  another  Immediately 
enters  It.  He  may  be  succeeded  by  others,  the 
change  usually  being  made  with  lightning  rapidity 
as  the  matter  quickly  disintegrates.  Each  mani- 
festation may  not  last  more  than  from  ten  to 
twenty  seconds,  but  much  depends  upon  the  phys- 
ical conditions  and  the  number  of  spirits  who 
wish  to  show  themselves.  Through  the  etheric 
skin  one  Is  able  to  view  spirits  in  their  natural 
spiritual  conditions,  and  there  Is  no  phase  of 
spirit  manifestation  to  be  compared  to  it  In  its 


MATERIALIZATION  8  3 

marvellous  beauty  and  perfection.  When  a  sol- 
dier from  spirit  spheres  appears  In  his  uniform 
within  this  etheric  skin  the  glint  of  his  sword  hilt 
and  polished  brass  buttons  may  be  seen  distinctly. 
These  manifestations  are  not  common,  and  only 
on  a  few  occasions  during  fifteen  years  of  close 
Investigation  has  the  author  witnessed  them.  If 
the  creation  of  this  etheric  skin  was  more  com- 
mon, a  most  marvellous  advance  would  be  made  In 
the  art  of  spirit  Intercourse,  and  the  whole  phe- 
nomena of  materialization  would  take  upon  itself 
a  beauty  far  transcending  the  usual  presentation. 

MECHANICAL  GHOSTS. 

These  are  phosphorescent  bodies,  constructed 
from  the  psycho-plastic  matter  in  a  particular 
stage  of  solidification,  and  are  thought  moulds  of 
spiritual  beings  trained  to  this  work.  In  appear- 
ance they  resemble  floating  cotton-w^ool  figures. 
The  outline  is  often  indistinct,  but  made  to  repre- 
sent well-known  public  characters,  or  even  a  rela- 
tive or  friend.  Such  forms  are  endowed  with  a 
limited  power  to  move  about  the  room,  and  act 
as  a  mechanical  figure  might,  gliding  a  few  yards 
to  the  right  or  left.  These  are  but  toys  and  play- 
things of  the  seance  room,  demonstrating  the 
power  of  mind  over  matter. 


84  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

PSYCHO-PLASTIC  TRANSFIGURATION. 

Spirit  operators  in  the  materializing  seance 
room  often  give  a  representation  of  a  departed 
friend  through  psycho-plastic  transfiguration.  This 
process  consists  in  drawing  from  the  medium  suffi- 
cient matter  to  clothe  the  medium's  face,  which  is 
then  moulded  into  the  likeness  of  the  spirit  who 
wishes  to  manifest,  the  hair  and  beard  and  other 
matter  being  added  by  the  spirit  operator  until  the 
medium  is  wholly  transfigured.  Over  the  gar- 
ments of  the  medium,  spirit  drapery  is  thrown, 
completely  concealing  his  figure,  and  he  is  then 
controlled,  as  in  trance  mediumship,  by  the  spirit 
whose  likeness  has  been  constructed,  and  walks 
and  speaks  under  his  influence.  Such  a  likeness  is 
often  most  accurate,  for  the  medium's  face  is  fre- 
quently so  ductile  that  it  further  lends  itself  to 
change  by  the  strong  will  power  of  the  manifesting 
spirit.  During  one  such  experiment  for  transfigu- 
ration the  electric  light  was  accidentally  switched 
on,  and  the  manifesting  form,  an  Eastern  spirit, 
with  dusky  skin,  turban  and  dark  bushy  beard, 
draped  in  spirit  garments  from  head  to  foot,  stood 
for  a  moment  sedately  at  ease  under  the  full  blaze 
of  light.  The  white  garment  then  shrivelled 
rapidly  upwards  towards  the  head  and  shoulders, 
the  turban  and  mask  melting  Into  a  white,  shape- 
less,   foggy  material,   which   chiefly  congregated 


MATERIALIZATION  85 

round  the  head  and  face,  and  within  twenty  sec- 
onds entirely  evaporated,  leaving  the  medium 
standing  in  deep  trance  where  the  spirit  had  pre- 
viously manifested.  The  psycho-plastic  matter 
which  had  been  used  by  the  spirit  artist  to  cover 
the  body  of  the  medium  in  this  manner,  melted 
under  the  rays  of  the  electric  light,  and  returned 
to  his  body  as  a  subtle,  unseen  spirit  essence.  The 
photographs  illustrating  Schrenck  Notzing's  book 
show  this  rapid  melting  of  the  spirit  clothing 
under  the  action  of  the  flashlight  while  the  forms 
are  being  photographed,  for  the  draperies  before 
being  exposed  to  the  light  extended  to  the  floor, 
but  almost  instantaneously  shrivelled  to  a  quarter 
of  their  length,  or  even  less.  Immediately  they 
were  subjected  to  the  action  of  light.  Wherever 
accidental  illumination  takes  place  in  a  materializ- 
ing seance  room,  great  nervous  shock  is  experi- 
enced by  the  medium,  sometimes  causing  pro- 
tracted catalepsy  and  temporary  blindness,  which 
may  continue  for  days,  and  even  weeks;  but,  as 
before  stated,  where  due  precautions  are  taken  by 
the  spirit  operators  who  protect  the  medium,  and 
their  permission  is  granted,  no  evil  results  need 
follow.  The  danger  of  such  an  experiment,  espe- 
cially when  carried  out  by  amateurs.  Is  therefore 
obvious.  Psycho-plastic  transfiguration  Is  usually 
adopted  where  the  matter  is  insufficient  for  full- 


86  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

form  materialization,  and  sometimes  spirit  con- 
trols fail  to  inform  the  experimenters  that  trans- 
figuration is  being  given  as  a  substitute  for  the 
latter,  thus  causing  great  disappointment  and  an- 
noyance, especially  when  an  eager  sceptic  seizes 
the  form  of  the  medium,  and  thinks  he  has  un- 
masked a  conscious  fraud.  Such  carelessness,  if 
one  cannot  call  it  something  worse,  on  the  part  of 
spirit  controls  who  carry  on  this  work  Is  most 
reprehensible,  but  it  is  equally  unsatisfactory  to 
allow  within  the  materializing  seance  room,  peo- 
ple so  ignorant  of  the  ordinary  laws  governing 
the  subject  that  they  will  act  in  such  a  way,  and 
endanger  the  life  and  health  of  one  so  sensitive 
as  a  materializing  medium.  The  world  cannot 
afford  to  treat  such  rare  instruments  in  this  way, 
even  though  a  fool  in  his  folly  may  sometimes 
think  he  demonstrates  a  fact  which  is  well  known 
to  serious  investigators,  who  have  arrived  at  their 
truth  without  taking  such  drastic  steps  to  secure  it. 
Not  until  the  subject  is  more  thoroughly  under- 
stood by  the  public,  are  we  likely  to  have  a  dis- 
continuance of  such  incidents,  and  in  the  meantime 
no  one  should  be  allowed  In  the  materializing 
seance  room  who  has  not  received  some  conclu- 
sive evidence  of  spirit  intercourse  through  trance 
mediumship,  or  has  made  by  reading,  some  study 
of  the  subject  and  the  subtle  problems  it  presents. 


MATERIALIZATION  87 

The  phenomena  In  these  materializing  experi- 
ments Is  of  so  startling  a  nature  and  so  altogether 
beyond  the  ordinary  experience  of  a  normal  man 
that  It  Is  quite  natural  that  scepticism  should  some- 
times get  the  better  of  a  sitter,  and  lead  him  to 
satisfy  his  doubts  by  any  means.  The  day  Is  not 
far  off  when  such  actions,  however,  will  be  con- 
sidered criminal,  for  many  an  excellent  medium 
has  been  lost  to  the  public  through  such  Ignorant 
action.  The  subtle  forces  that  are  at  play  are  so 
obscure  that  only  competent  men  of  occult  science 
can  be  expected  to  Investigate  them  wisely,  or  at- 
tempt an  adequate  explanation. 

MATERIALIZATION  OF  ANIMALS. 

The  question  often  arises  as  to  whether  animals 
live  beyond  death,  but  this  has  been  satisfactorily 
settled  by  occult  experts  many  years  ago  In  the 
seance  room,  where  deceased  pet  animals  are 
brought  by  spirit  friends  and  materialized.  These 
are  much  more  easily  materialized  than  the  human 
form,  but  the  reason  for  this  Is  difficult  to  explain, 
and  space  will  not  permit  of  It  In  this  book.  The 
author  has  seen  dogs,  cats,  rabbits,  and  birds  ma- 
terialized again  and  again  during  many  experi- 
ments, and  on  one  occasion  a  large,  flopping  pet 
seal  was  produced.  Every  animal  has  within  It 
a  soul  and  spirit,  and  continues  to  function  after 


88  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

death  as  a  living  creature  upon  the  animal  spirit- 
sphere  immediately  below  the  astral  plane;  but 
where  they  have  been  greatly  loved  and  kept  as 
pets,  they  may  rise  to  the  second,  third  and  fourth 
spheres  and  there  remain  for  many  years,  ulti- 
mately descending  to  their  own  level. 


CHAPTER  IV 

MEDIUMSHIP.      OBJECTIVE  PHENOMENA 

In  justice  to  myself  and  my  co-workers,  I  must 
risk  annoying  my  present  hearers,  not  only  by 
leaving  on  record  our  conviction  that  occurrences 
now  regarded  as  occult  can  be  examined  and  re- 
duced to  order  by  the  methods  of  science  care- 
fully and  persistently  applied,  but  by  going  further 
and  saying,  with  the  utmost  brevity,  that  already 
the  facts  so  examined  have  convinced  me  that 
memory  and  affection  are  not  limited  to  that  as- 
sociation with  matter  by  which  alone  they  can 
manifest  themselves  here  and  now,  and  that  per- 
sonality persists  beyond  bodily  death. — SiR 
Oliver  Lodge;  extract  from  Presidential  Ad- 
dress before  the  British  Association,  19 13. 

THIS  chapter  has  been   written  in  order  to 
explain  the  various  leading  forms  of  me- 
diumship  and  the  modus  operandi  by  which 
spiritual  beings  arrive  at  their  results.     The  dif- 
ferent aspects  of  mediumship  are  difficult  for  the 
novice  to  understand,  but  they  may  be  divided  into 

89 


90  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

two  distinct  groups,  namely,  Objective  and  Sub- 
jective Phenomena. 

Sensitives  who  demonstrate  objective  medium- 
ship  are  usually  termed  "physical"  mediums,  be- 
cause their  mediumship  is  devoted  to  the  manipu- 
lation of  physical  objects,  such  as  materialized 
forms,  levitation  of  solid  articles,  or  the  creation 
of  audible  voices,  etc.,  which  are  all  evident  to  the 
ordinary  physical  senses  of  man.  Subjective  me- 
diumship is  the  term  given  to  those  with  clair- 
voyant, clairaudient,  and  psychometric  powers 
which  are  unseen,  and  have  their  seat  within  the 
medium's  consciousness.  Some  mediums  are  capa- 
ble of  producing  both,  but  usually  they  specialize 
on  one  aspect,  for  by  exclusively  directing  their 
attention  to  one  phase  greater  perfection  is 
achieved. 

It  is  important  to  realize  that  no  spirit  can 
manifest  itself  in  a  physical  body,  or  move  a 
physical  object,  or  send  a  message  to  earthly  in- 
habitants, without  the  use  of  a  human  soul  to  ac- 
complish this  end.  It  Is  by  this  bridge  that  spirits 
contact  earthly  substance.  If  students  will  keep 
this  fact  constantly  In  mind,  an  explanation  of 
\  much  puzzling  and  obscure  phenomena  will  be 
more  easily  comprehended.  With  regard  to  all 
mediumship,  both  objective  and  subjective,  much 
that  goes  by  the  name  of  fraud  Is  due  to  the  close 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  9  I 

link  that  exists  between  the  mind  of  the  operating 
spirit  and  the  mind  of  the  medium,  for  the  latter 
colors,  more  or  less,  all  that  the  former  thinks 
or  does.  The  accuracy  of  a  spirit  message  will 
depend  upon  the  degree  of  development  of  the 
medium,  and  the  power  of  a  spirit  to  express  his 
thoughts  and  dominate  for  the  moment  the  pre- 
conceived opinions  and  temperament  of  the  me- 
dium; but  whatever  the  success,  the  message  has 
to  filter  through  the  medium's  mind,  and  is  there- 
fore bound  to  be  colored  by  the  channel  through 
which  it  flows.  Let  us  take  the  following  ex- 
ample : — 

Mr.  A ,   a   spirit  of  no   definite  religious 

views,  may  seek  to  speak  through  the  organism  of 
Mrs.  Brown,  a  medium  who  is  a  member  of  the 
local  Wesleyan  Church,  and  if  Mrs.  Brown  is  well 

developed  psychically,   Mr.  A will  be   able 

to  manifest  his  personality  most  clearly  and  dis- 
tinctly, yet  with  a  slight  bias  in  favor  of  Wesley- 
anism,  the  coloring  of  the  medium's  mind.  The 
spirit,  Mr.  A ,  operating  through  another  me- 
dium, Mrs.  Smith,  who  has  agnostic  tendencies, 
will  also  be  able  to  demonstrate  clearly,  but  with 
a  leaning  In  favor  of  agnosticism,  the  bias  being 
due  to  the  preconceived  Ideas  of  Mrs.  Smith. 

This  difficulty  In  mediumship  can  never  be  sur- 
mounted,   even    though    one's    own    mediumistic 


92  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

qualities  are  trained  to  get  into  contact  with  spirit- 
ual beings,  for  the  recipient's  education  and  opin- 
ion will  color  each  thought  and  tint  each  picture 
received  from  spiritual  sources.  This  is  quite 
evident  to  the  careful  observer,  and  is  to  be  seen 
in  the  psychic  illumination  received  by  such  teach- 
ers as  Moses,  Buddha,  Plato,  Socrates,  St.  Paul, 
Dante,  St.  Francis,  Milton  and  Swedenborg, 
which  was  colored  in  each  case  by  religious  train- 
ing, environment  and  temperament. 

It  is  not,  of  course,  claimed  by  the  writer  that 
he  is  exempt  from  these  limitations,  but  he  would 
claim  that  his  facts  have  been  secured  in  a  day  of 
toleration  such  as  the  world  has  never  known,  and 
when  the  valuable  assistance  of  mediums,  drawn 
from  the  world  at  large,  has  been  at  his  disposal, 
such  as  could  never  have  been  found  by  an  indi- 
vidual in  the  history  of  the  past,  owing  to  the  lack 
of  the  modern  helps  of  the  steam  engine,  the  tele- 
graph, and  the  printing  press.  These  sensitive 
instruments,  called  mediums,  have  been  brought 
to  his  knowledge,  and  to  his  door,  for  practical 
experiment,  and  in  addition  he  has  made  an  ex- 
tended study  of  the  accumulated  experience  of  the 
ages  on  the  subject,  as  recorded  in  both  sacred 
and  secular  literature.  The  only  hope  of  arriving 
at  any  degree  of  truth  regarding  psychic  laws,  is 
to  endeavor  to  hold  an  unbiassed  mind,  accepting 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  93 

the  facts  that  present  themselves,  and  welcoming 
all,  whether  favorable  or  unfavorable  to  any  pro- 
conceived  opinion.  Adopting  as  far  as  possible 
such  an  attitude  of  mind,  the  author  Is  convinced 
that  accurate  knowledge  regarding  spiritual  things 
may  be  arrived  at  with  as  much  exactness  as  any- 
thing can  really  be  said  to  be  known  regarding  the 
physical  universe,  or  the  thoughts  of  Its  Inhabi- 
tants. Years  of  patient  Investigation  and  a  well- 
balanced  mind  are  necessary  for  the  study  of  any 
science,  but  especially  is  this  the  case  in  psychic 
matters.  It  is  well  to  remember  that  there  is  no 
science  in  the  world  which  has  not  its  great  prob- 
lems, and  it  must  not,  therefore,  be  expected  that 
the  one  under  consideration  will  be  an  exception 
in  this  respect. 

The  author  will  endeavor  to  give  a  very  brief 
resume  of  the  various  forms  of  objective  and  sub- 
jective mediumship  under  their  various  titles, 
trusting  that  the  explanations  offered  will  help  the 
reader  to  understand  some  of  the  strange  and 
subtle  powers  that  are  at  work  in  these  mani- 
festations. 

TABLE-TILTING. 

There  is  nothing  more  instructive  to  the  man 
of  inquiring  mind  than  experiments  in  psychic 
table-turning  when   properly  pursued,    for  these 


94  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

tend  to  demonstrate  in  a  most  conclusive  manner 
that  mind  and  matter  are  separate  and  independ- 
ent things.  Reproach,  sarcasm  and  contempt  have 
for  years  been  levelled  at  those  who  have  seriously 
experimented  with  table-turning,  usually  by  cer- 
tain individuals  of  a  pseudo-scientific  mind,  who 
are  completely  ignorant  of  the  results  obtained  by 
its  means,  and  who  seem  to  imagine  it  creditable  to 
reject  a  natural  phenomenon.  Jumping  tables  and 
floating  tambourines  are  neither  to  be  despised  nor 
neglected  on  the  one  hand,  nor  viewed  with  open- 
mouthed  admiration  nor  sacred  awe  on  the  other, 
but  treated  with  common  sense  and  studied  with  a 
rational  desire  to  learn  something  of  the  subtle 
forces  behind  such  movements.  If  this  is  done,  it 
will  be  found  that  an  unknown  independent  mind 
is  at  work,  who  by  means  of  such  movements  may 
convey  important  messages,  in  a  manner  very 
similar  to  a  telegraph  instrument.  Unfortunately 
very  little  is  known  by  the  average  investigator  in 
table-turning,  as  to  how  these  movements  are  pro- 
duced. This  is  owing  to  the  fact  that  those  who 
investigate  in  this  manner  are  interested  more  in 
the  messages  received  than  in  the  methods  by 
which  they  are  conveyed.  It  is  not  the  author's 
object  to  relate  some  of  the  startling  messages  and 
results  that  have  been  got  through  this  simple 
form  of  mechanical  communication,  for  these  are 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  95 

already  supplied  in  other  publications,  but  to  give 
a  scientific  explanation  of  the  manner  by  which 
the  movements  are  produced  by  spirit  operators. 
In  this,  as  in  all  other  abnormal  psychic  mani- 
festation, some  portion  of  a  human  soul  is  re- 
quired, and  without  this  no  table-movement  can 
be  produced.  The  medium  is  but  a  passive  instru- 
ment in  the  hands  of  the  unseen  operators,  and 
may  be  normally  conscious  or  entranced  during  the 
experiments  for  table-movement,  but  is  usually 
the  former.  Those  who  are  most  suitable  as  me- 
diums for  this,  or  any  other  phase  of  abnormal 
psychic  manifestation,  are  naturally  gifted  with 
an  exterior  soul,  sometimes  called  the  etheric_body, 
which  Is  pliable  In  nature  and  easily  detached  from 
the  physical  organism,  and  which  may  be  partly 
ejected  from  the  chest,  neck  or  arms,  or  the  whole 
body.  In  the  majority  of  cases  when  table-move- 
ment Is  secured,  and  the  hands  of  the  operators 
are  In  contact  with  the  table,  but  not  so  as  to  move 
It,  the  system  of  spirit  control  is  by  one  of  two 
methods.  The  first  and  most  usual  practice  is  for 
the  operating  spirit  to  draw  Into  the  table  animal 
magnetism  from  the  bodies  of  the  experimenters, 
and  when  this  has  been  stored  in  sufficient  quan- 
tity, a  portion  of  the  soul-substance  of  the  medium 
IS  next  drawn  forth.  By  its  aid  the  unseen  opera- 
tors may  materialize   an   astral  hand   sufficiently 


96  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

dense  to  raise  the  table  by  the  will  of  the  operat- 
ing spirit,  who  uses  the  stored  magnetism  as  the 
energy  for  its  accomplishment.  A  second  method 
is  to  draw  forth  a  portion  of  the  soul  and  place 
it  below  the  table  as  a  kind  of  cushion,  and  upon 
this  the  will  of  the  spirit  is  directed  to  raise  or 
lower  the  table,  using  the  animal  magnetism  as 
before.  Some  students  cannot  get  satisfactory 
table-movement,  although  healthy  and  with  plenty 
of  animal  magnetism,  owing  to  the  inability  of  the 
unseen  operators  to  extract  a  portion  of  their  soul 
by  the  use  of  which  the  movement  takes  place. 
With  those  who  do  secure  results,  movement  may 
continue  for  an  hour,  more  or  less,  and  then  grad- 
ually cease,  this  being  entirely  due  to  the  energy 
required  for  the  experiment  having  been  used  up. 
The  sitters  may,  at  the  close  of  the  seance,  feel 
extremely  tired  through  the  loss  of  this  power,  and 
when  once  this  energy  has  been  dissipated,  the 
sitting  should  be  immediately  concluded,  otherwise 
the  health  of  the  weaker  experimenters  may  suffer 
as  a  consequence. 

Sometimes  the  soul  may  be  ejected,  but  lacking 
the  vital  energy  to  stiffen  it  when  projected,  no 
physical  results  can  be  obtained.  When  hea\^ 
dining-room  tables  are  levitated,  a  larger  amount 
of  energy  is  required,  and  a  larger  number  of 
spirits  needed  as  operators.     Where  a  number  of 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  97 

spirits  are  at  work,  the  energy  abundant,  and  the 
soul  link  strong.  It  would  be  impossible  either  to 
raise  or  lower  the  table  against  the  will  of  these 
operators,  and  experiments  of  this  kind  have  been 
carried  out  where  the  table  has  been  smashed  to 
pieces  in  the  human  endeavor  to  raise  or  lower  it 
against  the  will  of  the  unseen  beings.     There  Is 
no  necessity  for  any  such  damage,  for  a  spirit  will 
always  agree  to  lower  the  table  when  requested, 
unless    he    is   challenged    or   definitely    requested 
to   resist.     When  movement  of  the   table   takes 
place  without  physical  contact,  this  is   due  to   a 
more  complete  withdrawal  of  the  soul  of  the  me- 
dium, which  is  held  in  a  projected  state,  as  there  is 
always  a  tendency  for  it  to  resume  its  place  within 
the  medium's  physical  organism.     The  soul,  when 
partly  projected,  may  sometimes  be  slightly  ma- 
terialized, or  seen  by  the  clairvoyant.     The  form 
may  vary  In  shape,  but  we  may  have  some  idea  of 
Its  usual  appearance  If  we  can  Imagine  a  thick, 
stick-like    arm,    quite    straight    and    without    any 
joints,  protruding  from  the  chest,  the  side,  or  even 
from  the  lower  limbs  of  the  medium,  shaped  much 
in  the  form  of  a  billiard  cue,  which  as  It  moves 
outwards  and  inwards  from  the  trunk  or  limb  of 
the  medium,  does  so  In  a  manner  similar  to  the 
action  of  a  billiard  cue,  shooting  out  in  a  straight 
line  without  any  lateral  movement  whatever.  This 


98  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

part-projection  of  soul  is  manipulated  by  the  will 
of  the  operating  spirit,  and  is  not  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  medium.  The  will  of  the  spirit  acting 
within  it,  can  in  a  moment  extend  this  cue-like 
limb  from  two  to  three  feet,  and  project  fingers 
at  its  terminal  end,  so  as  to  grasp  the  leg  of  the 
table,  and  thus  pull  it  towards  the  medium  or  pusl^ 
it  from  him  as  may  be  desired.  These  fingers  sud- 
denly project  themselves  from  the  point  of  the 
ghostly  cue,  very  much  as  the  horns  of  a  snail 
protrude,  and  just  as  rapidly  recede.  The  fingers 
may  number  five,  but  most  commonly  not  more 
than  three  are  produced,  as  this  number  is  quite 
suflicient  for  the  purpose  of  gripping.  Sometimes 
these  arms  are  projected  from  the  medium  on 
both  sides,  and  in  such  a  case  the  table  is  more 
powerfully  governed.  Subdued  light  Is  always 
best  for  psychic  phenomena,  as  brilliant  light 
tends  to  dematerialize  the  psychic  arm,  and  squan- 
ders the  energy.  Let  it  be  clearly  understood  that 
these  psychic  arms  are  seldom  materialized  in  a 
form  that  can  be  seen  by  the  ordinary  physical 
sight.  They  are  composed  of  superphysical  mat- 
ter, and  are,  except  on  rare  occasions,  only  visible 
to  the  clairvoyant,  but  are  nevertheless  capable  of 
rigidity,  and  sufficiently  powerful  to  transmit 
energy  either  of  a  drawing  or  of  a  pushing  char- 
acter. 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  99 

SPIRIT  RAPPING,  ETC. 

Spirit  rapping  is  secured  by  collecting  energy 
from  the  human  body,  condensing  it,  and  by  the 
link  of  the  medium's  soul,  throwing  it  upon  the 
table  or  walls,  thus  causing  a  light  contact.  This 
may  be  graduated  in  sound  from  the  tiniest  tick 
to  a  reverberation  similar  to  a  bomb  explosion. 
There  are  various  methods  by  which  these  sounds 
can  be  produced,  but  the  above  are  the  most  usual. 

The  transference  of  physical  objects  in  a  room 
is  frequently  performed  by  an  extension  of  the 
psychic  arm,  which  may  stretch  out  some  con- 
siderable distance  from  the  medium,  lift  a  cup  or 
ornament  and  transfer  it  from  one  place  to  an- 
other. This  may  also  be  accomplished  by  the  spirit 
transferring  the  object  with  his  own  hand,  the 
hand  being  semi-materialized,  but  not  sufficiently 
so  as  to  be  observed  by  ordinary  sight. 

The  movement  of  lights,  ringing  of  bells,  throw- 
ing of  objects,  are  all  secured  by  the  soul  link  and 
human  energy,  and  whenever  hauntings  occur  with 
a  disturbance  of  physical  objects,  these  can  only 
take  place  when  within  the  vicinity  of  the  objects 
moved,  there  is  one  or  more  human  beings  with 
mediumistic  gifts,  though  these  individuals  may  be 
quite  ignorant  that  they  are  being  used  to  cause 
such  manifestations. 


lOO  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

AUTOMATIC  WRITING. 

Automatic  writing  is  that  phase  of  seership  in 
which  the  hand  of  the  medium  is  controlled  to 
write  by  an  unseen  power.  The  writing  is  usually 
of  an  altogether  different  character  to  that  of  the 
medium's  normal  production,  and  may  vary  from 
day  to  day,  but  as  a  rule  it  is  confined  to  one  or 
two  separate  and  distinct  styles  of  handwriting. 
In  most  of  the  ideas  expressed,  certain  character- 
istics of  the  medium's  mind  will  be  reproduced, 
but  there  will  also  be  a  distinct  individuality  of 
thought  expressed  in  the  writing,  quite  separate 
from  that  of  the  medium.  In  one  who  is  a  well- 
developed  automatic  writer,  the  script  will  contain 
ninety  per  cent,  of  the  individuality  of  the  spirit 
controlling  and  show  about  ten  per  cent,  of  the  in- 
fluence of  the  medium,  and  in  a  poorly-developed 
automatic  writer  the  writing  will  show  almost  the 
reverse  proportions.  Information  of  a  distinct 
and  detailed  nature  is  often  received,  quite  un- 
known to  the  medium,  such  as  actual  incidents 
happening  many  miles  away,  or  unknown  names 
and  dates  and  particulars  regarding  strangers, 
which  later  are  often  confirmed  as  correct. 

There  are  two  methods  by  which  the  hand  is 
used  in  automatic  writing:  direct  and  indirect  con- 
trol. Direct  control  is  the  most  satisfactory,  for 
in  such  a  case  the  medium  may  sit  and  read,  while 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  lOI 

the  hand  Is  operated  by  the  will  of  a  spirit  intelli- 
gence. The  indirect  method  Is  accomplished  by 
a  spirit  Impressing  his  thoughts  upon  the  brain  of 
the  medium  and  Impelling  him  to  write,  much  In 
the  same  way  as  the  hypnotist  controls  his  subject, 
but  In  automatic  writing  the  subject  Is  not  en- 
tranced, although  there  may  be  a  powerful  feeling 
that  one  Is  not  always  directly  participating  In 
what  Is  taking  place. 

PSYCHIC   SLATE-WRITING. 

This  Is  commonly  accomplished  by  solidifying 
between  closed  slates,  three  small  materialized 
fingers  built  up  from  matter  drawn  from  the  me- 
dium; the  energy  by  which  the  fingers  are  moved 
Is  also  drawn  from  his  body.  These  fingers  write 
quite  Independently  of  the  medium's  will,  but  the 
thoughts,  words  and  spelling  that  are  produced 
upon  the  slates  will  often  show  traces  of  his  mind. 

SPIRIT  PAINTING. 

This,  where  accomplished  by  the  medium's 
hands,  does  not  need  much  explanation,  as  it  is 
purely  a  case  of  ordinary  spirit  control,  and  is  ac- 
counted for  by  the  spirit  ejecting  the  upper  portion 
of  the  medium's  soul,  entering  In  and  possessing 
this  portion  of  the  medium's  body,  and  from  the 
brain  centre  controlling  the  hands  in  a  normal 


102  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

manner,  using  the  brushes  and  paints  as  any  mor- 
tal would.  In  this  case  the  medium  is  probably  in 
an  entranced  condition.  Others  are  overshadowed 
by  a  spirit  control,  and  while  they  are  practically 
normal  are  mechanically  moved  to  produce  paint- 
ing. Where  pictures  are  produced,  however, 
while  the  medium's  hands  are  held  by  the  sitters, 
one  and  sometimes  two  materialized  hands  pro- 
ject from  the  breast  of  the  medium,  and  these 
manipulate  the  brushes  and  paints,  this  usually 
taking  place  in  total  darkness. 

SPIRIT  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

W.  T.  Stead,  the  late  editor  of  The  Review  of 
Reviews^  believed  that  spirit  photography  would 
in  the  future  supply  the  principal  body  of  evidence 
to  prove  the  continuity  of  life  beyond  death.  The 
author  Is  of  the  same  opinion,  and  holds  that  this 
has  already  been  accomplished,  and  Is  confident 
that  within  the  present  century  men  will  be  able 
to  secure  spirit  photographs  of  their  departed 
friends  with  as  much  ease  as  a  photograph  of  a 
mortal  may  now  be  got.  A  slight  addition  to 
man's  present  knowledge  regarding  the  chemical 
composition  and  preparation  of  suitable  photo- 
graphic plates  will  enable  the  photographer  to 
produce  a  picture  of  the  soul-rays  which  emanate 
from  the  bodies  of  the  so-called  dead,  and  thus 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  IO3 

produce  an  accurate  likeness  of  them.  At  present 
several  psychic  photographers  can  procure  spirit 
forms  upon  three-fourths  of  the  plates  exposed,  a 
fairly  large  proportion  of  such  being  recognized 
as  departed  friends  and  relatives. 

An  experiment  carried  out  by  the  author  this 
year  In  spirit  photography,  with  an  English  me- 
dium, will  give  the  reader  an  example  of  what 
can  be  accomplished.  On  eighteen  ordinary  photo- 
graphic plates  exposed,  eleven  spirit  forms  ap- 
peared, four  of  these  being  excellent  likenesses  of 
deceased  relatives  and  friends,  three  of  these  hav- 
ing previously  agreed  with  the  author,  before  the 
experiment,  to  endeavor  to  appear  on  the  plates. 
These  were  taken  and  developed  under  strictly 
test  conditions,  and  procured  In  ordinary  daylight. 
During  the  past  fifteen  years  the  author  has  se- 
cured photographs  of  every  departed  relative 
whom  he  has  requested  to  manifest,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  one,  and  that  one  he  could  doubtless 
procure  by  a  further  trial.  A  reproduction  of  two 
of  these  spirit  forms  is  shown  facing  page  104.  It 
will  be  observed  that  the  figures  are  clothed  in 
white  drapery,  the  usual  form  In  which  they  ap- 
pear, but  In  some  cases  the  garments  reproduced 
are  similar  to  the  dress  worn  by  the  individuals 
when  on  earth.  These  spirit  forms  while  being 
photographed  are  unseen  by  physical  sight,  but 


104  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

are  usually  visible  to  the  clairvoyant,  who  can 
often  perceive  them  standing  in  front  of  the 
camera.  It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  the  camera 
can  reflect  rays  which  are  not  observable  to  the 
ordinary  eye,  and  It  Is  partly  on  this  account  that 
the  forms  appear,  and  partly  owing  to  reasons  ex- 
plained below. 

Spirit  photographs  are  produced  in  other  ways, 
difficult  for  new  Investigators  to  understand,  and 
often  even  unexplalnable  by  the  operating  spirit. 
These  forms  are  sometimes  projected  upon  the 
plate,  within  the  camera  Itself.  At  other  times 
they  seem  to  be  copies  of  old  photographs  which 
are  reproduced  In  spirit  spheres,  and  precipitated 
directly  upon  the  gelatine  plates.  Another  method 
of  spirit  photography  secures  results  without  a 
camera,  where  the  medium  holds  the  plate  within 
his  hands  while  sitting  In  the  dark.  By  this  method 
many  strange  and  peculiar  pictures  appear  when 
the  plate  Is  developed.  A  form  of  spirit  photog- 
raphy most  puzzling  to  understand.  Is  where  a 
packet  of  sealed  plates,  before  being  opened,  and 
while  held  in  the  hands  of  a  medium,  receives 
upon  one  of  the  central  plates  an  excellent  picture 
of  faces,  flowers,  landscapes,  and  many  other  de- 
signs. The  same  effects  arc  sometimes  produced 
by  having  the  plates  bound  to  the  brow  of  the 
medium,  and  retained  there  for  some  time. 


SPIRIT    PHOTOGRAPHS 

Relatives  of  the  author  taken  in  ordinary  daylight  many  years  after  their  decease. 
To  face  p.  104  The  coat-sleeve  showing  is  that  of  the  author 


•      «      '■ 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  IO5 

Before  anyone  can  hope  to  secure  spirit  photo- 
graphs with  regularity,  conditions  must  first  be 
provided.  This  not  only  needs  an  operator  with 
some  skill  upon  the  spirit  side  of  life  who  under- 
stands the  laws  governing  the  phenomena,  but  re- 
quires some  considerable  practice  on  their  part 
with  a  medium,  before  they  succeed  in  manipulat- 
ing the  psychic  forces.  It  also  requires  one  with 
mediumistic  qualities  to  supply  from  his  body  that 
refined  psychic  essence  in  which  a  spirit  is  able, 
temporarily,  to  clothe  himself,  and  produce  a  form 
sufliciently  tangible  to  affect  the  sensitive  plate. 

Spirit  photographs  are  frequently  taken  acci- 
dentally, for  the  author  receives  such  from  time 
to  time  from  those  who  know  nothing  of  the  sub- 
ject. Many,  ignorant  of  the  fact  of  spirit  photog- 
raphy, when  they  find  an  unaccountable  form  ap- 
pear upon  a  plate,  cast  It  aside  as  spoiled,  uncon- 
scious of  the  fact  that  it  may  have  been  abnormally 
produced.  Those  who  secure  such  unexpected 
pictures  would  do  well  to  devote  a  little  time  to 
study  the  laws  governing  psychic  photography, 
and  submit  such  plates  to  someone  experienced  in 
this  branch  of  psychic  science. 

One  of  the  best  English  "spirit"  photographers, 
now  deceased,  before  he  knew  of  his  strange  gift, 
was  In  his  earlier  years  in  partnership  with  an- 
other as  a  professional  photographer.     For  years 


Io6  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

ghostly  faces  and  fogged  plates  puzzled  and  an- 
noyed him,  and  so  frequently  did  these  appear  that 
they  led  to  a  disruption  of  the  partnership. 

A  most  difficult  but  highly  important  experi- 
ment in  spirit  photography  is  that  of  the  photo- 
graphing of  the  soul  of  the  living  man.  This  can 
only  be  hoped  for  by  those  who  have  the  gift  of 
psychic  photography,  and  are  also  clairvoyant,  for 
the  opportunity  of  seeing  a  living  individual's 
ghost  or  double  does  not  present  itself  often,  and 
when  it  does,  can  only  be  seen  by  a  clairvoyant, 
and  then  photographed.  Experiments  have  been 
carried  out  where  the  soul  of  a  living  man  has  been 
photographed  from  various  distances  from  his 
body,  and  on  one  verified  occasion  a  picture  was 
taken  of  the  soul  of  a  man  who  was  nearly  3,000 
miles  away  from  the  photographic  studio  where 
his  form  was  seen. 

It  must  not  be  thought  that  the  author  Is  not 
aware  of  the  many  accidents  which  may  happen 
from  time  to  time  in  photographic  experiments 
which  may  produce  a  seeming  double  or  "extra." 
But  It  Is  not  on  such  happenings,  nor  on  photo- 
graphs "faked"  with  Infinite  trouble,  that  the 
science  of  spirit  photography  rests.  Its  truth  has 
been  tested,  and  Is  being  tested  daily,  in  Britain, 
France,  and  America,  by  experimenters  who  are 
professional  and  non-professional  photographers, 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  IO7 

and  who  are  often  reluctantly  forced  to  admit, 
that  by  no  means  but  by  the  alleged  one  of  the 
operation  of  spirit  powers  could  the  results  have 
been  obtahied. 

THE  OPENING   OF   LOCKED  DOORS. 

Houdini,  called  the  "Handcuff  King,"  who  has 
so  ably  demonstrated  his  powers  upon  public-hall 
platforms,  is  enabled  by  psychic  power,  though 
this  he  does  not  advertise,  to  open  any  lock,  hand- 
cuff, or  bolt  that  is  submitted  to  him.  He  has  been 
imprisoned  within  heavily  barred  cells,  doubly  and 
trebly  locked,  and  from  them  all  has  escaped  with 
ease.  This  abihty  to  unbolt  locked  doors  is  un- 
doubtedly due  to  his  mediumistic  powers,  and  not 
to  any  normal  mechanical  operation  upon  the  lock. 
The  force  necessary  to  shoot  a  bolt  within  a  lock, 
is  drawn  from  Houdini  as  the  medium,  but  it  must 
not  be  thought  that  this  is  the  only  means  by  which 
he  can  escape  from  his  prison,  for  at  times  his 
body  has  been  dematerialized  and  withdrawn,  but 
this  will  be  treated  in  another  part  of  this  chapter. 

LEVITATION. 

This  term  is  used  when  sohd  objects,  rising  in 
space,  float  independently  of  any  visible  contact, 
and  overcome  the  law  of  gravitation. 

The  most  notable  instances  of  this  manifesta- 


I08  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

tlon  on  record  are  those  related  of  the  famous 
Scottish  medium,  D.  D.  Home.  The  levitations 
took  place  in  a  good  light,  and  before  a  number  of 
eminent  witnesses,  on  different  occasions.  In 
1 87 1,  the  Master  of  Lindsay  and  Lord  Adare  per- 
sonally testified  to  the  fact  of  Home  being  lifted 
from  his  chair  and  carried  through  an  aperture 
of  eighteen  inches  in  one  window,  about  seventy 
feet  above  the  ground.  He  was  seen  to  float  out- 
side the  w^indow,  balance  himself  above  the  sill 
of  another  window,  raise  it  and  glide  in,  feet  fore- 
most. Sir  William  Crookes  bears  testimony  to 
similar  wonderful  experiments  with  Llome,  and 
there  are  many  authentic  records  in  history  of  like 
incidents  happening  to  others. 

The  method  by  which  the  spirit  operators  carry 
out  such  a  task — for  it  is  undoubtedly  done  by 
their  independent  will,  the  medium  being  quite  in- 
capable of  performing  it  himself — is  to  place 
around  his  body  an  unseen  insulating  cushion  com- 
posed of  a  portion  of  his  own  soul.  Upon  this 
they  exert  their  will  power,  using  the  animal  mag- 
netism from  the  medium  and  those  present,  and  in 
this  way  support  the  medium  in  space. 

APPORTS. 

This  term  is  applied  to  that  mediumship  by 
which  articles  are  carried  from   a   distance  and 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  IO9 

deposited   in  the  seance   room,   such   as   trinkets, 
objects  of  wood  and  stone,  flowers,  birds,  beasts 
and  fish.     These  may  be  carried  from  an  adjoin- 
ing room,  or  may  be  brought  from  the  other  end 
of  the  world,  or  taken  from  sealed  packages,  and 
brought  into  the  seance  room,  the  doors  of  which 
may  be  securely  locked,  careful  examination  hav- 
ing  previously  been   made   that   nothing   of   the 
kind  is  within  the   room,   or  upon  the   medium. 
These  apports  are  dematerialized  upon  the  spot 
where  they  are  secured,  by  spirits,  who  are  able 
to  accom.plish  this  by  forces  taken  from  the  me- 
dium.    These  objects   are  brought  in  a   soluble 
state,  and  materialized  within  the  psychic  labora- 
tory, where  the  experiments  are  being  carried  out. 
Such  articles  are  usually  allowed  to  remain,  thus 
providing  physical  evidences  of  spirit  powers,  but 
it  is  also  common  for  them  to  be  dematerialized, 
and  returned  to  the  spot  from  which  they  were 
originally  taken,  especially  if  they  are  of  any  in- 
trinsic value.      The  birds   and  animals  seem   to 
suffer  but  Httle  from  the  dematerializing  process, 
but  occasionally  they  are  somewhat  dazed  after 
these  hasty  and  peculiar  translations.    When  they 
are  allowed  to  remain  they  may  live   for  many 
years   in   captivity,   proving  that  the   process   of 
dematerialization  does  not  really  interfere  with 
the  life  forces,  or  their  healthy  physical  existence. 


no  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

Apports  are  objects  belonging  to  the  physical 
plane,  but  occasionally  a  flower  of  singular  design 
and  beauty  Is  brought  from  splrlt-spheres  and  ma- 
terialized. In  such  a  case  these  could  not  be  left 
in  physical  conditions,  but  are  dematerlallzed  be- 
fore the  close  of  the  seance  and  returned  to  their 
own  sphere.  Any  flowers  remaining  after  the 
close  of  the  seance  must,  therefore,  be  purely  ob- 
jects of  earth. 

TRUMPET   MEDIUMSHIP. 

The  author  has  been  unable  to  study  fully  this 
particular  phase  of  medlumship,  although  he  has 
on  several  occasions  endeavored  to  do  so.  A  re- 
cent book,  written  by  VIce-Admlral  W.  Usborne 
Moore,  entitled  The  Voices^  will  supply  readers 
with  a  full  account  of  reliable  recent  experiments 
in  this  class  of  phenomena. 

Briefly  explained,  the  medium  provides  a 
straight  metal  or  composition  trumpet,  usually 
about  a  yard  long,  tapering  from  four  Inches  at 
the  wide  end  to  three-quarters  of  an  inch  at  the 
narrow.  Within  this  instrument  Is  created  a  psy- 
chic organism  whereby  an  audible  voice  is  pro- 
duced by  spirit  operators.  These  voices,  which 
purport  to  be  those  of  deceased  friends  of  the  sit- 
ters, are  often  recognized,  both  by  the  inflection 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  HI 

of  the  voice  and  by  the  substance  of  the  messages 
conveyed. 

DEMATERIALIZATION— THE    PASSAGE   OF   MATTER 
THROUGH  MATTER. 

Some    readers,    entirely    ignorant    of    psychic 
science,  may  argue  that  the  author  makes  state- 
ments of  wonderful  phenomena,  much  of  which  is 
procured    in    darkness   and   happens   behind   the 
closed  doors  of  the  psychic  laboratory,  and  there- 
fore require  that  his  evidence  shall  be  supported 
by  the  names  of  substantial  witnesses  whose  testi- 
mony can  be  relied  upon.     As  previously  stated, 
he  refers  his  readers  for  such  testimony  to  the 
vast  amount  of  Uterature  already  printed  upon  the 
subject,  much  of  which  can  be  seen  in  the  libraries 
of  occult  societies,  where  names,  dates,  and  places 
are  supplied  by  persons  of  the  most  eminent  repu- 
tation both  in  scientific  and  social  life,  who  testify 
to  having  witnessed  similar  manifestations.     The 
time  has  long  since  gone  for  ignoring  the  testi- 
monies which  have  been  piled  one  upon  the  other 
for  the  last  fifty  years,  and  something  more  im- 
portant is  now  required  to  place  psychic  science 
on  a  satisfactory  footing  before  the  pubUc.  ^  This 
book  is  written  to  supply  a  clear  explanation  of 
the  laws  underlying  the  phenomena.     Some  read- 
ers may  say,  "If  these  things  are  true,  and  are 


112  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

governed  by  known  natural  laws,  why  are  they 
not  demonstrated  upon  public  platforms  and  ocu- 
lar demonstration  of  their  reality  given  to  the 
world?" 

The  author  agrees  that  this  is  a  most  reason- 
able request,  and  hastens  to  add  that  not  only  is 
this  being  done  in  all  the  leading  countries  of  the 
world,  but  that  millions  have  witnessed  them,  and 
probably  the  very  reader  who  asks  for  this  demon- 
stration has  himself  been  an  unconscious  spectator. 

Houdini,  of  world-wide  fame,  previously  men- 
tioned, has  for  years  demonstrated  dematerializa- 
tlon,  and  the  passage  of  matter  through  matter 
upon  the  public  platform,  while  Mrs.  Thompson, 
of  America,  has  demonstrated  materialization. 
Mrs.  Zancig  has,  with  her  husband,  publicly  ex- 
hibited her  psychic  gifts,  called  "thought  trans- 
ference," which  is  purely  soul  projection,  in  all 
the  leading  world-centres.  Miss  Fay,  and  several 
well-known  Japanese  mediums,  for  years  demon- 
strated the  passage  of  matter  through  matter,  and 
also  materialization.  These  are  only  a  few  of  the 
many  who  might  be  mentioned,  who  demonstrate 
psychic  gifts  before  the  public.  Such  public  me- 
diums do  not,  of  course,  advertise  themselves  as 
performing  their  wonders  by  occult  powers,  or 
through  the  help  of  spirits,  and  the  public  are 
therefore  left  in  ignorance  of  how  they  perform 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  II3 

their  marvellous  tricks,  as  they  are  called.  The 
author  has  tested  each  of  those  mentioned,  by  a 
personal  experiment  upon  the  stage,  and  several 
also  in  private,  and  can  testify  that  they  are  me- 
diums, performing  most,  if  not  all,  of  their  great 
wonders  entirely  by  spirit  agency.  They  are 
naturally  reluctant  to  acknowledge  the  fact,  for 
the  music-hall  public  would  instantly  resent  any 
claim  they  might  make  that  they  performed  their 
wonders  by  spirit  power.  Their  audiences  would 
regard  such  claims  as  "bunkum,"  and  probably 
subject  them  to  insult,  if  not  to  ill-treatment,  for 
the  general  public  are  entirely  ignorant  of  such 
possibilities  in  the  manipulation  of  physical  matter 
as  are  related  in  this  book,  which  a  medium  can 
develop  with  the  cooperation  of  spirit  entities.  It 
can  be  left  to  the  reader's  imagination  to  picture 
the  face  of  a  music-hall  manager  if  he  were  asked 
to  allow  upon  the  stage  a  demonstration  of  spirit 
powers.  Horrors!  The  poor  man  would  not  be 
able  to  sleep  for  nights  if  he  thought  ghosts  were 
working  around  his  building  or  upon  his  stage. 
Thus,  knowing  the  mental  attitude  of  men  towards 
such  things,  these  wonders  of  wonders  are  pro- 
duced upon  the  music-hall  stage  as  clever  "mys- 
tery" tricks.  The  author  does  not  wish  his  read- 
ers to  suppose  that  the  mechanical  sleight-of-hand 
tricks  carried  out  by  Maskelyne  and  Devant  and 


114  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

similar  operators,  have  anything  to  do  with  me- 
diumistic  gifts,  for  they  are  but  a  mechanical  copy 
of  true  magic.  These  tricks  are  performed  with 
tons  of  machinery,  whereas  the  genuine  medium 
can  produce  his  wonders,  if  necessai-y,  naked,  and 
in  an  empty  room. 

HOUDINl's    DEMONSTRATION    OF    DEMATERIALIZA- 
TION. 

The  last  occasion  on  which  the  author,  under 
strict  test  conditions,  saw  Houdini  demonstrate  his 
powers  of  dematerialization,  was  before  thou- 
sands, upon  the  public  stage  of  the  Grand  Theatre, 
Islington,  London.  Here  a  small  iron  tank,  filled 
with  water,  was  deposited  upon  the  stage,  and  in 
it  Houdini  was  placed,  the  water  completely  cover- 
ing his  body.  Over  this  was  placed  an  iron  lid 
with  three  hasps  and  staples,  and  these  were  se- 
curely locked.  The  body  was  then  completely  de- 
materialized  within  this  tank  within  one  and  a  half 
minutes,  while  the  author  stood  immediately  over 
it.  Without  disturbing  any  of  the  locks,  Houdini 
was  transferred  from  the  tank  direct  to  the  back 
of  the  stage  in  a  dematerialized  state.  He  was 
there  materialized,  and  returned  to  the  stage  front 
dripping  with  water,  and  attired  in  the  blue  jersey 
suit  in  which  he  entered  the  tank.  From  the  time 
that  he  entered  it  to  his  appearance  on  the  front 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  II5 

of  the  stage  only  one  and  a  half  minutes  had  ex- 
pired. While  the  author  stood  adjacent  to  the 
tank,  during  the  dematerialization  process,  a  great 
loss  of  physical  energy  was  felt  by  him,  such  as  is 
usually  experienced  by  sitters  in  materializing 
seances,  who  have  a  good  stock  of  vital  energy,  as 
in  such  phenomena  a  large  amount  of  energy  is 
required.  Dematerialization  is  performed  by 
methods  similar  in  operation  to  those  in  which 
the  psycho-plastic  essence  is  drawn  from  the  me- 
dium. The  body  of  the  medium  may  be  reduced 
to  half  its  ordinary  weight  in  the  materializing 
seance  room,  but  in  the  case  of  dematerialization 
the  essence  continues  to  be  drawn  until  the  whole 
physical  body  vanishes,  and  the  substance  compos- 
ing it  is  held  in  suspension  within  the  atmosphere, 
much  in  the  same  way  as  moisture  is  held  by 
evaporation.  While  in  this  state  Houdini  was 
transferred  from  the  stage  to  the  retiring-room 
behind,  and  there  almost  instantaneously  material- 
ized. The  speed  with  which  this  dematerializa- 
tion is  performed  Is  much  more  rapid  than  is  pos- 
sible in  the  materializing  seance  room,  where  time 
is  required  for  the  essence  to  be  crystallized  into 
psycho-plastic  matter.  Not  only  was  Houdini's 
body  dematerialized,  but  it  w^as  carried  through 
the  locked  iron  tank,  thus  demonstrating  the  pas- 
sage of  matter  through  matter.     This  startling 


Il6  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

manifestation  of  one  of  nature's  profoundest 
miracles  was  probably  regarded  by  most  of  the 
audience  as  a  very  clever  trick. 

MATERIALIZATION    PUBLICLY    DEMONSTRATED    BY 
MRS.  THOMPSON. 

The  author  tested  the  medlumlstic  powers  of 
this  lady  upon  the  stage  of  the  London  Pavilion 
Music-hall  before  a  crowded  house  of  several 
thousand  spectators.  In  this  he  was  assisted  by 
Mrs.  McKenzie  and  a  lady  friend — a  University 
graduate,  capable  of  careful  observation,  and  of 
extremely  sceptical  views  as  regards  psychic  phe- 
nomena. In  an  ante-roo^m  immediately  adjoining 
the  stage  the  ladies  stripped  the  medium,  Mrs. 
Thompson,  and  from  this  room  she  walked  on 
to  the  stage  nude,  except  for  a  small  black  gauze 
handkerchief  over  the  lower  part  of  the  body,  and 
with  nothing  on  head  or  feet.  Thus  stripped,  she 
entered  a  small  cabinet  2  ft.  by  3  ft.,  and  5  ft.  high, 
previously  erected  upon  the  stage  by  the  author. 
The  frame  of  this  was  made  of  ^-inch  Iron  rod, 
and  draped  with  a  piece  of  canvas  of  a  light  ma- 
terial, transparent  from  the  inside,  but  opaque 
from  the  outside.  No  article  of  furniture  of  any 
kind,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  cane  chair,  was 
placed  within  this  frame-work.  Surrounding  the 
cabinet,  about  six  feet  away,  stood  eight  or  nine 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  II7 

members  of  the  audience,  placed  there  to  see  that 
no  object  was  Introduced  to  the  cabinet  from  any 
side.  Nothing  could  be  passed  from  below  the 
stage,  owing  to  the  fact  that  a  heavy,  seamless 
waterproof  covering  had  been  placed  by  the 
author  Immediately  below  the  cabinet,  extending 
some  feet  beyond  it  on  all  sides,  neither  could  any 
object  be  handed  down  from  above.  A  good  light 
was  supplied  on  every  side,  so  that  the  spectators 
could  clearly  witness  all  that  went  on.  The  author 
was  permitted  to  stand  close  to  the  cabinet,  and 
as  soon  as  Mrs.  Thompson  had  entered,  several 
spirit  voices,  such  as  are  often  heard  at  material- 
izing seances,  were  distinctly  heard  by  him  in  con- 
versation, and  within  two  minutes  a  materialized 
form  stood  forth  in  full  view  of  the  audience, 
draped  In  abundant  folds  of  white  gauzy  material. 
For  a  full  minute  this  figure  was  seen  to  dance  in 
a  fairy-like  way,  and  the  folds  of  drapery  were 
,  thrown  about  on  every  side.  Previous  to  this  an 
Immense  bunch  of  flowers  was  thrown  out  from 
the  cabinet,  also  a  large,  living  cockatoo  and  a 
rabbit;  both  these  had  been  materialized  and  were 
handed  about  for  the  Inspection  of  all.  That  these 
were  genuine  manifestations  of  spirit  power  in  ma- 
terialization the  author  is  perfectly  confident  by 
numerous  evidences  which  he  then  received,  well 
known  to  occult  students  accustomed  to  material- 


Il8  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

izing  seance  rooms.  This  wonder  of  wonders 
was  advertised  by  the  Pavilion  authorities  as  the 
"Great  Thompson  Mystery,"  as  indeed  it  was, 
and  remained  so  to  probably  the  large  proportion 
of  the  vast  audiences  which  gathefed  nightly  to 
witness  it. 

MISS  fay's  demonstration  of  materialization. 
This  public  medium  also  demonstrated  material- 
ization at  the  London  Pavilion  under  test  condi- 
tions, when  the  author  tested  the  manifestations, 
and  proved  them  to  be  the  work  of  spirit  opera- 
tors. The  medium's  hands  were  tied  behind  her 
back  with  strong  tapes  and  ropes,  which  were 
sealed,  and  she  was  then  fixed  in  such  a  position 
upon  the  stage  that  her  arms  were  nailed  by 
these  to  the  stage  floor.  While  in  this  position 
several  articles  were  placed  upon  her  knees,  which 
articles  were  immediately  thrown  off  by  a  small 
pair  of  materialized  hands  and  arms  which  pro- 
truded from  her  chest.  These  arms  were  of  a 
peculiar  character,  seemingly  jointless,  being  about 
three  inches  wide  at  the  base,  and  about  an  inch 
at  the  wrist,  with  hands  somewhat  similar  to  those 
of  a  monkey.  These  protruded  and  receded  al- 
most Instantaneously,  so  that  when  they  had  col- 
lapsed there  was  nothing  to  be  seen  on  the  breast. 
They  only  protruded  to  seize  and  cast  away  the 


OBJFXTIVE    PHENOMENA  II9 

articles  placed  upon  her  knees.  While  these  hands 
were  working  from  the  chest  In  front,  the  author 
witnessed  the  medium's  normal  hands  behind  her 
back,  nailed  to  the  stage  boards  with  the  tapes  and 
seals  still  unbroken.  During  this  performance, 
and  while  the  materialization  was  in  process,  the 
medium  being  entranced,  a  peculiar  odor  was  dis- 
tinctly perceived,  this  proceeding  from  the  emana- 
tion of  the  psycho-plastic  matter,  and  often  ex- 
perienced in  the  materializing  seance  room.  This 
exhibition  was  also  offered  to  the  public  under  the 
title  of  a  "mystery." 

THE  PASSAGE  OF  MATTER  THROUGH  MATTER. 

It  Is  some  years  since  the  author  witnessed  this 
manifestation  of  psychic  powers  by  three  Japanese 
mediums,  two  young  women  and  an  old  man,  the 
exhibition  being  given  at  the  London  Pavilion  to 
large  audiences.  The  London  Dally  Mail  de- 
scribed this  as  the  most  wonderful  and  baffling  ex- 
hibition of  human  power  ever  witnessed.  Two 
only  of  their  manifestations  will  be  here  described, 
the  first  being  that  of  the  passage  of  matter 
through  matter  carried  out  in  the  full  blaze  of 
the  stage  lights,  as  follows: 

The  author  tied  the  old  man's  wrists  together 
with  several  pieces  of  rope,  canv^as  and  string,  and 
these  he  sealed  in  such  a  way  that  it  was  humanly 


I20  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

impossible  to  undo  them  without  breaking  the 
seals.  Six  wooden  hoops,  polished  American 
bicycle  rims,  were  carefully  Inspected  by  the  author 
and  other  members  of  the  audience,  and  found  to 
be  quite  solid.  The  rims  were  thrown  one  at  a 
time  Into  the  air,  and  as  they  fell,  were  caught 
upon  the  arm  of  the  old  man,  the  first  portion  of 
the  rim  piercing  the  arm,  but  not  the  second,  until 
all  six  hung  upon  his  arm,  this  being  done  while  his 
wrists  were  still  tied.  Members  of  the  audience 
were  invited  to  inspect  these,  and  take  them,  if 
possible,  from  his  arm  without  disturbing  the  tied 
wrists.  Several,  after  spending  some  consider- 
able time  In  the  effort,  gave  it  up  as  Impossible. 
While  these  wooden  hoops  still  dangled  upon  the 
arm  of  the  medium,  which  he  held  extended,  and 
his  wrists  still  remained  tied,  they  were  dropped 
one  by  one  on  to  the  floor  of  the  stage,  and  as 
each  of  them  passed  through  his  arm  a  peculiar 
hissing  sound  was  heard,  often  noticed  when  mat- 
ter passes  through  matter  in  the  psychic  labora- 
tory. The  hoops  in  this  case  were  In  no  way  af- 
fected by  the  power  which  dcmaterlallzed  the  arm 
of  the  medium  as  they  passed  through  It. 

The  second  demonstration  was  one  of  water 
materialization.  This  was  produced  from  the  at- 
mosphere in  actual  sprays,  rising  steadily  about 
ten  feet  Into  the  air,  falling  upon  the  waterproof 


OBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  121 

upon  the  stage,  and  flowing  away  in  a  large  vol- 
ume. The  old  man  held  in  his  hands  a  number  of 
short  sticks,  about  eighteen  inches  long  by  a  quar- 
ter of  an  inch  thick,  and  with  one  of  these  ex- 
tended he  produced  at  will  a  clear  jet  of  water 
from  its  point.  With  the  wand,  while  the  jet  of 
water  still  flowed,  he  touched  the  hands  or  head 
of  the  other  performers  on  the  stage,  and  wher- 
ever his  touch  fell  a  flowing  jet  of  water  was 
produced. 

Such  spectacles  as  these  are  difficult  to  describe, 
especially  as  seemingly  similar  exhibitions  are  ac- 
complished by  purely  mechanical  methods,  or  il- 
lusion, but  these  were  real  exhibitions  of  psychic 
power  produced  by  the  cooperation  of  unseen 
spirit  beings,  and  no  mirrors,  wires,  or  unseen  ma- 
chinery were  used  in  their  production.  Many 
other  exhibitions  of  medlumistic  powers  are  shown 
from  time  to  time  upon  our  public  platforms,  and 
could  be  described,  but  those  given  are  sufficient 
to  prove  that  the  laws  governing  psychic  phe- 
nomena are  sufficiently  well  known  to  enable  them 
to  be  produced  day  after  day  with  unfailing  regu- 
larity. 


CHAPTER  V 

MEDIUMSHIP — SUBJECTIVE   PHENOMENA 

The  evidence  for  telepathy  is  very  small  com- 
pared with  that  for  the  existence  of  spirits  and  of 
communication  with  them,  hut  it  is  perfectly  re- 
spectable to  believe  in  telepathy — a  miracle  a  thou- 
sandfold as  great  as  communication  with  spirits — 
because  it  is  surmised  that  it  does  away  with  spirits 
and  does  not  involve  any  credulity  to  believe  in 
it. — Professor  Hyslop,  of  Harvard  University, 
U.  S.  A. 

CLAIRVOYANCE. 

CLAIRVOYANCE,  or  clear-seeing,  is  the 
term  commonly  applied  to  the  refined  sight 
of  individuals  who  have  the  ability  to  see 
into  superphysical  or  spiritual  states.  This  gift 
has  been  known  and  used  since  the  earliest  ages. 
In  Scotland  it  has  been  called  "second  sight,"  and 
in  other  countries  the  term  "seer"  or  "prophet" 
was  given  to  those  who  possessed  it.  It  is  diffi- 
cult to  know  what  proportion  of  the  human  race 
have  this  faculty,  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  clair- 

122 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  I  23 

voyance  can  be  cultivated  by  all,  with  more  or 
less  success,  who  are  prepared  to  devote  time  and 
effort  to  Its  development.  The  gift  of  clairvoy- 
ance In  Its  highest  form  Is  much  less  common  than 
psychic  students  Imagine,  for  much  that  Is  called 
clairvoyance  Is  due  to  highly  developed  sensitive- 
ness, and  to  thought  impression,  rather  than  actual 
seeing. 

True  clairvoyance  is  developed  soul  sight, 
where  the  eye  of  the  soul  sees  clearly  Into  the 
spiritual  world,  and  can  discern  the  actual  appear- 
ance of  those  seen,  describing  accurately  the  form 
and  clothing  of  the  spirit  beings.  Some  clairvoy- 
ants are  able  to  project  their  souls  through  space, 
and  inspect  distant  physical*  objects  and  scenes, 
such  a  powxr  being  termed  "Travelling  clairvoy- 
ance." Many  puzzling  questions  present  them- 
selves to  a  student  of  psychic  science  when  experi- 
menting with  a  clairvoyant  medium.  One  difficulty 
arises  from  the  clairvoyance  of  one  medium  vary- 
ing In  intensity  and  degree  from  that  of  another, 
so  that  medium  A  may  see  the  form  of  the  stu- 
dent's departed  mother,  but  medium  B  may  be 
quite  Incapable  of  doing  so.  Medium  B  may, 
however,  discern  the  spirit  of  a  brother,  whom 
medium  A  does  not  perceive.  The  brother  may  be 
functioning  in  a  spirit  body  of  a  grosser  nature, 
to  which  medium  B's  sight  I§  attuned,  while  the 


124  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

mother  may  be  functioning  in  a  more  refined  body 
to  which  the  sight  of  medium  A  Is  attuned.  An- 
other difficulty  may  present  Itself  when  the  spirit 
form  appears.  In  the  case  of  the  brother,  who 
perhaps  on  earth  wore  a  moustache,  the  medium 
may  describe  him  as  clean-shaven,  his  correct  ap- 
pearance in  spirit  life,  he  having  discarded  the 
moustache,  not  an  uncommon  practice.  The  me- 
dium may  then  say,  In  an  undecided  manner,  "Oh, 
no,  I  see  him  with  a  moustache,  which  he  has  just 
built  up."  The  change  in  appearance,  which  Is 
referred  to  as  a  "building  up"  process,  Is  really 
due  to  thought  suggestion  from  the  spirit  of 
the  young  man,  who  wishes  to  show  himself  as  he 
was  known  while  on  earth,  and  Is  not  a  creation  of 
superphyslcal  matter  In  the  shape  of  a  moustache 
as  often  supposed. 

An  understanding  of  how  this  takes  place,  may 
be  arrived  at  by  remembering  the  power  of  a  hyp- 
notist over  his  subject,  where  suggestion  plays  so 
important  a  part  In  the  creation  of  thought  pic- 
tures. When  the  hypnotist  projects  a  thought 
picture  of  a  rose,  the  subject  sees  a  rose.  If  the 
thought  Is  projected  distinctly  and  the  subject  Is 
sufficiently  sensitive.  The  rose  may  be  seen  by 
the  subject,  first  yellow  and  then  red,  large  then 
small,  as  the  thought  of  the  hypnotist  changes, 
without  a  word  being  uttered.      Thus  may  the 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  125 

features  and  dress  be  changed  to  the  view  of  the 
medium  by  the  thought  of  the  spirit.  It  must, 
however,  be  understood  that  the  spirit  form  is  in 
reality  clearly  perceived  by  the  clairvoyant,  but 
often  transfigured  by  thought  suggestion  in  the 
manner  here  described. 

When  a  clairvoyant  describes  scenes  in  spiritual 
spheres  or  earth  scenes  known  to  the  spirit,  these 
are  often  thought  pictures  from  the  mind  of  the 
spirit  to  the  mind  of  the  clairvoyant. 

Distant  scenes  and  persons  may  clairvoyantly 
be  sensed  by  other  means  than  soul  projection, 
due  to  picture  vibrations  travelling  through  space 
and  impinging  upon  the  sensitive's  inner  soul. 
This  may  be  called  "space  clairvoyance."  Just 
as  on  earth  w^e  receive  pictures  of  a  landscape 
through  vibrations  upon  the  optic  nerve,  so  also 
may  a  highly  developed  sensitive  receive  pictures 
of  spirit  scenes  and  persons  through  the  subtle  vi- 
brations upon  the  etheric  or  still  more  refined  at- 
mospheres. The  questions  may  rise,  "Why 
should  one  scene  or  individual  only  be  per- 
ceived, and  not  the  universal  whole?"  The 
answer  is  that  the  mind  of  the  medium  is 
directed  to  one  particular  object  in  space,  much 
in  the  same  way  as  the  mind  may  be  directed 
to  a  physical  object  on  earth.  It  is  somewhat  dif- 
ficult for  some  to  understand  this,  but  an  example 


126  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

may  be  given  to  help  one  to  realize  how  this  is 
possible.  Supposing  one  stands  in  front  of  an 
iron-monger's  shop  window,  which  is  well  stocked 
with  hundreds  of  articles  of  various  sizes.  These 
objects,  though  immediately  before  him,  he  does 
not  see  all  at  the  same  time,  but  only  as  his  mind  is 
focussed  upon  individual  articles.  First,  he  may 
notice  a  scratch  upon  the  glass,  or  an  air  bubble 
within,  or  a  fly  walking  on  the  inside  surface, 
or  the  cutlery  displayed  some  inches  beyond,  or 
the  electric  globe  suspended  within  the  centre  of 
the  window,  or  the  kitchen  range  at  the  back  of 
the  window,  or  the  glass  sash  behind  this  which 
forms  the  window  enclosure.  His  vision  may  even 
extend  beyond  this,  and  penetrate  into  the  shop, 
and  see  many  articles  displayed  there.  The  shop- 
keeper behind  the  counter  may  now  be  viewed, 
or  the  window  looking  out  into  the  back  yard,  or 
the  packing  cases  in  the  yard,  or  the  houses  be- 
yond, and  so  on,  these  objects  coming  into  focus 
one  by  one  as  his  gaze  extends,  and  although  all 
these  objects  were  clearly  in  the  line  of  his  vision 
when  he  faced  the  shop  window,  yet  they  were 
not  recognized  until  his  attention  was  directed  to 
them. 

There  is,  however,  a  great  difference  between 
the  physical  and  clairvoyant  sight,  as  the  former 
is  limited  to  a  few  miles,  whereas  the  latter  may 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  I  27 

extend  to  thousands  of  miles  in  its  range.  In  all 
clairvoyant  experiments  great  difficulty  is  experi- 
enced in  differentiating  between  clear  spiritual  see- 
ing and  thought  impressions  received  from  terres- 
trial and  celestial  sources.  A  problem,  indeed, 
much  more  difficult  to  unravel  than  is  generally 
supposed. 

Thought  transference  from  the  mind  of  the 
mortal  to  the  medium,  is  infinitely  more  difficult 
than  from  the  mind  of  the  spirit  to  the  medium, 
for  where  experiments  have  been  carried  out  in 
this  way  the  spirit  succeeds  in  a  large  percentage 
of  cases,  whereas  the  mortal  may  hardly  have  five 
per  cent,  of  success  in  correctly  transferring  his 
thought. 

PSYCHOMETRY. 

Psychometry  is  a  power  of  the  human  soul  to 
read  thought  impressions  of  the  past,  recorded 
upon  material  objects,  and  is  not  necessarily  re- 
lated to  the  operation  of  discarnate  intelligence, 
but  often  operates  as  an  independent  human 
faculty.  It  is  one  of  the  most  startling  phases  of 
psychic  science,  and  one  of  which  material  science 
must  take  cognizance,  for  great  possibilities  lie 
within  it  of  reading  the  past  history  of  the  world 
and  of  individuals.  This  gift  is  frequently  mis- 
taken for  clairvoyance,  both  by  the  practising  psy- 


128  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

chometrlst  and  the  student.  A  series  of  pictures, 
sounds,  and  thoughts  are  continually  impinging 
themselves  upon  every  atom  of  the  universe,  some- 
what as  sound  waves  are  impressed  upon  the  wax 
record  of  a  phonograph.  These  impressions  have 
the  peculiar  power  of  orderly  arrangement  as  re- 
gards time,  the  latest  being  on  the  exterior  of  the 
atoms  of  matter,  while  the  earlier  are  recorded  in 
the  Interior,  and  they  may  be  read  in  the  same 
order.  Every  object  that  Is  worn,  ring,  watch, 
clothing,  etc.,  receives  through  magnetic  Impulse 
continuous  thoughts,  sounds,  and  pictures  from  its 
environment.  The  psychometrist,  on  taking  up  an 
article,  say,  a  ring,  will  read  the  impressions  or 
pictures  which  have  been  imprinted  upon  It  while 
in  the  wearer's  possession,  and  those  of  any  pre- 
vious owner.  Such  sensitives  have  the  ability.  If 
well  developed,  to  pick  out  the  more  conspicuous 
Incidents  in  a  life,  especially  where  feelings  have 
been  deeply  moved,  as  such  imprint  themselves 
more  clearly  upon  the  article.  No  magic  ring 
could  ever  arouse  deeper  interest  than  an  ordinary 
ring  in  the  hands  of  the  well-developed  psychom- 
etrist, for  she  may  by  her  power  relate  what 
happened  upon  a  recent  occasion,  what  was 
thought,  and  even  what  one  hoped  to  perform  in 
the  future,  at  that  particular  moment,  or  may  enter 
into  Interior  depths  and  take  up  the  impressions 


SUBJECTIVE   PHENOMENA  I  29 

of  five,  ten,  or  twenty  years  ago.  These  Imprints 
seem  Indelible,  and  cannot  be  lost  except  by  the 
Influence  of  fire,  which,  In  the  case  of  metal,  may 
completely  change  Its  molecular  construction  by 
melting,  and  so  destroy  the  material  and  psychic 
record. 

An  Interesting  test  of  a  psychometrlst's  power 
was  made  a  few  years  ago,  with  a  piece  of  coal 
from  an  English  pit.  A  description  was  first  given 
by  the  psychometrlst  of  the  postman  who  delivered 
It  at  the  door,  of  the  station  at  which  It  arrived  in 
London,  of  the  railway  it  travelled  upon,  of  the 
station  and  post-ofiice  from  which  It  was  des- 
patched, and  a  description  of  the  manager's  room 
where  It  lay  before  being  wrapped  up.  Then 
followed  a  picture  of  the  surrounding  country  near 
the  pit-head,  and  then  a  feeling  of  intense  dark- 
ness, the  psychometrlst  evidently  sensing  its  place 
In  the  coal  seam.  She  was  asked  to  go  further 
back  In  Its  history,  but  for  some  time  could  get 
nothing  but  great  silence  and  darkness;  a  little 
later  she  seemed  gradually  to  emerge  into  light, 
and  described  various  scenes  and  animals  evidently 
of  a  past  age,  altogether  different  from  anything 
known  to  her,  and  which  would  lead  one  to  sup- 
pose that  she  actually  was  able  to  perceive  the 
scenes  that  surrounded  the  coal  when  In  its  vege- 
table form.     It  Is  Impossible,  of  course,  to  verify 


130  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

this  picture  In  its  latter  stages,  but  the  unusual 
forms  of  the  animals  perceived  so  frightened  the 
psychometrist,  that  one  may  find  real  food  for  re- 
flection in  such  an  experiment. 

All  this  regarding  psychometry  sounds  incred- 
ible, but  it  is  really  not  more  so  than  the  wonders 
of  wireless  telegraphy,  X-rays,  planetary  forces, 
chemical  action,  and  human  generation.  Our  life 
from  beginning  to  end  is  a  mass  of  miraculous 
phenomena,  too  intricate  to  be  understood  but  in  a 
very  small  degree. 

TELEPATHY  AND  CONSCIOUS  SOUL  PROJECTION. 

Telepathy,  or  thought  transference,  is  a  term 
used  for  the  communication  of  facts,  feelings,  or 
impressions  between  persons  at  a  distance  from 
each  other.  Telepathy  is  now  an  accepted  fact 
amongst  Western  nations,  but  has  been  known 
and  practised  by  nations  of  the  East  for  thousands 
of  years.  It  has  sometimes  puzzled  military  com- 
manders in  India  to  understand  how  a  victory  or 
defeat  in  battle  was  known  hundreds  of  miles  away 
by  the  enemy,  within  an  hour  after  the  event,  al- 
though no  means  of  communication  was  possible 
by  telegraphy.  This  was  undoubtedly  accom- 
plished by  means  of  thought  transference,  or  by 
soul  projection,  practised  by  certain  natives. 
These  two  methods  of  securing  information  from 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  I31 

a  distance  are  entirely  different,  and  much  that 
goes  by  the  name  of  telepathy  is  due  to  soul  pro- 
jection. 

The  most  eminent  exponents  on  the  public  plat- 
form of  what  is  termed  "thought  transference" 
are  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Zancig,  who,  however,  give 
their  Interesting  demonstrations  by  "soul  projec- 
tion," and  not  by  thought  transference.  The 
author  has  experimented  with  them,  and  has  clear- 
ly proved  this.  It  will  be  found  that  Mrs.  Zancig, 
who  is  the  medium  in  these  experiments,  can  in- 
form her  audience  of  things  quite  unknown  to 
them  or  to  Mr.  Zancig,  who  is  supposed  to  trans- 
fer the  thought  to  her.  Take  as  an  instance  the 
following:  A  closed  box  of  matches  is  handed  to 
Mr.  Zancig,  which  he  holds  In  his  hands  while 
his  wife  stands  a  hundred  feet  away  upon  the  plat- 
form, with  her  back  turned  to  him,  and  her  eyes 
sealed  with  a  bandage.  From  the  distant  stage 
she  describes  the  exact  outward  appearance  of  the 
box  in  all  its  cietails,  adding  that  it  contains  fifteen 
matches,  which  is  quite  correct,  yet  the  number  of 
matches  is  unknown  either  to  the  owner  or  to  Mr. 
Zancig,  as  they  had  not  opened  the  box  nor  count- 
ed them.  This  Is,  therefore,  a  clear  proof  that  no 
thought  was  transferred  from  the  owner  of  the 
box  or  from  Mr.  Zancig,  or  any  member  of  the 
audience. 


132  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

Another  Illustration  of  Mrs.  Zanclg's  power  Is 
glv^en,  where  she  Is  asked  to  ascertain  the  contents 
of  any  book  In  a  library  at  command,  although 
that  library  may  be  some  distance  from  where  she 
stands.  Directions  are  given  somewhat  as  fol- 
lows: "In  a  room  upstairs  is  a  library;  will  you 
read  the  last  sentence  of  page  forty-nine  of  the 
fourth  book  from  the  left-hand  side  of  the  top 
shelf?"  Within  a  few  seconds,  without  moving, 
she  will  give  the  words  quite  accurately,  line  after 
line,  which,  when  confirmed,  are  found  to  be  cor- 
rect, although  neither  she  nor  the  experlmentier 
knew  the  name  of  the  book,  nor  the  sentence  that 
she  was  asked  to  read.  The  explanation  of  how 
Mrs.  Zanclg  gets  her  knowledge  is  known  to  the 
occult  student,  who  is  aware  of  the  power  of  the 
soul  to  project  Itself,  and  It  was  by  this  power 
that  the  medium  saw  the  contents  of  the  closed 
match-box,  counted  the  number  of  matches,  and 
then  sent  the  facts  to  her  physical  brain  through 
the  psychic  umbilical  cord,  which  stretches  unseen 
between  the  object  of  the  soul's  investigation  and 
the  medium.  In  other  words,  she  gives  a  most 
excellent  demonstration  of  what  Is  better  termed, 
"Travelling  clairvoyance." 

Thought  transference  proper  is  projected  from 
the  brain  of  one  who  acts  as  transmitter,  by 
thought  waves  to  the  brain  of  another  who  acts 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  1 33 

as  receiver  of  such  waves,  the  operation  being 
somewhat  similar  to  that  of  wireless  telegraphy. 
These  thought  waves  do  not  vibrate  upon  the 
physical  atmosphere,  but  penetrate  a  sphere  more 
refined,  that  of  the  astral.  Those,  therefore,  who 
wash  to  develop  the  powers  of  either  receiving  or 
transmitting  thought,  can  only  do  so  by  practice. 
The  receiver  must  sit  In  a  passive  condition,  and 
allow  his  soul  brain  to  be  the  active  receiver, 
which,  catching  the  thought,  transfers  It  to  the 
physical  consciousness  through  the  physical  brain. 
In  this  transmission  from  the  subconscious  to  the 
conscious  lies  the  greatest  difficulty  In  thought 
transference.  Thoughts  are  continually  being  re- 
ceived by  the  subconscious  or  spiritual  brain,  but 
there  they  He  burled.  While  the  soul  Is  Immersed 
in  matter,  It  Is  more  or  less  Insulated  from  thoughts 
which  are  flowing  throughout  the  world  from  the 
minds  of  others,  but  if  one  can  learn  how  con- 
sciously to  open  his  soul  to  these  thought  waves, 
a  new  world  would  open  to  him.  Many  books 
might  be  written  upon  this  subject  of  thought 
transference,  for  much  has  been  discovered  regard- 
ing it  during  the  last  few  years  by  occult  students. 
The  question  will  naturally  arise  as  to  how 
much  a  medium  may  receive  directly  from  the 
thoughts  of  a  sitter,  and  how  much  may  be  got 
from  the  mind  of  a  sitter  by  a  spirit  intelligence. 


134  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

who  then  passes  It  on  to  the  medium.  There  Is 
no  doubt  whatever  that  much  that  Is  received 
from  a  medium  may  be  accounted  for  by  thought 
transference.  It  Is,  nevertheless,  a  fact  that 
thought  transference,  either  through  a  medium 
or  a  spirit.  Is  not  so  simple  as  many  people  be- 
lieve, and  If  this  could  account  for  the  psychic 
phenomena  received  from  mediums,  tests  would  be 
much  more  easy  to  secure.  Let  anyone  experi- 
ment with  a  medium,  with  the  direct  Intention  of 
transferring  a  thought,  and  he  will  soon  find  that 
it  is  not  so  easy  as  It  appears.  Two  experimenters 
spent  six  months,  sitting  once  a  week  with  a  first- 
class  medium,  with  the  object  of  transmitting  a 
particular  thought,  but  entirely  failed,  for  during 
this  time  the  picture  and  message  which  they 
agreed  to  transfer  to  the  medium  was  never  re- 
ceived by  him.  At  the  end  of  the  time,  when  they 
had  mutually  agreed  that  the  experiment  had 
failed,  they  received  from  a  spirit,  through  the 
medium,  a  description  of  the  picture  which  they 
had  so  long  endeavored  to  transmit.  The  medium 
In  this  case  was  entirely  Ignorant  of  the  experi- 
ment which  his  sitters  had  endeavored  to  carry 
out. 

Thought  is  frequently  transferred  by  another 
method  than  through  direct  thought  waves,  for  It 
may  be  carried  from  the  projector  by  a  spirit  mes- 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  1 35 

senger  In  touch  with  him,  who  conveys  the  thought 
from  mind  to  mind.  Such  a  messenger  trav^eUing 
through  the  intervening  space  may  project  it  into 
the  mind  of  the  recipient,  but  this  is  not  very  com- 
mon, as  spirits  have  more  important  work  than 
to  act  as  message-boys  between  mortals,  unless 
where  some  worthy  end  is  to  be  served. 

Man  is  almost  ignorant  of  the  vast  significance 
of  this  free  play  of  thought  throughout  the  uni- 
verse, both  between  celestial  and  terrestrial  minds, 
and  yet  he  would  be  in  a  sad  condition  w^ere  it  not 
for  the  elevating  influences  which  continuously  flow 
from  the  noble  and  good  in  spirit  spheres  upon 
the  earth.  That  men  are  also  subject  to  the  evil 
thoughts  of  spiritual  beings  is  true,  but  the  num- 
bers and  powder  of  the  good  far  transcend  those 
of  the  evilly  disposed.  It  would  be  well,  therefore, 
for  men  more  and  more  to  attune  themselves  to 
higher  thoughts,  for  so  they  may,  if  they  will, 
link  themselves  up  with  the  great  souls  of  past 
and  present  ages.  When  man  learns  how  continu- 
ously to  control  and  direct  his  own  thoughts,  he 
will  seek  the  Influence  and  help  of  illuminated 
minds,  and  thus  gain  wisdom,  and  through  the 
action  and  reaction  of  his  thought  will  begin  to 
understand  the  method  and  value  of  prayer. 


136  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

SPIRIT   HEALING. 

This  branch  of  medlumship  would  require  vol- 
umes to  do  it  justice,  and  to  explain  how  spirits 
have  worked  amongst  the  mortals  of  earth,  in  the 
healing  of  disease,  in  every  country  and  in  every 
age.  "The  medicine  man"  of  savage  tribes  is 
usually  a  conscious  or  unconscious  medium  for 
spirit  operators,  who  diagnose  the  diseases  of  those 
who  come  to  him  for  medicine  and  advice.  Those 
gifted  with  the  power  of  healing  are  usually  clair- 
voyant, and  are  able  to  examine  the  interior  or- 
ganism of  the  human  body,  and  rapidly  arrive  at 
the  seat  of  any  physical  disorder.  Once  the  seat 
of  the  trouble  is  found  its  cause  can  generally  be 
traced,  and  a  cure  is  often  effected. 

A  healing  medium  is  usually  controlled  by  his 
own  familiar  spirit,  that  is,  one  in  spiritual  spheres 
who  returns  to  earth  in  the  interests  of  diseased 
sufferers,  and  who  uses  the  medium's  body  with 
the  object  of  conveying  his  knowledge  and  mag- 
netic virtue.  Healing  by  spirit  agency  may  be  ac- 
complished in  several  ways:  First,  through  the 
giving  of  wise  medical  advice  to  the  sufferer  re- 
garding certain  medicines,  food,  drink,  or  exer- 
cise, and  the  cessation  of  certain  habits  detrimental 
to  his  health.  Second,  through  magnetic  healing, 
where  the  spirit,  perceiving  that  the  patient  is 
suffering  from  nerve  disorder,  will  operate  upon 


SUBJECTIVE    PHENOMENA  I37 

his  body  through  magnetic  passes,  and  from  the 
animal  magnetism  within  the  medium's  body  and 
with  forces  drawn  from  the  physical  and  spiritual 
atmosphere,  supply  nerve  energy,  and  so  enable 
him  to  recover  health.  In  the  case  of  inflammation 
and  certain  organic  disorders  he  may  also,  by  using 
the  medium  to  make  magnetic  passes,  purify  the 
diseased  parts  and  free  them  from  certain  matter 
which  occasions  the  trouble,  and  thus  purify  and 
renew  the  body.  A  third  method,  by  far  the  most 
rare,  is  that  of  spiritual  healing.  This  is  per- 
formed by  healers  who  live  a  life  of  purity,  and 
acquire  their  power  by  prayer  and  fasting.  These 
worthy  sacrifices  of  self  by  aspiration,  may  so  re- 
fine the  atoms  of  the  physical  body  that  its  vibra- 
tions are  increased  to  an  attunement  with  spiritual 
forces  of  higher  spheres  from  whom  healing  pow- 
ers are  derived.  Such  healers,  by  placing  their 
hands  upon  the  body  of  one  suffering  from  disease, 
may  effect  an  Instantaneous  cure  by  raising  the 
rate  of  vibration  of  the  patient's  body  through  an 
influx  of  magnetic  energy  from  advanced  spheres 
flowing  through  the  healer.  This  energy,  vibrat- 
ing upon  the  atoms  of  the  diseased  body,  purifies 
It  by  magnetic  fire  burning  away  the  accumulated 
dross  of  diseased  matter,  and  renewing  the  whole 
physical  frame.  The  author  has  never  witnessed 
these  miraculous  cures,  but  the  testimony  of  many 


138  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

reliable  witnesses  has  well  established  the  reality 
of  Instantaneous  healing,  and  the  method  of  its  ac- 
complishment has  been  supplied  by  information 
derived  from  occult  sources. 


CHAPTER  VI 

FIRST  STEPS   TO  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

''iSfr,  you  cannot  have  people  of  cultivation^  of 
pure  character,  sensible  enough  in  comfuon  things, 
large-hearted  women,  grave  judges,  shrewd  busi- 
ness men,  men  of  science,  professing  to  be  in  com- 
munication with  the  spiritual  world,  and  keeping 
up  constant  intercourse  with  it,  without  its  gradu- 
ally reacting  on  the  whole  conception  of  that  other 
life.  .  .  .  The  nemesis  of  the  pulpit  comes  in  a 
shape  it  little  thought  of,  beginning  with  the  snap 
of  a  toe-joint,  and  ending  with  such  a  crack  of  old 
beliefs  that  the  roar  of  it  is  heard  in  all  the  minis- 
ters' studies  of  Christendom/' — Oliver  Wen- 
dell Holmes,  "The  Professor  at  the  Breakfast 
Table." 

advice  to  beginners. 

THE  results  of  fifteen  years'  research  work, 
carried   out    at   considerable   expense    and 
trouble,   are  presented  In  this  book,   and 
many  readers  will  peruse  It  and  wonder  for  an 
hour  over  its  contents,  and  pass  on  to  other  In- 

139 


I40  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

terests,  feeling  that  the  subject  Is  too  deep  and 
difficult  for  their  personal  Investigation.  Others 
will  feel  some  interest,  and  desire  to  know  by  per- 
sonal experiment  something  more  regarding  that 
unseen  universe  which  they  must  enter  sooner  or 
later.  It  may  be  that  the  reader  has  lost  a  loved 
one  by  death,  and  wonders  If  It  is  really  possible 
to  communicate  with  him,  and  if  so,  how  it  may 
be  accomplished.  The  writer  has  nothing  to  gain 
from  such  advice  as  Is  here  offered,  except  the 
satisfaction  which  may  be  known  to  him  who 
passes  on  some  knowledge  which  has  been  useful 
to  himself.  There  is  no  one  too  simple,  too 
young,  or  too  Ignorant,  but  may  learn  in  a  few 
days  how  he  or  she  may  consciously  open  up  com- 
munication with  the  spirit  world.  It  is  not  neces- 
sary to  purchase  many  books  and  do  much  hard 
study  before  entering  upon  investigation  (al- 
though these  have  their  due  place),  as  the  fol- 
lowing pages  will  supply  all  the  necessary  in- 
formation as  to  how  to  begin.  By  these  methods 
direct  or  Indirect  communication  can  be  established 
with  those  lost  by  death.  It  is  Idle  to  talk  about 
the  subject  of  spirit  intercourse  as  a  law  In  nature 
unless  all  are  able  to  prove  it  as  such.  The  more 
hard-headed  and  practical  the  Investigator,  believ- 
ing only  the  evidences  of  the  senses,  the  better  Is 
the  author  pleased  to  Impart  these  Instructions.    It 


FIRST   STEPS  141 

does  not  matter  whether  one  Is  a  Rationalist, 
Christian,  or  Agnostic,  nor  Is  It  necessary  to  have 
faith  in  the  subject  before  beginning  investigation; 
the  facts  can  be  equally  proved  by  all.  "The  proof 
of  the  pudding  is  in  the  eating."  Do  not  waste 
time  in  idle  discussion  about  the  subject,  but  make 
the  test  of  its  possibilities  by  practical  experiment. 
Ignorance  and  prejudice  walk  abroad  in  the  world 
claiming  to  be  wisdom,  and  hundreds  of  seemingly 
intelligent  persons  will  spend  years  In  discussing 
whether  spirit  Intercourse  is  possible  or  not,  rather 
than  spend  a  few  hours  in  getting  to  business  and 
proving  it  for  themselves.  These  puzzling,  ridi- 
culing, and  doubting  ones  may  be  ignored,  for  they 
have  made  no  attempt  to  prove  the  matter,  and 
their  protests  are  weak  and  childish.  Again,  there 
are  members  of  religious  institutions,  those  called 
the  orthodox,  who  warn  inquirers  against  the  sci- 
ence as  being  the  dreadful  work  of  "the  devil." 
One  such,  a  Presbyterian  minister,  travelled  many 
miles  to  redeem  the  writer  from  the  delusions  of 
what  he  termed  "Spiritualism,"  which  he  called 
"the  snare  of  the  evil  one."  He  was  an  old  friend, 
much  loved,  and  the  author  offered  to  demonstrate 
to  him  some  of  the  physical  manifestations  known 
as  materializations.  This  offer  he  refused,  but 
considered  himself  entitled  to  preach  for  several 
successive  Sundays  to  his  congregation  upon  the 


142  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

delusions  of  Spiritualism,  of  which  he  knew  noth- 
ing. This  attitude,  which  many  Christian  minis- 
ters adopt,  reminds  one  of  the  reputed  professors 
who  refused  to  look  through  the  telescope  of  Gali- 
leo lest  they  might  see  something  which  would  up- 
set their  pet  theories.  Such  wiseacres,  though  per- 
haps well-meaning,  may  also  be  Ignored,  for  they 
are  dominated  by  ignorant  prejudice,  and  are 
childish  enemies  to  the  advance  of  human  knowl- 
edge. In  the  quest  for  knowledge  upon  this  sub- 
ject one  may  also  meet  those  calling  themselves 
Theosophlsts,  who  profess  to  know  something 
about  it,  and  who  will  seriously  warn  one  against 
the  dangers  of  spirit  Intercourse  through  public 
mediums.  They  will  put  before  the  seeker  gro- 
tesque theories,  which  they  have  not  sought  to 
prove,  claiming  that  what  one  really  contacts 
through  mediums  are  the  husks  and  shells  of  dead 
or  degraded  souls  living  on  the  astral  plane,  or 
hells,  of  the  spiritual  world.  These  people  are 
really  not  Theosophlsts,  but  pretenders  who  mas- 
querade as  Theosophlsts,  and  who  know  nothing 
of  the  science  at  first  hand,  or  such  advice  and 
criticism  would  never  be  offered.  They  are  like 
those  who  have  received  their  Ideas  from  others  by 
Inheritance,  as  they  did  their  real  estate,  for  the 
one  they  never  thought,  and  for  the  other  they 
never  labored.     Such  persons,  though  professing 


FIRST    STEPS  143 

to  be  learned,  and  perhaps  even  claiming  to  be 
the  guardians  of  psychic  science,  are  nevertheless 
its  greatest  enemies.  They  forget  that  all  those 
who  are  real  teachers  within  the  Theosophical  So- 
ciety have  received  their  knowledge  of  spiritual 
things  within  the  psychic  laboratory  through  me- 
diums. It  is  very  unfortunate  that  this  theory  of 
husks  and  shells  was  ever  circulated  by  some  of  the 
Theosophical  leaders,  who  began  to  write  upon  the 
subject  before  they  really  understood  it.  There 
are  no  such  things  as  husks  and  shells  of  dead  men 
anywhere,  either  floating  about  in  astral  regions  or 
upon  the  earth's  surface.  Those  who  gave  cur- 
rency to  these  fabulous  statements  in  their  early 
writings  and  have  since  realized  their  error,  should 
show  some  bravery  by  pointing  out  in  later  ut- 
terances and  writings  the  mistake  which  has  been 
made. 

Then  there  are  the  individuals  amongst  the 
thoughtless  crowd,  who,  without  any  shadow  of 
proof,  make  loose  statements  of  all  kinds,  such  as, 
that  those  who  seek  to  communicate  go  mad  and 
fill  the  lunatic  asylums,  that  experiments  with 
mediums  lead  to  Immorality,  or  a  cul-de-sac,  or 
that  the  results  are  due  to  animal  magnetism,  or 
can  be  explained  by  the  subconscious  mind  or  hyp- 
notism, etc.  It  is  not  necessary  to  answer  such  idle 
criticisms,  for  they  have  been  thoroughly  answered 


144  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

many  times.  Cameras  do  not  reflect  upon  a  sen- 
sitive plate  pictures  of  our  dead  relatives  and 
friends  through  telepathy,  the  subconscious  mind, 
or  hypnotism. 

That  psychic  science  should  meet  with  opposi- 
tion from  men  of  a  peculiar  constitution  of  mind, 
and  a  certain  degree  of  scientific  attainment,  who 
decide  that  it  is  all  humbug,  is  nothing  strange.  So 
great  was  the  opposition  of  the  learned  powers 
combined  against  Galileo,  that  they  arraigned  him 
and  his  theory  at  the  aw^ful  bar  of  Humbug,  where 
they  tried  him  and  his  discovery  under  the  wit- 
nesses of  derision,  fear  and  scorn,  and  condemned 
him  as  a  fraud.  Had  not  some  dared  to  speak 
freely,  and  write  their  facts,  then  these  pretended 
friends  of  science,  who  now  oppose  everything  that 
may  appear  to  them  both  new  and  strange,  would 
have  been  destitute  of  that  knowledge  they  now 
obtain  from  books,  and  not  daring  to  think  for 
themselves  would  have  remained  in  mental  dark- 
ness. 

It  is  perfectly  natural  for  one  to  desire  re-union 
with  a  lost  friend,  and  all  may  satisfy  their  hunger 
if  they  proceed  with  ordinary  good  sense  and 
have  a  real  desire  to  obtain  such  knowledge.  The 
author  has  never  known  anyone  to  fail  who  had 
these  two  qualities  and  followed  the  Instructions 
here  supplied.     Some  may  think  that  great  faith 


FIRST   STEPS  145 

is  necessary,  or  that  one  has  to  be  a  believer  in 
ghosts  before  results  can  be  got,  but  this  is  not 
so,  for  one  who  is  a  complete  sceptic  may  find  all 
the  satisfaction  that  the  greatest  believer  obtains, 
and  as  a  matter  of  fact  the  rationalist  investigator, 
who  is  a  doubter,  will  often  secure  better  results 
than  the  too  credulous.  Credulity  or  excessive 
scepticism  are  both  detrimental  in  the  student  of 
psychical  science,  but  those  who  will  try  with  pa- 
tience the  experiments  here  outlined,  taking  noth- 
ing for  granted  and  carefully  weighing  the  results, 
will  certainly  achieve  success.  A  kindly  sympathy 
shown  towards  any  medium  visited  for  demonstra- 
tion in  clairvoyance,  or  any  psychic  manifestation, 
will  often  pave  the  way  for  the  best  results.  The 
excessive  suspicion  w^hich  so  often  dominates  in- 
vestigators, often  proves  a  great  hindrance  to 
themselves.  The  medium  should  not  be  regarded 
as  either  a  cheat  or  a  charlatan,  or  as  a  worker  of 
miracles.  Learn  to  be  as  considerate  towards  him 
as  one  would  be  towards  a  lawyer  or  a  doctor,  for 
these  gentlemen  are  not  likely  to  give  their  best 
services  to  those  who  approach  them  in  a  spirit  of 
carping  criticism,  or  who  look  upon  them  as  char- 
latans and  men  who  are  only  out  to  get  as  much 
money  as  possible  from  their  clients  or  patients. 


146  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

DANGERS  OF  INTERCOURSE. 

There  are  many  to-day  who  acknowledge  the 
facts  of  spirit  Intercourse,  but  warn  investigators 
of  the  evil  attending  such.  These  will  tell  of 
spirits  who  may  obsess  and  lie,  and  lead  into  all 
forms  of  degradation.  Such  a  case  has  never 
come  to  the  author's  knowledge.  The  earnest  in- 
vestigator Is  well  protected  by  spirits  of  an  intel- 
ligent order  who  stand  vigilantly  behind  the  veil. 
It  is  possible  to  open  up  communication  with  the 
commonplace,  Ignorant,  or  immoral,  but  it  is  hap- 
pily just  as  possible  to  get  Into  communication 
with  the  elevated,  the  refined,  and  the  pure,  and 
the  results  will  vary  according  to  tastes  and  sym- 
pathies. The  public  streets  of  every  city  have 
their  temptations  to  the  young  and  innocent,  but 
one  must  be  very  weak  or  have  an  appetite  for 
wrong-doing  to  yield  to  such  temptations,  and  to 
refuse  to  open  the  door  of  spirit  intercourse  be- 
cause of  danger.  Is  about  as  sensible  as  to  refrain 
from  using  the  public  thoroughfares  because  of 
the  dangers  which  lurk  there.  Good  and  evil 
forces  surround  all,  and  the  will  is  exercised  and 
the  soul  strengthened  and  educated  by  the  ac- 
ceptance or  rejection  of  those  subtle  temptations 
which  come  both  to  the  student  and  the  non-stu- 
dent of  occultism.  Evil  spirits  demonstrate  their 
own  folly  and  warn  us  by  their  unhappy  state 


FIRST    STEPS  147 

how  not  to  live,  and  contamination  is  not  possible 
to  those  who  enter  the  science  with  a  good  pur- 
pose, for  like  draws  to  like.  It  would  be  cruel  to 
hide  the  fact  that  occultism  has  its  dangers,  like 
every  other  science,  even  such  ordinary  things  as 
fire  and  water,  food,  love,  electricity,  travel,  birth, 
etc.,  are  all  dangerous  to  the  inexperienced,  and  the 
only  way  to  avoid  such  is  to  study  the  known  laws 
relating  to  these  natural  forces.  Fortunately  we 
are  not  all  imbued  with  that  craven  spirit  of  fear, 
which,  if  yielded  to,  would  leave  us  in  a  most  un- 
progressive  world.  Well-marked  guide  posts, 
erected  by  laborers  and  pioneers  of  the  past,  now 
exist  to  warn  and  direct  the  student  of  psychic 
science.  There  are  still  many  obscure  corners 
and  by-ways,  but  these  are  steadily  being  mapped 
out  by  intelligent  observers,  and  those  who  proceed 
with  common  sense  and  sincerity  will  find  no  pit- 
falls. A  little  knowledge  may  be  a  dangerous 
thing,  but  no  knowledge  is  still  more  dangerous. 
Psychic  science  must  be  pursued  with  modera- 
tion, for  excess  in  any  direction.  Involving  as  it 
does  overstrain  and  loss  of  poise,  is  always  in- 
jurious. The  results  are  often  seen  in  professional 
life,  in  what  is  termed  a  "break-down,"  but  pro- 
fessional life  Is  not  banned  because  of  such  hap- 
penings. What  a  nerve  strain  Is  imposed  by  the 
present  war,  but  men  do  not  cease  to  fight.     "Let 


148  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

him  that  strlveth  for  the  mastery  be  temperate  in 
all  things,"  makes  a  useful  motto  in  this  science. 
If  an  individual  be  extremely  delicate  or  neurotic, 
he  would  probably  be  well  advised  not  to  enter  the 
subject  by  practical  experiment,  as  the  energy  used 
may  be  more  than  his  system  can  afford,  and  a  lack 
of  balance  result.  This  type  of  person  must  be 
content  to  get  his  knowledge  through  the  testi- 
mony and  experiment  of  others,  but  not  the  slight- 
est fear  need  be  experienced  by  the  average  nor- 
mal man  or  woman  who  wishes  to  understand  new 
facts  in  life. 

DIFFICULTIES  OF  INTERCOURSE. 

Those  who  experimentally  seek  communication 
with  the  departed  may  at  the  early  stages  fre- 
quently become  confused  by  the  messages  received, 
for  various  reasons.     Thus: — 

1.  Thoughts  telepathically  received  from  those 
still  In  the  flesh  may  blend  with,  or  be  mistaken 
for,  messages  from  the  discarnate. 

2.  The  thoughts  of  the  medium,  whether  this 
Individual  be  In  the  normal  or  trance  state,  may 
blend  with,  and  be  mistaken  for,  messages  from 
the  discarnate. 

3.  The  Investigator's  own  thoughts  may  be  in- 
terwoven with  thoughts  from  the  discarnate  intel- 
ligence. 


FIRST   STEPS  149 

4.  Several  spirits  may  attempt  to  communicate 
at  the  same  time  without  being  aware  that  they  are 
doing  so. 

5.  The  communicating  intelligence  may  also  be 
ignorant  of  the  laws  of  intercourse,  and  bungle  the 
message. 

6.  Spirits  often  forget  details  of  their  earth  ex- 
istence when  controlling  the  brain  of  another,  and 
have  great  difficulties  to  overcome  from  their  side. 

From  the  above  considerations  it  will  be  ob- 
served that  students  must  follow  with  caution  any 
advice  offered  by  spirits.  If  advice  is  given  spon- 
taneously, the  student  should  only  act  upon  it  if  it 
appears  reasonable.  If  advice  is  asked  and  given, 
from  any  claiming  to  be  spirits,  it  should  be 
weighed  as  carefully  as  if  it  emanated  from  a 
friend  on  earth. 

It  has  been  already  mentioned  that  the  most 
important  requisites  for  success  are  common  sense 
and  a  keen  desire  to  know.  If  to  this  be  added 
confidence  in  one^s  own  judgment,  a  modest 
amount  of  industry,  average  intellectual  compre- 
hension, good  health,  caution,  integrity,  sympathy, 
and  some  intuition,  all  these  things  will  speed  up 
success  and  make  one  a  master  of  the  science.  Scep- 
ticism is  no  bar,  nor  a  virtuous  life  necessary,  to 
prove   continuity   of  life  beyond  the   grave. 


150  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

THE  MATERIALIST  AND  THE  IDEALIST. 

Broadly  speaking,  Investigators  may  be  divided 
into  two  groups:  the  materialist  and  the  idealist. 
The  difference  between  them  is  largely  tempera- 
mental. The  former  Is  active,  positive  and  prac- 
tical; the  latter  dreamy,  passive  and  intuitional. 
The  first  will  be  confident  in  his  own  ability  to  find 
truth  for  himself  along  the  outer  plane  of  ex- 
istence, the  latter  may  lack  self-assurance,  but  seeks 
and  finds  his  truth  from  within.  It  would  be  well 
for  every  student,  whatever  his  temperament,  to 
study  the  antithesis  of  himself  sympathetically,  for 
the  two  types  are  very  often  unnecessarily  rude  to 
each  other,  the  materialist  referring  to  the  idealist 
as  a  "dreamer  of  dreams,"  and  a  seer  of  "visions," 
while  the  idealist  unsympathetically  describes  the 
materialist  as  "a  doubting  Thomas."  "Thomas" 
will  subject  the  dreamer's  visions  to  reason,  and 
will  profit  much  from  them,  and  the  dreamer  will 
receive  help  from  him  in  separating  the  vapors  of 
his  mind  from  spiritual  realities. 

Both  types  can  find  satisfaction  in  spirit  inter- 
course, but  their  approach  to  the  subject  may  be 
different.  Let  the  "doubting  Thomas"  go  straight 
ahead  into  the  practical  investigation  of  the  sci- 
ence, by  visiting  a  number  of  the  sensitives,  or 
psychically-developed  persons,  known  as  mediums. 
Let  him  experiment  with  planchette,  table  turning, 


FIRST   STEPS  151 

automatic  writing  (materializing  mediums  when 
possible),  and  get  a  physical  demonstration  of  the 
possibility  of  spirit  Intercourse.  Later — or  during 
these  experiments — he  will  be  well  advised  to  read 
up  the  subject,  In  order  to  understand  more  fully 
the  phenomena  which  may  come  under  his  observa- 
tion. This  type  of  man  will  not  believe  until  he 
has  seen  a  ghost,  and  to  this  scepticism  there  are 
no  objections  to  offer.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
Idealist  should  first  read  up  the  subject,  and  pro- 
ceed with  experiment  later.  This  Is  the  natural 
course  events  are  likely  to  take,  but  there  Is  no 
reason  why  men  of  both  temperaments  should  not 
carry  on  reading  and  practical  Investigation  at  the 
same  time,  for  both  are  helpful,  the  one  support- 
ing the  other.  Names  and  addresses  of  competent 
mediums  In  Britain  will  be  found  In  the  advertising 
columns  of  the  psychic  papers. 

BOOKS   AND    MAGAZINES   RELATING   TO   THE   SUB- 
JECT. 

The  books  recommended  for  study  are  noted 
on  pages  294  and  295,  but  there  are  many  others. 
If  there  is  a  Spiritualistic  or  Theosophlcal  centre 
available,  the  student  should  get  into  touch  with 
it,  in  order  to  meet  others  Interested  in  occultism, 
who  may  be  able  to  offer  assistance,  and  also  that 


152  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

he  may  derive  an  advantage  from  any  library 
such  societies  may  possess. 

A  number  of  magazines  dealing  with  the  subject 
are  Issued  In  Great  Britain  and  can  be  ordered 
through  any  bookseller,  and  at  least  one  of  these 
should  be  taken  by  a  student. 

In  these  periodicals  can  be  found  advertised  lists 
of  new  books,  lectures,  classes  for  study,  and  names 
of  professors  prepared  to  demonstrate  the  science. 
Students  would  find  It  of  great  value  to  join  the 
London  Spiritualist  Alliance,  no,  St.  Martin's 
Lane,  W.C.,  where  will  be  found  a  circulating 
library  consisting  of  3,000  volumes  devoted  to  all 
phases  of  spiritual  and  occult  science.  The  sub- 
scription Is  I  OS.  6d.  per  annum,  and  the  reading- 
room  is  open  daily.  By  paying  a  guinea  per 
annum,  books  can  be  sent  free  of  charge,  provided 
they  are  returned  carriage  paid.  A  complete  cata- 
logue can  be  obtained  post  free  for  is.  The  Al- 
liance Is  not  a  propagandist  society,  but  was  found- 
ed In  1884  for  the  purpose  of  affording  informa- 
tion to  persons  Interested  In  psychical  and  spiritual 
phenomena  and  research.  Literature  on  the  sub- 
ject, by  the  most  eminent  minds  In  science  and  art 
in  the  world,  will  be  found  on  its  shelves,  and 
other  advantages  such  as  lectures,  etc.,  are  offered 
to  members.  The  question  may  arise  as  to  why 
this  literature  Is  not  to  be  found  in  ordinary  public 


FIRST   STEPS  153 

libraries.  For  an  answer  to  this  one  should  ask 
members  of  Library  Committees,  which  are  usual- 
ly composed  of  clergymen  and  other  interested 
persons,  who  have  always  been  over-anxious  to 
guard  the  morals  of  the  reading  public,  and  who 
believe  such  literature  to  be  dangerous. 

SIMPLE  INSTRUMENTS  REQUIRED  BY  BEGINNERS. 

A  Medium;  i.e.,  a  man  or  woman  sensitively 
developed. 

A  Planchette. 

A  small  pine-wood  table. 

An  ordinary  unvarnished  pencil. 

Some  investigators  may  endeavor  to  use  all 
these,  but  as  a  general  rule,  success  will  be  found 
in  a  greater  degree  w^Ith  one  instrument  over  all 
others.  When  an  instrument  is  found  which  seems 
to  suit  one  personally,  continue  with  it,  as  loss  of 
time  is  often  a  result  of  too  frequent  change. 

PROFESSIONAL  MEDIUMS  :  HOW  TO  TREAT  THEM. 

When  investigators  approach  mediums  they 
should  remember  that  they  are  much  like  other 
people,  neither  saints  nor  sinners,  but  men  and 
women  with  a  natural  psychic  gift,  cultivated 
through  years  of  practice.  The  charges  for  their 
services  vary  according  to  the  length  of  the  sitting 
and  their  social  position,  and  may  be  anything 


154  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

from  half-a-crown  to  a  guinea  or  more.  Endeavor 
to  secure  the  services  of  a  well-developed  medium, 
as  many  practising  mediumship  publicly  give  dis- 
appointing results.  "Developed"  does  not  mean 
spiritually,  but  psychically.  Those  with  means 
should  purchase  the  best  service  they  can  get  in 
this  way,  for  mediumship  is  very  similar  to  any 
other  commodity.  The  best  doctors,  la^vyers,  and 
ministers  usually  command  the  highest  price  for 
their  services.  Some  people  have  been  members 
of  occult  societies  for  ten  years,  and  have  never 
secured  satisfaction,  but  such  probably  never 
stretched  their  generosity  beyond  a  penny  in  the 
collection  plate  for  their  evidence.  There  are 
mediums  sufficiently  well  off  in  material  things  to 
give  their  services  freely  to  the  world,  but  there  Is 
no  reason  why  one  should  expect  these  from  a  me- 
dium for  nothing,  any  more  than  one  does  from 
a  minister  or  a  doctor.  The  professional  medium 
usually  receives  a  smaller  income  than  an  ordinary 
bricklayer,  and  the  idea  that  they  are  in  the  work 
for  the  money  that  can  be  made  is  a  popular 
error.  Service  demands  service,  and  if  one  has  a 
very  high  spiritual  ideal  of  what  a  medium  should 
do  without  monetai*y  payment,  he  should  take  with 
him  a  sack  of  potatoes,  for  mediums  have  to  eat, 
or  the  weekly  rent  for  the  landlord,  for  they  have 


FIRST    STEPS  155 

to  keep  up  a  house.     Spirit  operators  do  not  pro- 
vide the  one  or  the  other. 

Money,  of  course,  does  not  always  command 
success,  and  it  frequently  happens  that  a  sensitive 
in  humble  circumstances  and  charging  an  extreme- 
ly moderate  fee  can  often  give  excellent  results. 
An  important  factor  to  remember  is  the  tempera- 
ment of  the  medium,  for  one  investigator  may 
have  success  with  one  where  another  achieves  but 
poor  results.  Therefore,  if  a  medium  does  not 
give  success,  do  not  condemn  him  too  readily  as 
undeveloped  or  fraudulent,  but  seek  elsewhere, 
until  an  instrument  more  suited  to  one's  psychic 
temperament  be  found,  then  continue  for  some 
time  experimenting  and  success  will  more  and  more 
attend  the  effort.  It  is  never  advisable  to  sit 
oftener  than  twice  a  week  nor  beyond  one  hour  at 
each  sitting.  By  continued  investigation  with  the 
same  medium,  a  great  many  difficulties  and  contra- 
dictions which  are  bound  to  meet  one  in  the  early 
months  of  the  study  may  be  avoided.  Later,  when 
one  has  grasped  some  of  the  underlying  principles 
of  the  science,  freer  experiments  with  others  may 
be  made. 

WHAT  TO  EXPECT  AT  AN  EXPERIMENT. 

A  medium  may  be  either  entranced  or  normal 
when  giving  her  demonstration,  but  the  best  re- 


156  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

suits  are  usually  given  by  the  entranced  medium; 
there  are,  however,  exceptions  to  this  rule.  The 
student  should  make  an  appointment  by  letter  a 
few  days  before,  should  keep  punctually  to  the 
time  arranged,  and  endeavor  to  be  free  from 
worry  or  excessive  strain  of  any  kind  for  some 
hours  previously.  The  previous  meal  should  be 
of  a  light  nature,  and  tobacco  and  alcoholic  liquors 
abstained  from  before  the  appointment.  The  me- 
dium will  probably  subdue  the  light  of  the  room, 
but  not  to  an  extreme  degree,  with  the  object  of 
assisting  clairvoyance,  and  also  to  enable  both  the 
sitter  and  herself  to  become  more  passive.  She 
will  sit  opposite  the  Investigator,  whose  mind 
should  be  at  ease,  for  no  harm  can  possibly  happen 
either  to  himself  or  to  the  medium,  and  he  may 
take  It  as  a  thousand  to  one  that  he  will  see  no 
ghosts,  either  then  or  at  later  sittings  of  this  char- 
acter. 

While  sitting,  the  mind  should  be  alert,  but  not 
concentrated  too  fixedly.  Dispute  and  argument 
with  the  medium  should  be  avoided,  and  an  en- 
deavor made  to  engage  In  natural  cheerful  con- 
versation, if  this  is  desired.  The  visit  should  be 
made  entirely  alone,  unless  one  happens  to  be  of 
a  particularly  nervous  disposition  or  of  delicate 
constitution.  Any  friends  sitting  in  the  room  will 
often  create  cross-currents  and  Introduce  unseen 


FIRST   STEPS  157 

personalities  who  may  not  be  recognized  by  the 
sitter,  should  the  medium  describe  them.  Remem- 
ber that  the  sitter  brings  with  him  much  that  will 
be  seen  by  the  medium.  He  should  sit  quietly 
while  the  medium  goes  under  control,  and  not  be 
offended  by  any  singular  movements,  twitchings 
or  mutterings  he  may  see  or  hear,  while  the  spir- 
itual control  takes  possession.  If  the  medium  be 
under  the  control  of  a  "familiar  spirit,"  generally 
termed  a  "guide,"  a  complete  change  will  be  recog- 
nized in  her  manner  and  speech,  and  she  will  no 
longer  speak  in  her  own  personality  but  in  that  of 
the  controlling  spirit,  w^ho  may  be  an  adult  or  a 
child.  This  "control"  from  the  spirit  side  of  life 
may  speak  in  broken  English,  and  profess  to  be  an 
Indian,  a  negro,  or  of  Western  nationality.  The 
control  may,  however,  then  or  later  in  the  pro- 
ceedings, profess  to  be  a  relative  of  the  sitter. 
This,  of  course,  could  only  happen  after  the  first 
controlling  spirit  has  departed  from  the  medium's 
organism.  Should  this  claim  be  made,  the  state- 
ment can  only  be  accepted  by  the  proofs  offered  in 
the  conversation  which  ensues,  or  by  some  manner- 
Ism  or  peculiarity  of  speech  which  distinguished 
the  departed  friend  when  on  earth.  It  will  fre- 
quently happen  that  the  medium's  features  com- 
pletely alter  to  a  clear  representation  of  those  of 
the  said  friend,  w^ho  claims  to  be  controlling  the 


158  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

niedlum's  body.  It  is  extremely  difficult  for  a  spirit 
entering  the  body  of  a  medium  for  the  first  time, 
to  speak  clearly,  owing  to  the  organism  to  be  used 
being  strange  and  difficult  to  control.  Repeated 
visits,  however,  will  enable  him  to  manifest  more 
and  more  clearly,  and  to  give  satisfactory  proofs 
of  his  identity. 

It  is  important  that  no  information  should  be 
given  to  the  medium  regarding  departed  friends, 
either  before  or  after  sitting,  otherwise  the  ex- 
periment will  be  robbed  of  its  chief  scientific  value. 
At  the  same  time,  wliile  withholding  this  infor- 
mation, a  cold,  unsympathetic  attitude  should  not 
be  adopted,  as  this  tends  to  a  poor  result.  Scepti- 
cism has  no  deterrent  effect,  but  a  spirit  of  bitter 
opposition  in  a  person  of  determined  will  may 
totally  stop  or  decidedly  impede  manifestations. 
Should  the  medium  be  unwilling  to  allow  anyone 
to  control  her  organism  except  her  own  guide,  it 
is  probable  that  her  chief  guide  will  describe  clair- 
voyantly  the  spirits  present.  These,  though  seen 
by  the  medium,  will  not  be  seen  by  the  sitter  unless 
he  is  clairvoyant.  The  medium  may  describe  some 
departed  relative  or  friend,  delineating  the  fea- 
tures, color  of  eyes  and  hair,  the  age  when  he 
passed  out  of  the  body,  general  build  and  height, 
peculiarities  in  walk,  conversation  and  mental  out- 
look, telling  of  the  business  followed,  the  house 


FIRST   STEPS  159 

dwelt  in,  and  perhaps  Intimacies  of  conversation 
known  only  to  the  sitter  and  the  departed,  and 
names  and  dates  may  be  accurately  given.  Al- 
though the  medium  describes  something  that  she 
claims  to  see.  It  does  not  necessarily  follow  that 
she  does  see  this,  as  telepathy  may  explain  all 
that  Is  given.  The  telepathic  theory  will  only  be 
exploded  when  Information  Is  given  by  the  me- 
dium regarding  Incidents  In  the  past  life  of  the 
departed  friend,  which  one  Is  able  to  verify  after 
the  sitting  by  the  help  of  others. 

This  frequently  happens,  and  gives  a  basis  for 
belief  that  the  medium  has  really  been  in  contact 
with  a  discarnate  Intelligence.  It  Is  therefore  im- 
perative that  the  earnest  student  should  follow 
up  and  test  the  accuracy  of  any  statement  made 
outside  his  own  knowledge.  This  verification  can 
often  be  had  by  questioning  still  living  relatives 
and  friends  of  the  departed.  The  student  may 
often  deny  as  true,  facts  which  are  conveyed  to  a 
medium  from  a  departed  spirit,  simply  because  the 
facts  are  not  known  to  him,  but  if  later  these  are 
verified,  such  statements  are  often  the  most  valu- 
able evidence  on  which  to  found  confidence  in  the 
reality  of  spirit  Intercourse. 

The  sitting  will  be  terminated  by  the  medium  or 
her  control,  and  while  she  comes  out  of  trance  the 
sitter  should  wait  quietly  for  her  normal  person- 


l6o  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

ality  to  assert  Itself.  Any  difficulty  that  arises  In 
his  mind  may  be  cleared  away  by  asking  for  an 
explanation,  either  while  the  medium  is  under  con- 
trol or  in  her  normal  condition.  The  medium 
when  entranced  is  in  many  Instances  quite  uncon- 
scious of  what  is  taking  place,  but  some  are  par- 
tially conscious. 

There  are  many  private  persons  medlumistic- 
ally  developed  who  are  able  to  furnish  all  the 
proofs  required  If  one  can  gain  an  introduction  to 
them.  Acquaintance  wuth  these  will  come  as  one 
proceeds  with  investigation.  There  are  also  pri- 
vate home  circles  where  by  invitation,  and  under 
excellent  conditions,  one  may  steadily  pursue  the 
subject. 

THE  PLANCHETTE. 

This  heart-shaped  instrument,  about  seven 
inches  long  and  four  or  five  inches  wide,  Is  usually 
made  of  beech  wood,  with  three  small  wheels  or 
castors  to  allow  of  free  movement  In  any  direc- 
tion. At  one  end  a  lead  pencil  is  fixed,  by  which 
writing  Is  got  as  it  travels  over  the  surface  of  a 
clean  sheet  of  paper.  This  instrument  can  be  pur- 
chased at  many  of  the  large  general  stores  in  Lon- 
don, from  one  shilling  upwards,  and  is  often  sold 
as  a  toy  for  children,  which  Is  rather  unfortunate. 
Children  should  not  be  allowed  to  play  with  them. 


FIRST   STEPS  l6l 

as  without  careful  guidance  they  may  sometimes 
use  them  to  the  detriment  of  health  and  morals. 
The  instrument  is  usually  varnished  when  pur- 
chased, but  glass-paper  should  be  used  to  scrape 
the  varnish  from  it  before  using,  as  it  obstructs 
the  flow  of  the  magnetic  fluid  from  the  hands  of 
the  student,  in  its  passage  Into  the  planchette.  It 
Is  this  magnetic  energy  secreted  in  the  planchette 
which  the  discarnate  Intelligence  uses  as  the  mo- 
tive power  for  Its  manipulation. 

It  would  be  a  simple  matter  for  the  student  to 
push  this  instrument  about  w^herev^er  he  willed, 
by  the  force  of  his  own  hand,  but  he  must  distinct- 
ly understand,  that  when  the  power  Is  properly 
generated,  the  planchette  will  carry  his  hand  with 
it,  independently  of  his  own  w^ill,  and  alleged  to 
be  by  the  operation  of  an  outside  intelligence. 

The  planchette  should  be  used  In  the  following 
manner:  Upon  a  dining-room  table  wuth  a  smooth 
surface,  a  large  sheet  of  clean  paper,  about  two  or 
three  feet  square,  should  be  placed.  The  palms 
of  the  hands  should  be  rubbed  over  the  paper  for 
a  few  minutes  to  magnetize  It.  The  planchette 
should  rest  upon  this,  with  the  pencil  adjusted  so 
that  the  point  rests  lightly  upon  the  paper  in  such 
a  manner  as  not  to  obstruct  the  free  movement  of 
the  planchette.  The  fingers  of  both  hands  should 
be  placed  upon  the  surface  of  the  Instrum.ent, which 


1 62  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

in  a  few  minutes  may  begin  to  move  about  in  a 
sprawling  manner.  With  practice  this  will  gradu- 
ally be  controlled,  and  distinct  words  and  mes- 
sages written.  It  will  be  obvious  that  one's  own 
thoughts  will  be  seen  in  the  writing,  but  with  con- 
tinuous practice  this  will  become  less  and  less  evi- 
dent. Questions  may  be  asked  about  matters  relat- 
ing to  living  friends,  such  as,  "Can  you  tell  me 
where  my  brother  is?"  "Is  my  sister  still  in  Aus- 
tralia?" "Can  you  say  if  I  may  expect  a  letter 
from  my  cousin  this  week?  If  so,  what  day?"  etc. 
These  questions  may  be  asked  either  audibly  or 
mentally,  but  it  is  most  satisfactory  to  ask  audibly 
first,  and  mentally  when  more  fully  developed.  It 
will  be  time  enough  to  ask,  after  one  has  had  satis- 
factory evidence  of  another  mind  at  work,  whose 
mind  that  is,  whether  incarnate  or  discarnate,  and 
anything  regarding  such. 

This  instrument  should  not  be  used  longer  than 
one  hour  at  a  time,  and  not  oftener  than  three 
times  a  week,  on  alternate  nights,  at  the  same  hour 
if  possible.  The  appointments  should  be  kept  as 
one  might  with  any  business  friend.  One  should 
not  sit  with  fooling  or  frivolous  persons  in  the 
room,  or  when  tired  or  ill.  The  planchette  should 
be  locked  away  when  finished  with.  Should  there 
be  any  trouble  in  getting  the  planchette  to  write 
anything  other  than  one's  own  thoughts,   better 


FIRST    STEPS  163 

results  may  be  obtained  by  the  single  hands  of  two 
sisters  being  placed  on  the  instrument,  endeavor- 
ing to  secure  a  positive  and  negative  influence, 
which  is  usually  best  secured  by  male  and  female 
manipulators.  The  light  in  the  room  should  be 
subdued  slightly,  and  all  experiments  conducted 
when  one  Is  likely  to  be  undisturbed.  To  sit  im- 
mediately after  meals  is  not  desirable,  and  pro- 
miscuous sittings  often  lead  to  undesirable  results, 
as  spirit  tramps  and  loafers  may  enter  the  room 
and  take  control  of  the  instrument,  conveying  un- 
desirable influences  and  communications.  Should 
any  trouble  of  this  sort  arise,  and  the  unseen  vis- 
itors refuse  to  depart  by  request,  there  is  no  occa- 
sion for  fear,  but  the  sitting  should  be  discontin- 
ued till  the  next  arranged  date.  Patience  and 
steady  application  and  a  determination  to  be  mas- 
ter in  one's  own  house  will  bring  success.  Should 
any  difficulty  be  found  in  securing  a  free  and  ener- 
getic movement  of  the  planchette,  let  the  student 
try  various  assistants  until  he  finds  one  who  gives 
good  results.  When  this  one  is  found,  a  change 
should  not  be  made  unless  unavoidable.  It  is  ad- 
visable and  desirable  to  arrange  with  someone  in- 
terested in  the  subject,  rather  than  with  a  promis- 
cuous experimenter.  Husband  and  wife  can  often 
get  excellent  results. 


164  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

TABLE  MOVEMENT. 

This  form  of  intercourse  is  frequently  practised 
as  an  evening's  entertainment,  and,  like  amateur 
thought  reading,  may  sometimes  lead  to  unfor- 
tunate results  to  those  in  the  company  who  are 
peculiarly  sensitive,  through  a  lack  of  knowledge 
of  the  powers  set  In  motion.  Earnest  students  de- 
sirous of  procuring  messages  by  table  movement 
should  form  a  circle  of  from  four  to  eight  per- 
sons, an  equal  number  of  both  sexes  If  possible. 
They  should  sit  alternately,  male  and  female, 
around  an  uncovered  table  of  convenient  size,  in 
subdued  light,  and  secure  against  disturbance.  All 
the  company  should  place  the  palms  of  their  hands 
flat  upon  the  table  surface  lightly.  It  Is  not  nec- 
essary that  the  fingers  should  touch  each  other  as 
some  suppose.  Cheerful,  but  not  foolish,  conver- 
sation should  be  engaged  In,  but  without  dispute 
or  argument.  The  attention  should  not  be  con- 
centrated too  fixedly  on  expected  manifestations. 
Occasional  music  and  combined  singing  is  a  great 
help  to  secure  an  atmosphere  of  sympathy  and 
ease,  conducive  to  success.  After  some  time  the 
table  may  move  erratically,  but  later,  with  a  steady 
and  certain  action,  and  then  someone  should  take 
command  of  the  circle  and  act  as  spokesman.  It 
Is  a  usual  practice  to  request  that  the  table  be 
tilted  up  to  indicate  answers,  once  for  "No,"  twice 


FIRST    STEPS  165 

for  "Doubtful,"  and  three  times  for  "Yes."  Let 
the  leader  put  the  question,  "Are  conditions  satis- 
factory for  questions  to  be  answered?"  If  the 
movement  of  the  table  be  erratic,  continue  to  sit 
for  some  time  longer  and  put  the  question  again. 
It  may  be  that  better  results  will  be  got  by  certain 
members  changing  their  seats,  or  retiring  from  the 
table,  and  in  this  case  the  question  may  be  put  by 
the  spokesman,  and  the  answer  received  should  be 
acted  upon.  Should  the  circle  be  an  exceptionally 
good  one,  the  table  may  tilt  without  the  hands  of 
the  sitters  being  In  contact  with  it,  but  this  is  not 
a  very  frequent  occurrence.  The  signal  may  take 
the  form  of  raps  upon  the  table,  and  In  that  case 
it  should  be  arranged  that  the  raps  be  given  in 
reply  to  questions  In  the  same  manner.  In  this 
experiment  many  repeat  the  letters  of  the  alpha- 
bet In  order,  requesting  the  intelligence  to  tilt  the 
table  at  the  required  letter.  This  Is  rather  a  slow 
process  of  spelling  out  a  message  or  a  name,  but 
a  wonderful  degree  of  expertness  Is  arrived  at 
with  practice. 

Table  movements  are  often  most  successful 
when  there  are  only  two  sitters,  provided  these 
make  a  good  positive  and  negative  battery,  most 
conveniently  secured  by  one  of  each  sex.  The 
man  should  be  of  a  vigorous  and  healthy  physique, 
and  the  lady  healthy  but  of  a  passive  disposition. 


I  66  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

Two  of  the  same  sex  will,  however,  succeed  quite 
well,  provided  one  is  positive  and  active  in  tem- 
perament, and  the  other  negative  and  passive. 
Where  two  only  sit,  the  table  should  be  light  in 
construction,  and  one  that  will  easily  tilt,  other- 
wise much  magnetic  energy  will  be  dissipated.  A 
small  three-legged  white-wood  table,  with  unvar- 
nished top,  which  can  be  purchased  for  about  two 
shillings,  is  quite  suitable  for  the  purpose.  Pa- 
tience, and  the  continuance  of  the  sittings  for  some 
weeks  with  the  same  sitters,  meeting  if  possible  on 
the  same  day  of  the  week,  at  the  same  hour,  and 
in  the  same  room,  will  produce  a  greater  degree  of 
success.  The  sittings  should  not  occupy  more  than 
one  hour  at  a  time,  nor  be  held  oftener  than  twice 
a  week. 

The  apparent  triviality  of  these  manifestations 
is  often  commented  upon  by  would-be  investiga- 
tors, but  if  it  be  remembered  that  not  the  phe- 
nomena, but  the  message  received  through  the  tilt- 
ings  or  rappings  is  the  thing  desired,  such  humble 
instruments  need  not  be  despised.  Signalling  by 
flags  or  semaphore,  or  the  dots  of  the  Morse  code, 
are  not  scorned,  when  by  their  means  important 
warnings  or  news  is  received  from  friends  at  a 
distance. 


FIRST   STEPS  167 

AUTOMATIC  WRITING. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  simple  methods  of  com- 
munication, and  especially  suitable  for  some  stu- 
dents. Some  at  first  sitting  may  secure  independ- 
ent messages,  others  may  sit  for  weeks  and  get 
nothing  beyond  spasmodic  movement  and  erratic 
markings,  while  others  of  a  very  positive  nature 
may  fail  to  get  anything.  Owing  to  this  method 
of  intercourse  being  so  comparatively  easy  it  is 
often  abused  by  too  frequent  experiments,  at  all 
hours  and  any  place,  for  any  whim,  or  to  satisfy 
the  curiosity  of  others.  Students  should  not  fall 
into  the  error  of  experimenting  in  this  way,  other- 
wise they  w^ill  seriously  regret  it.  Half  an  hour 
should  be  set  aside  three  times  a  week,  and  what- 
ever time  is  fixed  upon,  the  day  and  hour  arranged 
should  be  carefully  kept.  It  is  also  advantageous 
to  sit  in  the  same  chair  and  in  the  same  room,  for 
the  spot  selected  will  become  magnetized,  and  will 
greatly  assist  success,  and  may  protect  from  un- 
desirable unseen  influences.  As  psychic  powers 
are  developed  such  hard  and  fast  practices  may  be 
dispensed  with. 

A  comfortable  chair  should  be  selected,  with 
table  and  writing  material  at  hand,  and  the  student 
should  sit  with  pencil  in  hand,  as  for  ordinary 
writing.  After  a  certain  development  has  been  at- 
tained, the  attention  should  be  occupied  by  read- 


1 68  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

ingy  otherwise  one  may  find  one's  own  thoughts 
reproduced  in  writing,  unless  the  operation  is  per- 
formed by  using  the  brain  of  the  medium  and  not 
directly  by  the  hand.  At  first  the  movement  may 
be  jerky,  and  the  pencil  show  signs  of  sprawling 
all  over  the  paper,  but  later,  with  practice,  thehand 
is  manipulated  free  from  one's  own  mental  con- 
trol, and  the  action  of  an  independent  mind  is 
gradually  seen  in  the  messages  received.  If  un- 
desirable messages  of  a  foolish  or  objectionable 
nature  come,  one  should  refuse  to  allow  the  hand 
to  be  used  for  this  purpose.  It  is  for  the  student 
to  make  the  proper  conditions. 

PUBLIC  SEANCES. 

These  are  held  by  professional  mediums  In  their 
own  homes,  or  in  connection  with  Theosophical 
and  Spiritualistic  societies,  and  are  advertised  in 
the  various  journals  aforementioned.  A  charge 
for  admittance  of  a  moderate  amount  is  usually 
made.  Such  seances  vary  to  an  extreme  degree, 
some  being  devoted  to  religious  instruction,  sci- 
ence and  philosophy,  others  to  the  crudest  of  for- 
tune-telling, or  to  business  purposes.  People  of 
the  educated  classes,  with  well-developed  Intellects, 
may  often  be  found  receiving  instruction  side  by 
side  with  the  servant  girl,  who  brings  her  love- 
letter  to  be  psychometrized  by  the  medium.     Like 


FIRST    STEPS  169 

every  other  science,  spirit  intercourse  may  be 
abuseci  or  wisely  used  by  human  beings.  The  gen- 
eral education  received  at  such  circles  is  of  great 
value  to  every  student  desiring  to  know  something 
of  the  possibilities  of  spirit  control. 

DEVELOPING  CIRCLES. 

Professional  and  private  mediums  hold  these  at 
their  homes  with  the  object  of  developing  psychic 
power  In  those  desirous  of  doing  so.  It  is  Impor- 
tant that  a  student  should  witness  this,  but  his  first 
visit  to  such  a  circle  may  be  startling,  and  offensive 
to  his  preconceived  Ideas  of  spirit  intercourse. 
There,  one  may  see  manifestations  known  and 
witnessed  by  the  Quaker  and  Shaker  communities 
which  gave  rise  to  their  names.  To-day,  these 
bodies  repudiate  this  aspect  of  the  science  of  their 
fathers,  probably  because  they  have  lost  the  under- 
standing of  how  to  guide  the  manifestations  right- 
ly. The  early  Christian  Church  had  the  same  evi- 
dences, and  hints  as  to  the  guidance  of  such  circles 
are  to  be  found  In  I  Corinthians  xlv. 

In  the  developing  circle,  men  and  women  will  be 
found  speaking  In  "unknown  tongues,"  some 
prophesying,  some  by  the  spirit  working  miracles 
of  healing,  others  demonstrating  clairvoyance  or 
describing  visions,  all  more  or  less  showing  signs 
of  agitation  or  twitching,  muttering  and  groaning, 


170  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

and  generally  "acting  the  fool"  (according  to  the 
judgment  of  the  uninitiated).  Many  excellent 
members  of  society  would  have  their  sensitive  souls 
outraged  by  such  exhibitions;  their  condemnation, 
however,  should  not  hinder  investigation.  The 
same  good  souls  might  be  equally  offended  if 
brought  to  the  manure  heap  from  which  their 
mushrooms,  cabbages  and  tomatoes  are  raised. 
These  they  joyfully  eat,  and  do  not  ask  too  closely 
about  the  natural  laboratory  through  which  they 
passed.  In  the  psychic  laboratory  there  is  to  be 
found  an  accumulated  mass  of  wealth  far  from 
pretty,  but  from  which  will  be  raised  a  body  of 
evidence  to  feed  the  hungry  souls  of  men,  and 
redeem  them  from  the  poverty  of  materialism. 

NATURAL  LAW  AT  W^ORK. 

If  the  student  can  see  even  dimly  that  these 
methods  of  communications,  seemingly  clumsy  and 
discordant,  have  a  distinct  scientific  bearing,  and 
are  the  result  of  the  orderly  working  of  natural 
law,  he  will  continue  his  investigation  patiently. 
It  is  always  difficult  to  comprehend  the  laws  gov- 
erning any  science  at  the  outset  of  a  study,  but 
patience  and  humility  will  enable  one  to  put  into 
proper  sequence  facts  which  at  first  seem  disor- 
derly and  meaningless,  because  one  is  wrestling 


FIRST   STEPS  171 

too  closely  with  details  to  see  the  trend  of  the 
whole. 

The  quakings  and  shiverings  above  described 
gradually  subside,  as  the  sensitives  become  devel- 
oped, until  in  course  of  time  a  spirit  can  control, 
entering  and  departing  as  the  sweetest  of  influ- 
ences and  under  the  entire  sway  of  the  medium's 
own  personality.  Here  will  be  met  crowds  of  sim- 
ple humans  called  spirits,  returning  from  the  Great 
Beyond,  and  giving  the  lie  direct  to  that  false 
statement  which  speaks  of  "the  undiscovered 
country  from  whose  bourne  no  traveller  returns." 
Here,  one  beholds  in  all  its  naked  truth,  the  fact 
of  how  vast  a  host  continually  pass  into  the  spirit 
world,  uneducated  and  unprepared  for  the  glori- 
ous state  which  should  be  theirs,  souls  who  have 
lived  sad,  mean  lives  on  earth,  with  their  minds 
in  rags  and  tatters.  Here  and  there  one  a  little 
further  advanced  is  to  be  found,  with  soul  powers 
unfolded  and  full  of  love,  laboring  hard  to  pass 
the  bread  of  life  to  the  unfortunate  ones  who  are 
suffering  from  the  ignorance  of  those  priests  and 
teachers  whose  duty  and  privilege  it  should  have 
been  to  understand  this  science  and  prepare  the 
people  for  their  destiny  as  spirits,  here  and  here- 
after. 


172  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

THIS  SCIENCE  NOT  TO  BE  LIGHTLY  ENTERED  INTO. 
In  the  foregoing  passages  the  necessity  of  mod- 
eration has  been  pointed  out,  and  the  advice  given 
that  sittings  for  psychic  experiment  should  not 
exceed  in  the  total  two  or  three  hours  per  week. 
Later,  when  the  laws  governing  the  subject  are 
understood  more  fully,  the  time  spent  may  be  ex- 
tended indefinitely,  so  long  as  health  and  fitness 
for  the  general  affairs  of  life  are  not  interfered 
with.  Beware  how  this  great  knowledge  is  used. 
Any  fool  may  open  the  door,  but  caution  is  re- 
quired as  to  w^ho  is  invited  to  come  In.  The 
author  has  stated  that  one  may  prove  spirit  Inter- 
course possible  without  virtue  or  faith,  but  one 
cannot  go  far  In  the  science  without  these  attri- 
butes, or  he  may  endanger  the  development  of  his 
own  soul  faculties.  If  it  is  Intended  to  proceed 
beyond  the  threshold,  the  student  should  speak, 
[and  act,  on  all  occasions  with  thorough  honesty.  A 
course  of  lessons  on  ethics  Is  not  out  of  place,  as 
right  thinking  and  right  action  are  the  only  sure 
defences  against  the  attack  of  vicious  and  foolish 
men  and  women  In  the  spirit  world.  Not  that  the 
author  wishes  to  frighten  anyone  from  Investiga- 
tion, for  a  simple  child  may  walk  through  the  pow- 
ers of  darkness  unharmed.  Curiosity  to  ascertain 
whether  spirit  Intercourse  Is  true  is  quite  legiti- 
mate, and  this  book  Is  written  to  satisfy  that  curi- 


FIRST    STEPS  173 

osity,  but  the  object  of  It  is  to  bring  the  reader  into 
a  knowledge  of  life,  rather  than  of  death. 

COMMUNICATION  AND  COMMUNION. 

Communication  with  departed  spirits  must  not 
be  confused  with  soul  communion.  Both  have 
their  value,  but  the  values  are  not  equal.  "To 
the  man  who  stands  in  doubt  of  whether  there  are 
any  souls  to  influence  at  all,  and  whether  death  is 
not  the  final  climax  of  existence,  it  is  useless  to 
talk  about  the  blessedness  of  spirit  communion. 
One  little  test  of  identity  through  a  medium  will 
be  to  him  more  satisfactory  than  any  hope  and  as- 
surance of  influence  which  may  be  held  out  to  him. 
Let  him  once  prove  to  himself  that  the  dead  are 
alive  and  he  will  then  have  taken  the  step  into 
what  men  call  the  'Kingdom  of  the  Spirit.'  Here 
he  will  not  be  content  to  remain,  but  follow  on  to 
higher  attainments."  So  speaks  a  present-day 
writer  on  psychic  science,  with  great  force  and 
truth.  Further  teaching  will  assist  the  student  to 
unfold  spiritual  powers  which  will  enable  him  to 
know  the  joy  of  communion  far  transcending  the 
mere  material  act  of  communication.  To  confuse 
the  one  with  the  other  leads  only  to  disappoint- 
ment. 

To  be  in  communion  with  souls  who  by  their 
loving  influence  refresh,  Invigorate,  stimulate,  en- 


174  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

lighten,  is  far  more  important  and  helpful  than 
to  receive  messages,  however  good  and  clear  they 
may  be,  on  particular  topics  for  identification. 
The  student  should  remember  that  like  draws  to 
like,  and  the  more  truly  life  on  earth  is  lived,  the 
more  surely  will  one  fit  oneself  for  the  company 
of  enlightened  souls  who  have  passed  through  the 
veil. 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE    CULTURE    OF   THE    SOUL 
The  soul  of  all  improvement  is  the  improvement 

of  the  soul. BUSHNELL. 

FAMILY  WORSHIP 

DOUBTLESS  the  term  "family  worship" 
will  give  many  readers  a  cold  shiver  when 
they  think  of  the  artificial  formality  of  the 
usual  ceremony  called  by  this  name,  where  sons 
and  daughters,  servants,  and  visitors,  were  mar- 
shalled together  Into  a  strange  atmosphere,  lis- 
tened to  a  chapter  of  the  Bible,  often  read  in  an 
unnatural  voice,  the  ordeal  terminating  in  a  long, 
or  short,  perfunctory  prayer,  and  a  sigh  of  relief 
escaping  the  worshippers  as  they  rose  from  their 
knees  and  returned  to  things  of  real  interest,  and 
the  familiarities  of  ordinary  life.  These  dread- 
ful soul  chilling  experiences  are  happily  almost  a 
thing  of  the  past,  but  there  is  no  reason  why  an 
hour  should  not  be  spent  in  family  communion 
with  spiritual  beings  once  or  twice  a  week  in  which 
united  aspiration  would  produce  an  elevating  in- 

175 


176  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

fluence  on  every  member  of  the  family.  The 
Chinese,  Japanese,  and  Indian  peoples  knew  some- 
thing of  the  value  and  efficacy  of  family  worship, 
where  the  spirits  of  their  ancestors  returned  to 
their  earthly  homes,  and  gave  words  of  counsel 
and  good  cheer.  Such  visits  should  be  possible  In 
Western  homes,  and  should  be  at  least  as  deeply 
interesting  as  the  conversation  of  a  relative  re- 
turned from  a  foreign  country,  who  describes  the 
new  land  In  which  he  has  dwelt,  anci  the  habits  and 
character  of  its  people. 

Spiritual  law  and  religion  have  been  made  such 
dull,  artificial,  and  unreasonable  things,  that  the 
natural  man  refuses  to  discuss  them.  Spirit  Inter- 
course, however,  has  nothing  necessarily  to  do 
with  religion,  for  it  is  a  law  of  nature,  and  so  de- 
lightfully interesting  a  study,  that  no  one,  what- 
ever his  temperament  and  tastes  may  be,  will  feel 
anything  but  great  joy  in  such  natural  Intercourse. 
There  are  some  who  fear  to  enter  the  subject,  be- 
cause they  imagine  they  will  lose  some  of  the  ra- 
tional joys  of  existence,  but  the  author  can  assure 
them  that  such  practices  will  rob  no  one  of  a  single 
joy  or  pleasure  In  life,  but  will  greatly  add  to  them. 
Unless  he  had  proved  this  to  his  entire  satisfac- 
tion, he  would  not  devote  his  time  to  the  recom- 
mendation of  Its  practice. 

Within  every  family  is  to  be  found  one  or  more 


THE   CULTURE   OF   THE   SOUL  1 77 

sensitive  persons,  man,  woman,  or  child,  through 
whom  the  spirit  world  may  directly  work.  Through 
development,  which  can  be  brought  about  by  cer- 
tain simple  practices,  these  sensitive  individuals 
can  open  themselves  to  admit  direct  messages  of 
love  and  good  counsel  from  those  who  have  passed 
into  spiritual  states.  Development  may  be  carried 
out  by  the  operation  of  intelligent  beings  on  the 
spirit  side  of  life,  if  the  conditions  are  studied  and 
supplied  by  the  mortal.  Books  of  instruction  on 
the  development  of  mediumship  can  be  purchased 
from  Light  Office^  no  St.  Martin's  Lane,  Lon- 
don, W.C,  or  directions  may  be  had  from  stu- 
dents of  the  subject.  In  this  way  a  home  circle 
can  be  formed,  where  once  or  twice  a  week  the 
family  may  gather  together  to  ask  questions  and 
receive  answers  on  every  problem  of  life,  not 
alone  from  relatives  and  friends  recently  trans- 
lated, but  from  some  of  the  noblest  of  beings  who 
having  long  dwelt  in  celestial  spheres,  have  culti- 
vated a  highly  developed  nature,  and  who  possess 
an  extended  knowledge  of  spiritual  laws.  It  fre- 
quently happens  that  those  who  are  accustomed 
to  communicate  with  friends  and  relatives  fail  to 
observe  that  the  ordinary  being  who  leaves  earth 
cannot  be  the  wisest  of  guides,  although  he  may 
continue  to  be  a  faithful  friend.  The  recently 
dead  themselves  require  guidance,  but  some  are 


178  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

slow  to  perceive  their  limitations  as  spirits,  and 
seek  to  become  teachers  long  before  they  are  fitted 
for  such  work.  Years  are  sometimes  spent  In  In- 
tercourse of  this  kind,  and  opportunities  are 
neglected  of  receiving  the  benefit  of  advanced  spir- 
itual Instruction  from  those  who  are  not  only  bet- 
ter fitted  to  give  It,  but  are  glad  to  have  the  oppor- 
tunity of  assisting  mortals. 

Protestant  Christianity  Is  Inclined  to  limit  spir- 
itual communion  to  one  called  Jesus,  but  the  new 
science  of  spirit  Intercourse,  provided  one  fits 
themselves  for  such,  opens  the  door  to  communion 
with  every  noble  man  or  woman  who  ever  lived. 
Buddha,  Confucius,  Socrates,  Plato,  St.  Francis, 
Bacon,  Emerson,  or  any  other.  These  will  be 
drawn  only  to  those  of  a  sincere  and  spiritual 
nature  who  seek  their  help  and  guidance. 

Many  on  earth  have  already  opened  such  doors 
of  intercourse,  and  enjoy  close  communion  with 
individuals  such  as  those  named,  while  others 
who  once  enjoyed  It  have  lost  the  privilege  through 
acts  of  folly  or  Ignorance,  and  sometimes  through 
undue  scepticism.  It  Is  almost  Impossible  to  real- 
ize how  this  and  future  generations  may  be  blessed 
and  elevated  through  such  companionship.  This 
Is  no  Idle,  fantastic  assertion,  but  is  a  solid  fact, 
known  and  realized  In  different  degrees  of  per- 
fection by  thousands  to-day,  but  secretly  enjoyed 


THE   CULTURE   OF   THE   SOUL  179 

as  an  experience  too  sacred  to  be  spoken  of  openly 
before  a  cold,  scoffing,  and  materialistic  world. 
Many  recipients  of  this  wonderful  experience  are 
ignorant  of  how  the  Intercourse  has  come  about, 
nor  are  they  aware  of  the  laws  governing  it,  for 
they  have  stumbled  upon  it  through  some  fortu- 
nate habit  of  living,  or  owing  to  some  peculiar 
Inherited  sensitiveness. 

Persons  Ignorant  of  these  things  often  Inquire, 
"But  what  Is  Its  use?"     "If  it  be  true  that  the 
dead  can  return,  they  never  tell  us  anything  worth 
knowing,  nor  can  they  help  us."     Indeed  I     They 
are  the  ones  who  can  and  do  give  knowledge  worth 
having.     Even  If  their  continued  personality  was 
the    only   thing   they   could   prove   by   returning, 
would  not  that  be  of  vital  service?     Ask  anyone 
who  has  lost  a  dear  friend  by  death.     But  this  is 
only  a  tithe  of  the  value  of  the  Intercourse,  and  this 
book  and  others  have  been  written  to  prove  that 
the  communicators  have  much  to  give  of  vital  im- 
portance,  and  supply  Important  facts   regarding 
man's  post-mortem  state.     They  are  able  to  see 
exactly  where  a  mortal  stands,  not  only  In  relation 
to  material  things,  but  also  to  truth  and  happiness, 
and  from  this  discernment  of  Inner  spiritual  states 
can  give  just  such  advice  as  Is  at  the  moment  re- 
quired.    The  spiritual  advice  given  may  be  noth- 
ing new  to  the  world,  but  to  the  individual  to  whom 


l80  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

it  is  imparted  it  is  just  the  word  in  season  that 
stirs  the  dormant  spirit,  ilkiminates  his  path,  and 
leads  him  into  a  new  and  larger  life. 

The  world  is  crowded  with  unhappy  men  and 
women  who  wander  through  life  sick  and  weary 
and  spiritually  dead,  and  who  do  not  know  the 
cause  of  their  unhappy  state.  They  receive  no 
wise  guidance  from  friends  or  spiritual  physicians 
on  earth,  and  yet  these  very  individuals,  when 
brought  into  direct  contact  with  spiritual  beings, 
often  receive  the  emancipating  message  of  which 
they  stand  so  sorely  in  need.  These  unhappy  spirit- 
ual states  are  the  result  of  some  hidden  cause  un- 
seen by  mortal  sight,  but  seen  by  the  spirit,  and 
the  disease  having  been  diagnosed,  the  right 
remedy  is  speedily  forthcoming.  Wise  spirits  will 
point  out  clearly  the  strong  qualities  of  one's  char- 
acter, some  of  which  had  never  before  been  recog- 
nized, or  with  tender  thoughtfulness  they  will 
touch  upon  one's  weakness  and  show  how  best  this 
may  be  surmounted.  Is  this  not  worth  having? 
What  greater  blessing  on  earth  can  one  have  to 
compare  with  it?  In  seeking  for  this  doorway 
into  the  company  of  the  noble  dead  one  may  very 
likely  offend  and  lose  some  earthly  friends  and 
acquaintances  who  object  to  the  search,  but  for 
every  such  friend  lost  heavenly  ones  infinitely 
more  worthy  will  be  found,  and  one  will  learn  in 


THE    CULTURE    OF    THE    SOUL  l8l 

time  that  an  hour  spent  in  the  company  of  the 
immortals  is  of  greater  value,  and  far  transcend- 
ing a  year's  intercourse  with  many  on  earth. 

THE  SANCTUM. 

Wherever  spirit  intercourse  is  to  be  conducted 
a  room  should  be  set  aside  as  far  as  possible  for 
this  purpose,  where  quietness  and  isolation  from 
intruders  can  be  had.  A  musical  instrument,  when 
tastefully  played,  helps  the  conditions,  for  music 
Is  a  great  asset  In  banishing  the  thought  of  be- 
setting cares  and  in  stimulating  noble  emotions. 
It  also  helps  to  free  the  spirit  of  the  medium,  and 
attunes  the  sitters  to  the  finer  vibrations  of  celes- 
tial spheres.  The  room  should  be  draped  in  quiet 
colors,  green  being  most  suitable  because  the  most 
natural,  and  the  decorations  should  be  as  simple 
as  possible,  fresh  flowers  supplying  this  ade- 
quately. The  room  should  be  properly  ventilated 
and  the  temperature  comfortable,  about  sixty  de- 
grees. All  flickering  light  from  the  fire  should 
be  avoided,  as  It  disturbs  the  medium,  and  inter- 
rupts the  clairvoyance.  If  the  room  cannot  be 
heated  with  a  closed  slow  combustion  stove,  the 
fire  should  be  reduced  to  a  dull  red  glow,  but  the 
ideal  form  of  heating  is  by  hot  water  or  steam 
pipes.  No  strong  light  should  issue  from  the 
windows,  therefore  a  blind  is  necessary,  or  better 


1 82  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

Still,  the  window  may  be  covered  with  artistic 
glacier  paper.  The  atmosphere  of  the  room  may 
be  freshened  by  the  use  of  any  essence  of  flowers, 
or  by  incense  if  desired,  but  the  particular  essence 
used  should  be  restricted  to  the  seance  room  alone, 
and  not  used  upon  the  person,  or  for  any  other 
purpose,  as  the  sense  of  smell  is  a  very  important 
factor  in  the  association  of  ideas.  This  also  ap- 
plies to  the  music,  and  as  far  as  possible  the  par- 
ticular music  used  in  the  seance  room  should  be 
reserved  for  this,  such  songs  and  hymns  being  se- 
lected as  best  please  the  worshippers. 

Many  will  find  these  adjuncts  to  spiritual  wor- 
ship unnecessary,  owing  to  a  natural  capacity  to 
bring  themselves  at  once  by  their  will  power  into  a 
holy  calm.  In  such  cases  the  auxiliaries  mentioned, 
such  as  coloring,  incense,  and  music,  may  be  dis- 
pensed with,  but  many  will  find  that  they  are  of 
great  value  in  helping  them  to  surmount  distract- 
ing conditions  of  ordinary  life.  Acute  arguments 
or  questions  likely  to  lead  to  discord  should  not 
be  raised  in  this  room  for  worship  if  the  best  con- 
ditions are  desired.  There  should  be  no  con- 
straint, however,  in  the  proceedings;  innocent 
laughter  will  sometimes  help  to  supply  a  better 
atmosphere  than  an  over-serious  mood,  and  to 
this  end  spirits  of  a  light-hearted  nature  are  often 
introduced,  but  frivolity  should  be  avoided. 


THE    CULTURE    OF    THE    SOUL  1 83 

The  individual  who  is  to  act  as  the  medium 
should  sit  in  the  same  chair  and  position  at  each 
sitting,  and,  as  far  as  possible,  the  other  mem- 
bers should  do  so  also,  male  and  female  alter- 
nately. A  trusted  friend  or  two  may  be  intro- 
duced, who  are  likely  to  be  regular  in  their  at- 
tendance, but  promiscuous  visitors,  who  are 
strangers,  should  not  be  brought  in,  for  such  will 
often  throw  conditions  entirely  out  of  balance,  and 
spoil  results.  No  member  of  the  family  should 
be  pressed  to  join  who  does  not  do  so  cheerfully, 
and  anyone  who  is  sick,  or  suffering  from  severe 
colds  or  headaches,  should  be  discouraged  from 
attendance.  The  w^orship  should  be  fixed  for  cer- 
tain days,  and  the  time  strictly  adhered  to,  for 
regular  hours  of  sitting  and  on  regular  days  are 
imperativ^e,  as  spirit  operators  have  duties  in  their 
own  spheres  to  perform,  and  a  frequent  change  of 
time  may  rob  one  of  their  help.  The  seance  room 
should  not  be  entered  immediately  after  a  heavy 
meal,  but  two  hours  at  least  should  be  allowed  to 
elapse  between  this  and  the  time  of  w^orship. 
Smoking  and  alcohol  should  also  be  avoided  for 
some  time  before  a  sitting. 

SPIRIT  COMMUNION. 

Some  investigators  require  very  little  evidence 
from  phenomena  to  satisfy  them  that  there  is  a 


I  84  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

spirit  world  which  can  be  communicated  with,  and 
quickly  attain  to  a  higher  communion.  But  others 
may  seek  and  profit  from  the  phenomenal  aspect 
for  a  much  longer  period. 

It  may  be  that  aftar  some  years  of  spirit  inter- 
course, when  such  an  one  is  fully  satisfied  with  the 
proofs  received  that  life  continues  beyond  death, 
desires  will  awaken  for  something  better  than  the 
conversation  of  spirits,  only  a  little  more  or  less 
advanced  than  oneself.  This  desire  gradually 
awakes  in  every  progressive  soul,  and  the  hunger 
Is  occasionally  satisfied  by  visits  from  spirits  of  a 
refined  order.  These  will  stimulate  one  to  make 
a  bolder  effort  to  accomplish  some  high  purpose 
in  life,  and  the  assurance  may  spring  up  that  by 
their  help  and  closer  association  greater  things 
may  be  obtained.  Such  brief  and  very  occasional 
Interviews  with  strong  and  holy  minds  bring  to  the 
circle  a  great  joy,  and  while  they  are  present  their 
strength  seems  to  be  communicated,  making  one 
feel  that  with  their  companionship  everything  is 
possible.  Progress  will  be  slow  without  such  guid- 
ance and  help,  which  wait  for  everyone  who  cares 
to  claim  them.  There  Is  certainly  a  price  to  pay 
for  these,  for  first  one  must  seek  to  cultivate 
one's  own  soul  and  prepare  It  for  the  upper 
reaches  of  spirit  Intercourse. 

If  there  is  a  sensitive  in  the  home  or  circle  al- 


THE    CULTURE    OF   THE    SOUL  1 85 

ready  psychically  developed,  and  capable  of  giv- 
ing spirit  messages,  but  not  of  a  high  spiritual 
character,  a  change  may  be  brought  about  through 
the  operation  of  prayer  and  aspiration,  provided 
all  in  the  circle  cooperate  to  this  end.  (  It  is  use- 
less to  expect  advanced  beings  from  higher 
spheres  to  associate  with  spirits  who  have  no  de- 
sire for  progress,  and  investigators  will  have  to 
make  up  their  minds  whether  they  are  prepared 
to  sacrifice  these  lower  communications  for  the 
higher.  ',  The  author  does  not  here  suggest  that 
anyone  should  turn  his  back  upon  all  the  kindly 
spirits  who  have  perhaps  for  years  helped  him  in 
his  investigations,  but  sifting  of  the  undesirables 
will  have  to  take  place.  Advanced  spirits  do  not 
object  to  enter  the  company  of  the  ignorant  if 
these  are  ready  to  profit  from  their  companion- 
ship, but  they  rightly  object  to  associate  with 
clowns  and  fools,  either  amongst  men  or  spirits. 
No  spirit  of  a  high  order  ever  presses  his  truth  or 
his  company  upon  anyone  either  above  or  below 
him.  Immediately  one  sets  about  reaching  a 
higher  plane  of  communication  with  the  object  of 
self-development,  spirits  of  an  idle  character  who 
have  long  enjoyed  the  open  door,  may  sturdily  op- 
pose such  a  change,  and  may  even  jeer  at  one's 
aspirations,   and  Interfere  with  the  new-comers, 


I  86  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

but  this  opposition  will  be  of  short  duration  If  one 
steadily  pursues  the  search  for  the  highest. 

Such  a  change  as  has  been  Indicated  above 
should  be  made  very  tactfully,  and  every  con- 
sideration shown  for  the  feelings  of  those  useful 
but  less  progressive  spirits  who  have  their  own 
valuable  work  to  perform.  One  consequence  of 
such  a  change  from  the  lower  to  the  higher  inter- 
course will  probably  be  to  lose  all  physical  phe- 
nomena through  the  medium,  and  those  interest- 
ing tests  required  and  looked  upon  as  so  impor- 
tant by  new  or  sceptical  investigators  may  entirely 
cease.  It  is  wise,  therefore,  seriously  to  count 
the  cost  before  desiring  such  a  change  of  controls 
in  a  circle.  The  medium  and  the  members  of  the 
circle  who  wish  for  communion  of  a  higher  kind 
may  also  have  to  make  some  sacrifice  in  order  to 
gain  that  purification  of  the  body  which  is  neces- 
sary to  high  Intercourse.  The  discontinuance  of 
flesh  food,  alcohol,  and  excessive  smoking  may  be 
mentioned.  Some  will  say  that  this  Is  unneces- 
sary, and  that  all  these  things  may  be  taken  in 
moderation.  This  may  be  true,  but  the  quality 
of  the  Intercourse  will  have  to  be  also  taken  In 
moderation,  and  the  highest  will  not  be  known, 
for  the  bodily  conditions  resulting  from  Indul- 
gence in  flesh  and  alcohol  are  deadening  to  the 
higher    spiritual    powers    of    the    human    being. 


THE   CULTURE    OF    THE    SOUL  1 87 

Spirits  of  a  superior  order  will  not  make  strenu- 
ous effort  to  come  from  their  realms  of  purified 
states  to  those  who  are  not  prepared  to  make 
reasonable  sacrifices  to  fit  themselves  for  their 
company.  It  may  be  possible  to  get  an  occasional 
visit,  but  continued  Intercourse  Is  only  likely  when 
due  preparation  Is  made.  There  Is  no  royal  road 
to  spiritual  development,  and  only  by  prayer  and 
sacrifice  can  the  goal  be  reached.  Beware  of  all 
who  offer  to  Indicate  short  cuts,  for  these  are 
ignorant  or  charlatans. 

The  four  essential  necessities  for  success  are 
aspiration,  right  dl-et,  exercise,  and  self-control, 
and  to  these  may  be  added  rhythmic  breathing, 
concentration,  and  meditation.  These  have  been 
required  by  every  wise  religious  Instructor  from 
the  novice  who  seeks  to  enter  Into  advanced  oc- 
cult science,  and  their  observance  cannot  be 
evaded. 

ASPIRATION. 

Aspiration  is  but  another  word  for  prayer.  The 
student  should  stand  upon  his  feet  and  offer  a 
prayer  such  as  the  following:  "If  there  be  a  gov- 
erning Power  In  the  Universe  that  can  answer 
prayer,  then  let  such  manifest  itself.  Here  am 
I  seeking  the  highest,  desiring  to  know  how  I  may 
come  into  touch  with   spiritual  beings  who  will 


I  88  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

help  me  to  self-realization.  If  this  governing 
Principle  can  hear  and  lead  to  that  which  I  de- 
sire, or  to  anyone  who  will  show  me  how  to  ac- 
complish that  desire,  let  it  be  done.  I  await  the 
answer."  In  some  such  manner,  or  as  otherwise 
suits  the  student,  let  a  request  be  made  every  night 
and  morning  audibly  in  no  uncertain  w^ay.  Such 
a  prayer  cannot  go  unanswered.  Let  it  be  offered 
steadily  week  by  week,  and  year  by  year,  while  the 
answer  is  gradually  realized.  Expect  the  answer, 
for  an  answer  is  bound  to  come,  and  the  fulness 
of  It  will  depend  upon  faith  and  persevering  in- 
dustry, and  help  from  spiritual  beings.  The  an- 
swer will  come  through  the  working  out  of  natural 
law,  and  not  through  any  miracle.  Spiritual  real- 
ization is  a  growth,  and  not  a  sudden  jump  into 
actuality. 

DIET. 

While  offering  such  prayer  the  diet  should  be 
reduced  to  the  lowest  quantity  commensurate  with 
good  health.  The  food  should  be  pure  and  plain, 
chiefly  composed  of  fruit,  vegetables,  and  fish,  and 
the  amount  of  meat  used  reduced  until  it  may  alto- 
gether be  dispensed  with  without  causing  undue 
strain  upon  the  system.  The  Roman  Catholic 
Church  has  always  recognized  the  importance  of 
diet   by   setting   apart   days    for    fasting,   but   in 


THE    CULTURE    OF    THE    SOUL  1 89 

modern  times  this  custom  has  been  honored  more 
in  the  breach  than  In  the  observance.  Protestant- 
ism has  been  carelessly  negligent  on  this  point,  for 
it  has  made  no  protest  against  a  general  beef- 
steak Christianity  for  all  its  adherents,  evidently 
not  recognizing  that  diet  had  any  special  relation 
to  the  cultivation  of  the  highest  spiritual  gifts. 

EXERCISE. 

Exercise  Is  essential  to  enable  the  body  to  keep 
in  perfect  health,  for  without  a  well  balanced 
body  a  balanced  mind  is  Impossible.  Disordered 
livers  lead  to  disordered  tempers,  and  where  regu- 
lar occupation  giving  adequate  exercise  is  not 
possible,  some  regulated  muscle  and  breathing 
exercises  should  be  used. 

SELF-CONTROL. 

Self-control  Is  only  possible  to  one  who  eats 
and  works  properly.  It  is  quite  hopeless  to  think 
that  a  clean  mind,  free  from  all  passionate  desires, 
can  be  obtained,  while  the  body  Is  kept  aflame  with 
strong  foods,  or  where  it  lies  about  In  Idleness. 
Sex  Intercourse  Is  disastrous  to  all  highly  devel- 
oped and  spiritual  states,  and  those  who  have  not 
controlled  this  force  and  learned  to  direct  it  into 
the  channel  of  spiritual  energy,  will  fail  to  rise 
to  any  advanced  state,  however  much  they  may 


190  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

desire  to  do  so.  It  is  advisable,  while  seeking  to 
function  upon  planes  of  advanced  consciousness 
entirely  to  resign  all  sexual  Indulgence,  for  there 
are  natural  laws  prohibiting  such  a  strain  upon 
the  body  and  the  soul  at  one  and  the  same  time. 
Mere  animal  enjoyment  is  a  poor  substitute  for 
that  ecstasy  known  to  the  man  or  woman  who  by 
self-purification  and  sacrifice  lives  upon  the  higher 
realm  of  existence,  such  as  Is  frequently  known  to 
the  poet,  the  artist,  and  the  mystic.  Before  en- 
tering Into  such  experiments  It  is  therefore  neces- 
sary to  count  the  cost.  Deep  breathing  exercises, 
concentration,  and  meditation,  help  to  release  the 
soul,  so  that  It  is  at  liberty  to  function  upon  spirit- 
ual planes.  These  also  strengthen  the  will,  giving 
the  student  mastery  over  himself,  and  over  the 
difficulties  that  he  will  meet  in  his  path.  Such 
exercises  require  careful  and  constant  practice, 
for  at  least  one  hour  each  day.  To  understand 
these  properly  it  will  be  helpful  to  receive  some  in- 
struction from  a  teacher  of  occultism,  but  the  prin- 
cipal lessons  may  be  learned  within  a  few  hours, 
and  may  be  practised  at  leisure.  Books  of  instruc- 
tion are  to  be  had  on  the  science  of  rhythmic 
breathing  and  concentration,  the  best  being  a 
course  of  lectures  on  "Yoga  Philosophy,"  by 
SwamI  Vivekananda,  published  at  3s.  6d.  by  Long- 
mans, Green  &  Co.,   and  "Fourteen  Lessons  In 


THE   CULTURE   OF   THE   SOUL  I9I 

Yogi  Philosophy,"  by  Ramacharaka,  5s.,  Fowler 
&  Co.,  Ludgate  Circus,  London,  E.C. 

SOUL   CULTURE   A    SCIENCE. 

It  is  a  peculiar  idea  that  the  soul  of  man  may 
be  subjected  to  any  kind  of  treatment,  and  allowed 
to  grow  as  it  will.  This  is  due  to  ignorance  on  the 
part  of  many  of  the  fact  that  the  soul  is  one  of 
the  most  delicate  creations  of  nature,  and  that  its 
cultivation  forms  one  of  the  most  important  duties 
of  man;  therefore  no  amount  of  time,  money,  or 
careful  consideration  is  too  great  to  spend  in  its 
training.  In  earlier  ages  this  fact  was  realized, 
and  soul  culture  was  more  or  less  taught  as  a 
science,  but  the  knowledge  was  lost  in  mediaeval 
times.  Artificial  teaching  and  the  practice  of  what 
was  called  "soul  saving,"  against  which  every 
sensible  man  and  woman  revolts,  held  sway,  and 
now^  the  very  subject  of  soul  culture  as  a  system  is 
almost  unknown,  and  even  the  term  is  an  offence 
to  many. 

CONCENTRATION  AND  MEDITATION. 

These  may  be  practised  in  the  silence  of  one's 
own  room,  or  In  the  wilds  of  nature,  but  where- 
ever  It  is  carried  out  it  should  be  continued  as  far 
as  possible,  In  the  same  place  and  at  the  same  time 
each  day.     Morning  and  evening,  just  when  rising 


192  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

or  retiring,  are  the  best  occasions,  and  meditation 
should  follow  upon  the  deep  breathing  exercises 
and  concentration.  The  result  of  these  practices 
will  quickly  be  evident  In  a  keener  mind,  a  steadier 
pulse,  a  brighter  eye,  purer  thought,  a  sweeter 
temper,  a  holier  calm,  and  a  gradual  cessation  of 
all  passionate  desire.  The  student  will  draw  to 
himself  one  or  more  of  the  higher  spiritual  guides, 
who  will  breathe  into  his  mind  new  Ideas  and 
directions  how  to  act,  which  he  may  consciously 
or  unconsciously  follow.  Meditation  Is  of  in- 
calculable value  to  the  student  who  desires  spirit- 
ual knowledge,  for  there  are  continual  influxes 
from  higher  spheres  which  can  only  be  received 
when  the  body  and  mind  are  calm.  Such  Influxes 
are  powerful  to  renew  and  elevate,  much  as  a  ray 
of  sunshine  affects  vegetation,  and  those  who  are 
passive  and  attentive  can  most  profit  from  them, 
while  those  actively  engaged  in  physical  affairs 
are  not  in  such  a  good  position  to  do  so.  A  Mar- 
coni operator  on  board  ship  who  neglects  his  in- 
strument and  plays  cards  in  the  saloon,  is  not 
likely  to  know  of  anything  going  on  beyond  his 
immediate  neighborhood,  and  messages  may  fly 
through  the  etheric  current  from  a  hundred 
sources,  without  his  being  aware  of  the  fact,  if 
his  thoughts  are  centred  on  other  affairs.  The 
student  of  spiritual  knowledge  must,  by  develop- 


THE   CULTURE   OF   THE   SOUL  1 93 

ment  of  his  soul  and  by  constant  watchfulness, 
catch  the  messages  that  are  continuously  coming 
to  the  earth  from  on  high.  There  is  no  doubt  that 
the  activity  of  men  on  the  physical  plane,  where 
every  moment  of  their  time  Is  devoted  to  the 
things  of  the  outer  senses,  has  robbed  them  of 
much  that  was  meant  to  make  life  rich  and  sweet. 
Many  people  in  former  days  probably  enjoyed 
life  a  great  deal  more  than  people  to-day,  In  some 
respects,  because  of  the  long  hours  they  were  able 
to  spend  alone  without  that  straining  of  the  mind 
upon  close  attention  to  multitudinous  details  which 
entails  such  a  waste  of  spiritual  energy.  Many 
men  to-day  almost  fear  to  be  In  their  own  com- 
pany for  an  hour,  and  rush  to  the  nearest  music- 
hall,  cinema  show,  or  social  club,  so  completely 
have  they  lost  the  art  and  joy  of  meditation. 

The  student,  while  developing,  should  keep  only 
the  company  of  the  noble  and  good,  his  reading 
should  largely  consist  of  literature  which  has 
stood  the  test  of  time,  keeping  at  a  distance  all 
printed  matter  of  a  poor  or  ephemeral  nature. 
He  should  not  sit  in  crowded  assemblies  amongst 
all  kinds  and  conditions  of  people,  but  resort  as 
far  as  possible  to  contact  with  nature.  These 
strict  Instructions  may  seem  unnatural,  selfish  and 
unsociable,  and  so  they  would  be  if  ended  in  them- 
selves and  made  permanent,  but  some  are  only 


194  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

temporary  and  necessary  during  the  student's  ap- 
prenticeship for  the  first  year  or  two,  until  he  has 
developed  sensitiveness  to  the  subtle  forces  of  life. 
When  once  he  has  acquired  conscious  realization 
of  these  he  will  then  be  able  to  mix  in  the  com- 
pany of  all.  Men  very  rightly  advocate  the  train- 
ing of  the  outer  senses,  but  these  will  not  bring 
lasting  happiness.  It  is  only  by  awakening  the 
inner  eye,  the  inner  ear,  and  the  inner  touch,  that 
man  can  hope  to  reach  his  goal. 

True  spiritual  development  never  unfits  a  man 
or  woman  for  the  company  of  others.  It  is  alto- 
gether a  spurious  spirituality  which  makes  one 
keep  the  isolation  of  a  monastery  or  a  nunnery,  or 
leads  one  to  hide  within  the  four  walls  of  his  own 
home.  It  is  a  sad  state  of  affairs  when  men  for- 
get the  end  and  lose  themselves  in  the  means.  The 
end  of  soul  cultivation  should  be  the  good  of 
humanity,  and  the  attainment  of  one's  own  happi- 
ness. All  the  exercises  and  practices  here  recom- 
mended are  means  to  an  end,  and  that  end  the  de- 
velopment of  sensitiveness  to  spiritual  guidance 
and  instruction.     Lessing  well  says: 

Ne'er  forget  how   easier  far  devout  enthusiasm  is  than   good 

deeds, 
How    soon   our   indolence  contents   itself   with   pious    raptures, 

ignorant  perhaps. 
Of  their  ulterior  end,  that  we  may  be 
Exempted  from  the  toil  of  doing  good. 


THE   CULTURE    OF    THE    SOUL  1 95 

At  first  the  student  may  find  himself  particularly 
sensitive  to  the  Influence  of  those  with  whom  he 
comes  daily  in  contact,  and  this  Indicates  that  care 
should  be  taken,  until  such  time  as  he  has  learned 
fully  to  control  his  being  by  the  development  of 
his  mental  and  spiritual  powers,  otherwise  he  is 
likely  to  be  overborne  by  opposing  Influences. 
Students  should  therefore  treat  themselves  very 
much  as  a  young  and  growing  plant  Is  treated, 
sheltered  from  the  frost  and  the  blasts  of  the 
violent  wind  for  a  time,  but  which,  once  it  Is  firmly 
rooted  and  has  begun  to  grow,  expand  and  flour- 
ish, may  be  transplanted  or  allowed  to  stand  the 
full  blasts  of  the  outer  atmosphere.  Only  those 
who  are  prepared  to  sacrifice  time  and  effort  upon 
themselves  with  the  sole  object  of  learning  how  to 
benefit  others,  can  ever  hope  to  succeed  in  helping 
humanity  into  that  perfection  of  bloom  which  men 
call  beauty,  love,  and  wisdom. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

LAWS  OPERATING  IN  SPIRIT  SPHERES 

The  fundamental  weakness  of  men  who  oppose 
Psychical  Research  from  the  religious  and  poetical 
standpoint,  is  that  they  ^'preempt*'  the  kind  of  fu- 
ture world  in  which  they  will  believe.  They  want 
something  like  a  Platonic  Symposium  for  their 
happiness f  or  they  pretend  to,  though  their  real 
enjoyments  are  a  cocktail  and  a  cigar, — Profes- 
sor Hyslop,  of  Harvard,  U.  S.  A. 

INTRODUCTION. 

THE  author  desires  to  point  out  that  chapters 
eight  and  nine  deal  exclusively  with  the 
laws  operating  in  spirit  spheres,  giving  a 
brief  outline  of  man's  life  after  death.  The  state- 
ments made  regarding  these  states  are  impossible 
for  the  ordinary  reader  to  prove,  unless  he  is  pre- 
pared to  develop  his  soul  faculties  so  that  he  can 
function  on  superphysical  planes.  He  will  be 
able,  however,  to  verify  to  some  extent  the  cor- 
rectness of  these  statements,  when  once  he  finds  a 
suitable  medium,  through  whom  spirit  beings  can 

196 


AB  WOULX»  BE  SEEN 
VIEWEO  r^RQM  THE.   VT"  SPHERE 


EARTH  AND  ITS  SUPER-PHYSICAL  SPHERES. 

In  the  Solar  System  illustration,  only  the  nearest  planets  to  our  Sun  are  shown;  but 
around  every  planet  of  our  system  (and  probably  every  system)  exists  seven  spirit 
spheres,  where  the  inhabitants  of  these  planets  dwell  after  death.  Spirits  of  the 
seventh  sphere  of  a  planet  can  communicate  with  and  visit  the  seventh  sphere  of 
any  planet.  Information  regarding  life  on  other  planets  has  been,  and  is  now  being 
secured,  by  all  occultists  capable  of  communicating  direct  or  indirect  with  spirits  on 
the  seventh  sphere.  Knowledge  of  the  language  used  on  other  planets  is  unnecessary, 
as    thought    transference    is    universal    and    sufficient    for    planetary    spirit    intercourse. 

The  small  illustration  represents  the  earth  and  its  surrounding  spirit  spheres,  with 
a  section  cut  out  to  show  the  interior. 

From  original  plans  by  J.  Hewat  McKenzie. 


197 


THE  EARTH,  VENUS  AND  MARS,  SURROUNDED  BY  THEIR  SPIRIT 

SPHERES. 

The  dotted  lines  represent  super-physical  continents  one  above  another  in  space. 
The  circles  of  Mercury  and  Venus  represent  the  seventh  sphere  around  these  planets. 
The  Sun,  though  marked  in  the  distance,  would  not  be  seen  as  a  physical  object  upon 
the  seventh  or  any  other  super-physical  sphere,   for  it  illuminates  only  physical  matter. 

From  original  plans  by  J.  Hewat  McKenzie. 
198 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  1 99 

express   their  thoughts  clearly,   and  give   an   ac- 
count of  their  lives  and  the  laws  governing  these. 
Communicating  spirits  seem  at  times  to  contradict 
each  other,  hut  this  is  due  to  some  having  an  ex- 
perience limited  to  the  lower  planes,  while  others 
may  be  living  on  the  higher,  where  the  habits  and 
powers  of  the  soul  are  very  different.     One  who 
enters  the  astral  plane  after  death  will  describe 
the   life   there,   quite   ignorant   of  higher  states, 
while    those    who    enter    directly    into    the    third 
sphere  will  be  similarly  unable  to  tell  what  the  life 
of  a  spirit  is  upon  the  astral  plane.    As  an  illustra- 
tion, the  astral  resident  will  speak  of  spirits  weep- 
ing and  of  actual  tears  being  shed,  but  the  third 
sphere   resident  will   claim   that  while   one   may 
grieve  very  much  no  tears  are  ever  shed.     Both 
are  right  regarding  their  own  plane,  but  wrong, 
when  through  lack  of  experience,   they  describe 
either  as  universal  in  spirit  life.    The  former  may 
likewise  say  that  spirits  do  not  fly,  the  latter  that 
they  do,   and  this   variation  of  experience   may 
cause  many  difficulties  to  the  student  starting  in- 
vestigation.    Such  differences  are  not  confined  to 
spirits,  but  are  common  among  men,  for  a  central 
African  will  tell  of  a  life  very  different  from  that 
of  a  United  States  citizen,  and  the  spirit  sphere 
has  diversities  even  more  varied  than  these.  Even 
individuals  who  visit  the  same  country  may  see  it 


200  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 


from  entirely  different  standpoints.  The  mer- 
chant and  artist  from  England,  who  visit  America, 
may  return  with  very  different  accounts  of  Amer- 
ica and  American  life  in  certain  particulars,  al- 
though they  may  agree  on  the  main  features.  The 
fonner  may  travel  through  the  cities  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  latter  spend  his  time  in  the  wilds 
of  nature,  but  even  if  they  both  visit  great  cities 
one  will  naturally  be  drawn  to  the  environment 
of  commerce,  and  the  other  of  art,  and  each  come 
to  different  conclusions  regarding  America  and  its 
people  from  his  Individual  experiences. 

The  author  has  endeavored  to  show  the  condi- 
tions pertaining  to  different  states  in  a  geograph- 
ical table,  and  readers  are  asked  to  read  this  care- 
fully in  order  to  grasp  clearly  the  variety  of  life 
on  each  plane  before  attempting  to  read  the  chap- 
ter on  "Life  after  death."  He  is  quite  aware  that 
such  seemingly  matter-of-fact  details  may  be  an 
offence  and  stumbling  block  to  many  minds,  espe- 
cially to  those  of  idealistic  temperament.  Man's 
ideas  of  physical  and  spiritual  states  are  delusive. 
It  is  purely  a  matter  of  standpoint  as  to  how  these 
seemingly  contrary  states  shall  be  judged,  for  the 
spiritual  world  is  just  as  concrete  a  reality  to 
spirits  as  the  physical  earth  is  a  reality  to  mortals. 
As  a  matter  of  absolute  reality  the  physical  earth 


LAWS    IN   SPIRIT   SPHERES  201 

is  more  unreal  than  the  spirit  world,  and  man  must 
begin  to  readjust  his  attitude  towards  this  fact. 
Other  minds  may  find  the  details  a  help  in  ena- 
bling them  to  picture  the  kind  of  life  experienced 
by  their  friends  who  are  now  functioning  in  the 
spirit  spheres.  The  old  idea  of  heaven  was  a  dead 
level  of  experience  for  the  "good,"  and  another 
level  for  the  "bad,"  but  the  new  conception  pic- 
tures all,  at  various  stages  of  progress,  mostly 
happy  and  contented,  and  never  left  without  help 
and  instruction  when  they  desire  these  at  any 
stage. 

THE  NEW  SUPERPHYSICAL  CONTINENTS. 

While  studying  the  geographical  map  of  spirit 
spheres,  readers  should  hold  continually  in  mind 
that  these  spheres  are  interior  states,  existing  with- 
in the  physical  atmosphere  around  our  earth. 
They  do  not,  therefore,  present  any  barrier  to 
the  sun's  physical  rays.  (See  maps  on  pages  197 
and  198.) 

Psychic  science  is  educating  men  to  regard  the 
physical  world  as  the  outhouse  of  existence,  where 
the  human  spirit  is  most  nearly  dead,  being  buried 
within  matter  too  crude  to  allow  full  manifesta- 
tion of  that  spirit.  Man  must  therefore  learn  to 
adjust  his  consciousness  to  a  realization  of  this 


202 


SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 


fact,  and  to  perceive  that  reality  does  not  lie  in 
the  outer  physical  matter,  either  of  the  earth  or  of 
superphysical  spheres,  but  in  something  within 
himself.  When  once  this  is  realized  his  education 
will  proceed  rapidly,  but  previous  to  this  he  may 
be  regarded  as  one  asleep,  living  in  the  dark  ages 
of  the  senses,  with  whom  it  is  impossible  to  dis- 
cuss reality,  for  it  is  beyond  his  comprehension. 


Descriptive  Table  of  Spirit  Spheres. 


First  Sphere  or  Astral  World. 


Louver.  Middle.  Upper. 

Earth's   distance 300  miles.      550  miles  750  miles. 

*Degree   of    light <  o  to  30°.         30  to  50°.  50  to  70°. 

Soil     .'  Rock.  Shale.  Earth. 

Atmospheric  condi-         Dark  and      Dull   and  Slightly 

tions     J.      humid.  moist.  moist. 

Vegetation    Fungus  Mosses  only.    Indifferent 

only.  shrubs  and 

grass. 

fAnimals    None.  None.  Pet  animals. 

Vices    Gross  Secondary         Thoughtless- 

animalism,    vices.  ness. 

Virtues    Dormant.       A  few  active.  Progressive 

desires. 

Dwellings     Practically    Similar  to         Extremely 

none.  earth.  simple. 

*  Earth  sunlight  is  taken  as  a  standard  measurement  of  100 
degrees. 

fAll  animals  at  death  gravitate  to  their  own  spirit  sphere, 
except  a  few  pets  which  have  a  limited  existence  with  super- 
physical  men  before  returning  to  their  own  natural  plane. 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  203 

Second  sphere. 

Loiver.  Middle.  Upper. 

Earth's  distance 1,000  miles.  1,150  miks.  1,250  miles. 

Degree  of  light 70  to  80°.  80  to  90°.  90  to  99  . 

Vegetation     Elementary  Secondary  Superior 

flowers,  etc.       flowers,  etc.  flowers,  etc 

Animals     Pet  animals  Animals,  Animals, 

and  birds.       birds  and  birds  and 
fish.  fish. 

Characteristics Narrowly  Ultra  Restricted 

religious.         religious.         excellence. 

Third  Sphere. 

The  family  sphere,  commonly  called  the  Sum- 
mer Land,  1,350  miles  from  earth;  light,  100  to 
no  degrees.  Pet  animals  and  birds  are  most 
numerous  on  this  plane.  Flowers  and  fruit  In 
rich  luxuriance;  habitations  Interspersed  with  gar- 
dens; houses  built  In  brick,  and  also  stone.  This 
is  the  principal  sphere  of  children,  where  they  re- 
ceive their  education  on  arriving  from  earth. 

Fourth  Sphere. 

Sometimes  called  the  philosopher's  sphere, 
2,850  miles  from  earth;  light,  no  to  120  degrees; 
pet  animals  and  birds  of  rare  beauty  and  intelli- 
gence, but  fewer  than  on  third  sphere;  Inhabitants 
dwell  together  in  brotherhoods,  devoting  much 
time  to  Intellectual,  artistic,  and  ascetic  pursuits. 
Those   who    reside   here    are   practically   discon- 


204  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

nected  with  affairs  of  earth,  their  interests  being 
devoted  to  spheres  above,  or  in  training  those 
upon  the  third  sphere  to  become  more  capable 
teachers  and  helpers  of  those  below  them. 

Fifth  Sphere, 

The  advanced  intellectual  and  contemplative 
sphere,  5,050  miles  from  earth;  light,  120  to  150 
degrees;  no  animals,  except  birds  of  great  beauty; 
flowers  and  foliage  more  highly  developed  in  form 
and  coloring;  inhabitants  devote  their  time  and 
effort  to  contemplation  and  aspiration,  and  in 
helping  by  instruction  those  upon  the  fourth 
sphere. 

Sixth  Sphere. 

The  love  sphere,  9,450  miles  from  earth;  light, 
150  to  180  degrees;  birds  and  flowers  are  still  to 
be  found,  but  of  a  very  rarefied  nature.  Build- 
ings of  rare  colored  stonework. 

Seventh  Sphere. 

The  Christ  sphere,  18,250  miles  from  earth. 
Here  there  are  to  be  found  neither  birds,  beasts, 
fish,  flowers,  trees,  nor  grass.  The  foundation  of 
the  sphere  is  no  longer  composed  of  earth,  but  is 
crystalline  in  nature.     Here  one  finds  the  streets 


LAWS    IN   SPIRIT    SPHERES  205 

of  gold  and  buildings  of  jasper  so  long  sung  about. 
It  is  so  dazzling  in  brightness,  and  has  an  atmos- 
phere so  rarefied,  that  long  years  must  elapse 
before  man's  soul  is  fitted  to  dwell  there. 


General  Laws  Operating  in  Spirit  Spheres 

FOOD. 

As  man  in  spirit  life  still  occupies  a  body  with 
an  internal  organism,  it  is  only  reasonable  for 
men  on  earth  to  wonder  how  this  body  is  sus- 
tained. Constant  chemical  change  takes  place 
within  the  spirit  body  of  man,  therefore  nourish- 
ment is  necessary  for  its  renewal.  Hunger  and 
thirst  are  never  experienced  except  by  some  of  a 
very  low  order  upon  the  astral  planes,  and  then 
it  is  due  rather  to  mental  than  to  bodily  desire. 
The  sustenance  of  the  body  in  superphysical  states, 
is  derived  from  the  atmosphere  by  inhalation  in 
the  ordinary  act  of  breathing.  There  are  fruits 
w^hich  grow  in  abundance  upon  most  of  the 
spheres,  but  these  are  seldom  partaken  of. 

clothing. 

The  soul  of  man  is  born  into  the  spirit  world 
nude.  There  he  is  clothed  in  garments  prepared 
for  him,  much  in  the  same  way  as  was  done  when 


206  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

he  arrived  as  a  babe  on  earth.  It  is  commonly 
supposed  that  man  "grows"  clothing  upon  his 
body  when  he  enters  spirit  life,  but  this  is  a  fallacy, 
and  the  preparation  of  spirit  clothing  Is  a  most 
interesting  study.  So  far  as  the  author  is  aware 
a  description  of  the  method  of  its  construction  has 
never  before  been  given  to  the  public. 

The  substance  from  which  clothing  Is  manu- 
factured is  extracted  from  the  atmosphere.  This 
fact  need  not  surprise  us,  for  most  of  the  material 
which  men  need  upon  the  earth  Is  supplied  from 
the  atmosphere  by  chemical  action  operating 
through  the  animal  and  plant  life  around  them. 
The  process  and  supply  Is  much  more  rapid  and 
direct  upon  superphyslcal  planes,  where  man's  In- 
telligence Is  more  highly  cultivated.  Skilled  chem- 
ists and  engineers  have  constructed  machines, 
which  may  be  termed  chemical  generators,  which, 
revolving  at  a  high  velocity,  draw  from  the  air 
particles  of  matter  of  various  qualities  and  sub- 
stances, from  which  are  manufactured  articles 
similar  to  cloth,  glass,  bricks,  stone,  wood,  metal, 
etc.  These  machines,  viewed  outwardly,  look 
simple  In  appearance,  but  Internally  are  most  In- 
tricate, and  remind  one  somewhat  of  a  dynamo 
for  generating  electricity.  The  principal  fly-wheel, 
when  at  work.  Is  seen  to  draw  to  itself,  first  a 
foggy  vapor  which  gradually  solidifies  the  closer 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  207 

it  comes,  until  It  actually  contacts  the  wheel,  where 
it  is  caught  and  projected  by  ordinary  mechanical 
laws  into  hoppers  Immediately  below  It.  In  the 
case  of  the  production  of  material  for  the  manu- 
facture of  clothing,  this  is  seen  to  appear  within 
the  atmosphere  immediately  surrounding  the 
w^heel,  in  long  flakes,  having  somewhat  the  appear- 
ance of  cotton-wool,  pure  white  and  extremely  fine. 
These  are  caught  by  projecting  combs,  which  re- 
volve the  reverse  way  of  the  w^heel.  This  fine, 
fibrous  material  is  then  carried  to  the  weaver, 
who,  by  the  assistance  of  machinery,  produces 
cloth  in  various  lengths  and  widths.  Substances 
of  a  coarser  nature  are  also  extracted  and  used 
by  spirits  requiring  garments  of  a  different  order, 
and  such  may  be  subjected  to  dyeing  to  give  va- 
riety of  color.  When  the  cloth  is  completed  by 
weavers  It  is  passed  into  the  hands  of  artists  to 
be  shaped.  The  sight  of  such  operations  banishes 
the  idea  that  spirit  drapery  grows  as  if  by  magic. 
Those  occupied  in  this  work  think  it  the  most  im- 
portant labor  they  can  perform,  and  are  able  here 
for  the  first  time,  perhaps,  to  use  their  highest 
capacities,  for  they  are  no  longer  working  against 
time  and  for  money,  but  find  their  reward  in  work 
well  done,  so  that  when  it  is  completed  they  re- 
joice in  its  excellence. 

A  man  or  woman  entering  spirit  life  is  provided 


208  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

with  a  garment  thought  suitable  for  their  use, 
and  one  likely  to  please  them,  but  later  they  may 
discard  this  and  select  what  they  will.  An  Individ- 
ual usually  selects  a  costume  similar  to  that  which 
he  wore  on  earth,  but  as  spirits  advance  to  higher 
spheres  the  garments  become  less  varied,  and  tend 
to  be  of  a  loose  and  flowing  nature.  On  the  sec- 
ond and  third  spheres,  one  finds  a  great  variety 
in  dress,  for  there  may  be  found  soldiers,  sailors, 
doctors,  judges  and  ministers,  who  are  still  proud 
of  the  profession  they  followed,  and  prefer  to 
continue  to  wear  the  dress  to  which  they  were 
accustomed  while  on  earth.  On  the  fourth  and 
higher  spheres  the  garments  are  less  varied  In 
style  but  more  varied  In  coloring,  and  become 
almost  a  part  of  their  wearer.  These  garments, 
fortunately,  do  not  become  soiled,  but  are  rather 
purified  In  their  nature  and  composition  by  the 
action  of  the  life  force  of  the  spirits  who  wear 
them.  This  permeates  the  whole  garment,  not 
only  keeping  it  pure,  but  also  supplying  a  vitality 
to  It,  which  continually  renews  it  so  that  It  does  not 
perish.  Upon  the  lower  pknes  garments  have 
a  tendency  to  look  dull,  but  upon  the  upper  they 
give  forth  a  fine  lustre  and  become.  In  some  cases, 
dazzling  In  appearance.  This  Influence  of  the 
spirit  extends  to  everything  which  Is  used,  and 
precious  stones  worn  by  advanced  spirits  greatly 


LAWS    IN   SPIRIT    SPHERES  209 

exceed  In  beauty  and  brilliancy  the  same  stones 
worn  by  those  of  a  less  spiritual  order. 

OCCUPATIONS. 

The   question  of  occupation  In   spirit  spheres 
constantly  arises  In  the  mind  of  mortals,  for  many 
fear  that  the  spirit  world  will  bore  them,  and  this 
is  not  surprising  considering  the  limited  vision  of 
that  world  which   has  been    furnished   to   men. 
They  have  a  vague  Idea,  If  the  matter  Is  thought 
of  at  all,  that  after  squeezing  past  St.  Peter,  they 
will  find  themselves  In  a  place  of  unshaded  bril- 
liancy, with  streets  of  gold,   and  an  everlasting 
prayer  meeting  or  Hallelujah  chorus  proceeding. 
The  variety  of  occupations  In  the  spirit  world  Is 
infinitely  greater  than  on  earth,  but  lest  the  reader 
who  has  had  too  much  to  do  on  earth  trembles  at 
the  prospect,  he  may  be  comforted  to  know  that 
he  need  not  work  unless  he  feels  disposed  to  do 
so.     It  can  be  readily  understood  how  much  free- 
dom man  has  In  the  spirit  world  compared  with 
what  he  knows  on  earth,  when  It  Is  remembered 
that  many  of  the  things  which  absorb  nearly  all 
man's  energy  on  earth  are  no  longer  required. 
As  food,  clothing  and  lodgings  are  free.  It  there- 
fore  follows   that  man   will  have   greater   Inde- 
pendence, and  be  able  to  do  with  his  time  what- 
ever he  thinks  fit.    A  new  arrival  Is  allowed  liberty 


210  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

to  do  what  he  wills  with  his  time,  and  to  continue 
this  as  long  as  he  thinks  proper,  for  It  Is  only 
natural  that  one  requires  time  to  adjust  himself 
to  the  new  conditions  of  this  marvellous  state. 
Tramp  life,  however.  Is  the  most  boring  of  occu- 
pations, and  a  few  months  of  this  usually  contents 
the  most  lazy  Individual,  and  he  begins  to  ask  as  a 
favor  for  some  useful  occupation,  or  his  curiosity 
Is  perhaps  aroused  with  regard  to  some  particular 
form  of  life,  and  so  Interested  does  he  become 
that  he  soon  devotes  his  whole  time  to  it.  This 
search  for  knowledge  along  one  branch  or  another 
produces  In  time  a  valuable  member  of  society.  A 
doctor  may  continue  the  search  into  the  origin  and 
cure  of  earthly  disease,  a  chemist  may  study  the 
combinations  of  chemicals  and  their  use,  a  psy- 
chologist the  operation  of  the  mind,  or  one  may 
become  a  nurse,  a  teacher,  astronomer,  explorer, 
botanist,  philanthropist,  musician,  artist,  architect, 
or  inventor,  and  In  any  of  these  professions,  and 
in  many  others,  the  study  not  only  will  advance 
one's  own  happiness,  but  that  of  the  society  in 
which  one  dwells.  All  that  is  discovered  by  the 
Individual  is  gladly  passed  on  to  others,  and  so 
man's  advancement  proceeds  rapidly.  Not  only 
are  there  professions,  but  there  are  trades  to  be 
found,  builders,  joiners,  bricklayers,  painters,  dec- 
orators,   sculptors,    cabinet-makers,    upholsterers, 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  211 

gardeners,  navvies,  etc.;  all  are  required,  each  en- 
gaged in  following  his  trade  quietly,  for  no  sweat- 
ing or  rush  obtains,  each  worker  finding  that  he 
has  just  as  much  time  to  complete  his  labors  as 
enables  him  to  accomplish  these  thoroughly,  and 
to  his  satisfaction.  Tradesmen  are,  however, 
much  less  numerous  than  on  earth,  for  decay  and 
destruction  are  practically  unknown.  The  joy  of 
living  in  spirit  spheres  is  in  work  and  service,  and 
the  man  without  occupation  Is  the  man  who  is 
most  unhappy.  It  is  a  fallacy  to  believe  that  life 
In  these  regions  goes  on  in  a  selfish  fashion,  inde- 
pendent of  the  interested  cooperation  of  others. 
It  is  not  so,  and  life  in  the  spiritual  world  would 
become  stagnant  were  It  not  for  the  active  thought 
and  cooperation  of  all  Its  members,  who  work  in 
harmony  with  established  laws.  There  is  no  God 
sitting  on  a  great  white  throne,  with  Innumerable 
agents  called  "angels,"  conducting  affairs,  but 
there  are  rulers,  spirits  who  were  once  men  and 
women,  who  have  evolved  to  such  positions  en- 
tirely owing  to  the  development  of  their  facul- 
ties along  natural  lines. 

BUILDINGS. 

The  material  which  goes  to  the  construction  of 
a  house  is  neither  quarried  from  the  soil,  nor 
prepared    from    trees,    but   Is    entirely   extracted 


212  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

from  the  atmosphere  by  such  chemical  generators 
as  have  been  ah*eady  described.  These  generators 
are  used  In  the  vicinity  of  sites  where  buildings  are 
being  erected,  as  it  is  found  necessary  to  draw  the 
material  from  the  local  atmosphere.  The  build- 
ings vary  more  or  less  in  each  sphere,  the  material 
becoming  more  and  more  perfect  in  quality  and 
beauty  as  one  rises  to  higher  planes.  Upon  the 
lower  sphere  buildings  are  constructed  of  bricks, 
and  some  of  stone.  The  brick-making  plant  is  just 
as  necessary  as  on  earth,  for  the  matter  is  ex- 
tracted from  the  atmosphere,  carried  to  great 
vats  where  it  is  boiled,  then  transferred  to  the 
drying  chamber,  moulded  into  bricks,  and  laid 
out  In  the  open  air  to  harden,  very  much  as  on 
earth.  To  watch  these  laborers  at  work  is  a 
liberal  education.  They  are  not  covered  with  the 
usual  dust  and  dirt  that  one  finds  on  those  en- 
gaged in  similar  occupations  on  earth,  and  seem 
in  the  happiest  of  moods,  willing  and  interested  In 
all  that  is  going  forward.  These  workers,  though 
possessed  of  no  intellectual  advantages  when  on 
earth,  developed  spiritual  faculties,  which  have 
made  them  in  many  respects  superior  to  those 
living  upon  the  same  sphere. 

Materials  for  wood,  stone,  glass  and  metal 
used  in  the  construction  of  other  parts  of  the 
buildings  are   also  procured  by  means   of  these 


LAWS   IN   SPIRIT    SPHERES  213 

dynamos.  Visiting  a  site  upon  which  It  was  In- 
tended to  build  a  house,  the  construction  was 
shown  to  the  author,  and  In  every  way  seemed 
exactly  similar  to  the  preparations  made  for  build- 
ing a  house  on  earth.  The  red  brick  dwellings 
chosen  by  most  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  third 
sphere  are  In  some  ways  more  conformable  to 
their  taste  than  any  built  of  superior  materials, 
but  the  designs  of  the  houses  are  of  greater  beauty 
than  those  commonly  found  on  earth,  more  time 
being  given  to  this  branch  of  the  work.  Where 
buildings  of  stone  are  used  on  the  third  sphere,  the 
dwellers  are  found  to  be  of  a  colder  and  more 
intellectual  type.  Habitations  are  constructed  on 
every  plane,  except  upon  the  lowest,  where  the 
inhabitants  are  too  lazy  and  degraded  to  build. 
Houses  are  seldom  constructed  specially  for  those 
entering  spirit  states,  this  being  unnecessary,  as  a 
continual  exodus  to  higher  spheres  is  constantly 
taking  place  at  an  equitable  rate.  Slight  adapta- 
tions are  made  to  suit  the  various  tastes  of  new- 
comers, but  if  one  is  unable  to  find  the  kind  of 
house  required.  It  may  be  specially  built.  No 
useless  work  Is  done,  nor  are  there  selfish  beings 
to  require  it,  above  the  first  sphere,  and  on  the 
first  they  are  controlled  by  superior  persons  in 
such  a  matter. 

Temples  of  rare  beauty  are  to  be  found  upon 


214  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

the  third  sphere  and  upwards,  becoming  more  and 
more  perfect  in  their  magnificence  and  beauty,  as 
they  are  found  on  the  fifth,  sixth  and  seventh, 
where  they  are  constructed  of  material  closely  re- 
sembling precious  stones,  from  which  radiates 
light  so  brilliant  in  some  cases  that  they  may  be 
seen  at  a  great  distance.  How  these  are  con- 
structed will  be  explained  later  in  "Life  after 
Death." 

MARRIAGE  IN  THE  SPHERES. 

There  is  no  such  thing  in  spiritual  spheres  as 
marriage,  such  as  we  know  it  on  earth,  but  there 
is  a  union  of  the  sexes  where  a  man  and  woman 
unite  in  a  bond  of  affection,  and  where  the  sex  im- 
pulse plays  an  important  part  and  creates  an  ec- 
stasy which  could  not  be  known  without  such  an 
alliance.  There  is  no  offspring  from  such  a  union, 
unless  one  speaks  of  the  birth  of  noble  thought 
and  action  as  such.  Man  on  earth  often  fails  to 
perceive  the  important  part  sex  impulse  plays  In 
every  department  of  life,  for  he  commonly  sup- 
poses this  instinct  to  be  intended  purely  for  ani- 
mal enjoyment  and  procreation. 

A  conservation  and  wise  control  of  this  energy 
will  produce,  even  on  earth,  extraordinary  powers 
in  those  who  act  as  organizers,  teachers,  or  artists, 
or  in  enabling  one  to  rightly  appreciate  beauty, 


LAWS    IN   SPIRIT    SPHERES  21 5 

art,  music,  and  spiritual  virtues,  far  beyond  the 
man  who  seeks  to  gratify  his  animal  propensities 
to  excess.  An  old  and  favorite  question  with  men 
regarding  these  spiritual  unions  runs  thus,  "If  a 
man  die  and  also  his  three  wives,  which  one  will 
he  have  in  spirit  life?"  Probably  none  of  them, 
for  it  Is  just  likely  they  have  had  enough  of  his 
company,  or  it  may  be  he  is  not  deeply  attached 
to  any  of  them.  Marriage  on  earth  Is  often  merely 
a  matter  of  convenience,  but  where  a  man  is  mar- 
ried to  one  whom  he  deeply  loves,  after  death  they 
will  be  united  in  companionship  In  spiritual 
spheres.  Sexual  relationship  of  the  carnal  kind  is 
not  practised  except  by  the  most  brutal  upon  the 
lowest  spheres  of  the  astral  world,  and  that  for 
only  a  very  brief  period,  as  no  satisfaction  can 
be  got  from  it. 

LANGUAGE. 

Every  language  known  on  earth  is  found  in  the 
spiritual  world,  but  there,  as  here,  the  tendency 
is  for  people  of  the  same  race  to  congregate  to- 
gether. Intercommunication,  however,  takes  place, 
and  that  more  readily  than  on  earth,  for  thought, 
which  Is  universal,  can  be  freely  communicated, 
and  so  language  does  not  create  a  serious  barrier. 
Properly  speaking,  there  are  three  languages  In 
the  spiritual  states — that  of  the  tongue,  of  the 


2l6  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

head,  and  of  the  heart.  The  first  Is  heard  by  the 
ear,  the  second  may  be  termed  telepathy,  and  the 
third  may  be  called  emotion.  When  a  Chinaman 
meets  an  Englishman  they  converse  each  in  his 
own  tongue,  but  the  words  are  interpreted 
telepathically  rather  than  by  the  ear. 

Thought  is  much  more  readily  transferred  on 
spirit  planes  than  on  earth,  for  here,  the  soul  of 
man  is  submerged  in  matter  of  an  extremely  gross 
nature,  whereas  in  spiritual  realms  the  soul 
catches  a  thought  vibration  with  ease.  Converse 
between  two  who  are  able  to  speak  each  other's 
language,  is  much  more  accurate  if  they  are  spirit- 
ually attuned  to  each  other,  and  in  such  cases  lan- 
guage is  hardly  necessary,  the  thoughts  being  more 
distinct  than  ever  words  could  be,  but  where  this 
close  affinity  does  not  exist,  language  is  neces- 
sary, and  where  the  language  is  not  understood  an 
interpreter  is  required.  The  language  of  the 
heart  is  best  understood  by  those  of  the  Love 
Sphere.  On  earth  men  taste  something  of  it  by 
that  warmth  of  atmosphere  which  can  be  pro- 
duced by  those  who  possess  an  extremely  sym- 
pathetic and  affectionate  nature. 

ANIMALS. 

All  animals  living  in  spirit  spheres  have  pre- 
viously existed  on  earth.     Such  have  been  pets, 


LAWS   IN   SPIRIT   SPHERES  217 

and  love  alone  draws  them  into  the  spiritual  planes 
where  humans  dwell,  otherwise  they  would  gravi- 
tate to  the  astral  plane  allotted  to  the  souls  of 
animals,  immediately  below  the  astral  plane. 
These  animals  are  chiefly  dogs,  cats,  horses  and 
birds,  and  are  found  upon  the  upper  regions  of  the 
astral  planes,  and  all  the  other  planes  up  to  the 
fourth.  Birds  of  rare  beauty  exist  on  the  fifth 
and  sixth,  but  these  are  no  longer  earthly  in  ap- 
pearance, but  creatures  that  have  evolved  to  such 
a  perfection  that  they  appear  more  like  jewelled 
ornaments.  Pet  animals  are  frequently  helped  to 
rise  from  one  sphere  to  another  by  the  love  of 
their  masters  and  mistresses,  but  there  always 
comes  a  time  when  the  latter,  if  they  wish  to 
progress,  must  drop  their  pets,  and  unless  these 
creatures  are  adopted  by  others  they  must  in- 
evitably return  to  their  own  sphere.  It  is  claimed 
by  some  occultists,  that  these  animals  derive  a 
great  benefit  from  such  experiences,  and  that  later 
they  are  reincarnated  upon  earth  as  evolved  ani- 
mals, or  even  human  beings,  but  this  the  author 
neither  accepts  nor  rejects,  having  no  satisfactory 
evidence  that  this  is  the  case.  It  is  upon  the  third 
sphere  that  the  largest  number  of  these  favored 
creatures  are  to  be  found.  On  the  fourth  sphere 
birds  begin  to  change  their  outer  covering,  such  as 
we  know  on  earth,  but  are  provided  with  coats 


21  8  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

somewhat  similar  to  a  refined  plush,  and  possess 
translucent  bodies.  Dogs  and  cats  are  found  simi- 
larly beautified,  having  become  so  refined  that  a 
considerable  radiance  issues  from  their  bodies. 
Fish  of  great  variety  are  found  in  the  rivers  and 
ponds,  many  flashing  rainbow  tints  as  they  dart 
about  within  the  crystal  waters. 

FLOWERS. 

Vegetation  begins  upon  the  upper  astral  plane, 
and  ceases  on  the  sixth  sphere,  the  darkness  of  the 
lower  and  middle  astral  plane  making  it  impos- 
sible for  vegetation  to  grow,  while  the  seventh 
sphere  is  composed  of  a  substance  so  crystalline  in 
its  nature  that  no  form  of  vegetation  can  there 
take  root.  Flowers  make  their  appearance  on  the 
second  sphere,  and  grow  in  ever  increasing  beauty 
of  form  and  coloring  up  to  the  sixth  sphere.  It 
can  be  understood  how  greatly  superior  the  vege- 
tation must  be  and  how  perfect  the  bloom  of 
plants  growing  in  an  atmosphere  highly  charged 
electrically,  free  from  all  winds,  and  constantly 
stimulated  with  brilliant  light,  where  no  frosts  or 
rapid  changes  in  the  atmosphere  occur,  and  where 
neither  worm  nor  maggot  finds  existence.  No 
form  of  vegetation  is  propagated  by  seed,  but 
is  brought  into  being  by  the  action  of  the  mind 
upon  certain  states  of  the  soil.     Plants  may  be 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  219 

transferred  from  one  position  to  another  by  being 
carefully  transplanted  with  portions  of  the  soil 
around  the  roots.  All  plants  are  treated  with  as 
much  tenderness  and  care  as  one  might  show 
towards  a  child,  and  are  greatly  loved  and  most 
carefully  preserved.  As  one  enters  a  garden  of 
flowers  the  blossoms  turn  towards  the  visitor,  so 
sensitive  are  they  to  the  influence  of  spiritual  be- 
ings, and  when  approached  they  slightly  extend 
themselves  on  their  stalks  and  emit  sweet  odors 
when  touched.  There  is  a  marked  difference  be- 
tween the  attitude  of  flowers  to  certain  individuals, 
for  to  some  they  seem  to  respond  with  joy,  while 
from  others  they  apparently  turn  away.  It  is  un- 
usual for  anyone  to  pluck  flowers,  and  those  which 
are  commonly  seen  by  the  clairvoyant  decorating 
the  forms  of  spirit  children,  are  quite  artificial  in 
their  nature.  A  flower,  when  it  grows  to  ma- 
turity, has  within  it  a  rejuvenating  principle  and 
continues  to  bloom  as  an  everlasting  ornament. 
This  is  doubtless  somewhat  puzzling  to  the  reader, 
who  naturally  supposes  that  these  plants  will  rise 
into  beauty  at  one  season  of  the  year,  bloom  for 
a  period,  and  gradually  decay.  This  does  not 
happen,  for  there  are  no  seasons  of  summer  and 
winter,  and  there  is  no  decay  to  be  seen  anywhere. 
The  trees  are  just  as  carefully  treated  as  the 
flowers,  and  no  pruning  of  any  kind  is  ever  at- 


220  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

tempted.  It  Is  difficult  for  the  mortal  to  conceive 
the  natural  and  rare  beauty  of  the  vegetation  of 
spirit  spheres,  as  It  has  so  often  been  pictured  in 
a  kind  of  frozen  rigidity,  the  very  opposite  of  the 
reality. 

REJUVENATION. 

The  ^'elixir  of  life"  was  supposed  by  the  an- 
cients to  bring  everlasting  youth  to  the  Individual 
who  could  obtain  and  drink  it.  Beyond  death, 
the  ancient  dream  is  realized,  for  one  in  spirit 
spheres  who  reaches  maturity  continues  to  live  on 
at  that  age.  With  those  who  die  on  earth  at  an 
advanced  age  the  matter  is  somewhat  different, 
for  an  aged  man  passes  Into  the  spirit  world  aged 
In  appearance.  In  such  a  case  they  may  remain 
outwardly  as  nature  has  made  them  for  some  con- 
siderable time  after  death,  but  with  energies  fresh 
and  vigorous,  for  the  soul  knows  no  decrepit  age. 
The  aged  appearance  is  retained  specially  by  those 
who  wait  for  the  coming  of  another  from  earth, 
and  upon  the  arrival  of  such  a  friend  they  can  then 
decide  as  to  what  appearance  they  wish  to  present. 
The  speed  with  which  rejuvenation  Is  accom- 
plished differs,  but  generally  speaking  Is  some- 
what similar  to  growth  on  earth.  Commonly  one 
appears  younger  Immediately  after  death,  as  the 
anxieties  and  worries  of  the  earth  sphere  are  no 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  221 

longer  known.  Where  a  man  dies,  say  at  seventy, 
he  may  change  his  appearance  to  about  fifty  in  ten 
years  by  a  direct  effort  of  will.  Beyond  this  it 
will  take  about  the  same  time  to  rejuvenate  as  it 
did  to  become  aged,  that  is,  the  old  man,  who  now 
looks  jRfty,  will  appear  as  forty  in  ten  years'  time, 
and  he  may  go  back  gradually  to  the  appearance 
of  one  at  twenty-five  with  a  further  fifteen  years' 
effort,  and  there  he  may  remain.  There  is  a  popu- 
lar idea  among  psychic  students  that  a  spirit  may 
make  himself  appear  any  age  he  likes,  but  this  is 
not  so.  He  may,  however,  project  a  thought  form 
as  a  picture  of  himself  for  the  clairvoyant  to  see, 
but  he  will  be  unable  to  change  his  own  soul  in 
such  a  manner. 

TRAVEL. 

The  usual  method  of  movement  in  the  spirit 
spheres  is  by  means  of  walking,  but  w^here  one  is 
anxious  to  move  rapidly,  he  may  float  lightly 
within  a  foot  of  the  ground,  or,  less  commonly, 
rise  higher  in  the  atmosphere  above  such  obstacles 
as  houses,  trees,  etc.  An  effort  of  will  is  necessary 
to  move  in  this  way,  and  some  are  timid  of  rising 
to  a  height,  for  many  years  after  their  arrival. 
This,  of  course,  applies  more  to  the  third  sphere, 
where  flying  is  first  practised  by  the  mortals  who 
have  recently  left  earth.     In  higher  spheres  the 


222  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

practice  Is  much  more  common  and  easy.  On  the 
first  and  second  spheres  walking  Is  the  common 
method  of  progression,  the  body  being  too  heavy 
for  flight,  but  the  Inhabitants  may  be  helped  to 
fly  by  superior  guides.  Where  one  has  an  Im- 
portant visit  to  make,  requiring  transference  sud- 
denly and  with  speed,  this  may  be  done  through 
space  with  the  rapidity  of  lightning.  Such  sudden 
transits,  however,  from  one  point  to  another,  are 
limited  to  those  who  have  Important  work  to  per- 
form, as  the  power  expended  is  great,  and  It  Is 
the  desire  of  the  higher  powers  that  this  energy 
should  be  used  with  economy.  This  Information 
comes  rather  as  a  surprise,  for  it  Is  commonly  sup- 
posed that  such  power  is  unlimited,  and  that  It 
may  be  freely  used  for  the  transference  of  a  spirit 
from  one  place  to  another,  but  such,  the  author  Is 
led  to  understand,  is  not  the  case.  These  rapid 
visits  from  one  position  to  another  are  also  only 
possible  where  one  has  previously  visited  the  goal 
he  wishes  to  reach,  unless  he  is  accompanied  by 
someone  who  has  already  made  the  journey,  who 
can  make  a  link  between  him  and  his  destination. 

TIME  AND  SPACE. 

It  is  a  fallacy  to  suppose  that  time  and  space 
cease  to  exist  in  spirit  realms,  at  least  so  far  as 
the  seven  spheres  immediately  around  the  earth 


LAWS    IN   SPIRIT   SPHERES  223 

are  concerned.     Space  most  certainly  exists,  and 
so  there  must  also  be  time.     Time  is  difficult  to 
reckon  in  spirit  life,  as  it  is  of  so  little  importance 
in  comparison  with  development,  for  a  spirit  is 
only  judged  to  have  wasted  time  if  he  has  not 
evolved.     Day  and  night  do  not  mark  the  flight 
of  time,   for  there  is  no  such  division,   and  the 
growth  of  the  soul  is  the  principal  time-piece  of 
spirit  life.     One  is  usually  occupied  in  work  of  so 
interesting  a  nature  that  the  passage  of  time  goes 
unnoticed.    When  one  puts  the  question  to  a  spirit, 
"How  long  have  you  been  here?"  or  "How  long 
is  it  since  you  left  earth?"  he  is  usually  incapable 
of  answering  without  reference  to  certain  records 
which  he  must  search,  and  this  greatly  surprises 
the  questioning  mortal.     Mr.  A.  may  have  lived 
in  spirit  spheres  for  ten  years,  and  to  him  it  may 
seem  hke  a  hundred,  while  to  Mr.  B.,  who  has 
been  in  spirit  spheres  for  a  hundred  years,  it  may 
seem  as  but  ten.     The  difference  is  accounted  for 
by  the  fact  that  Mr.  A.  is  perhaps  anxiously  wait- 
ing for  his  beloved  wife  or  child  to  arrive  from 
earth,  or  is  failing  to  occupy  his  time  profitably, 
while  Mr.  B.  is  so  deeply  interested  in  his  work 
that  the  passage  of  time  goes  unmarked.    Similar 
experiences  are  known  to  men  on  earth,  who  be- 
come  unconscious   of   the   passage   of  time   until 
hunger,  weariness,  or  darkness  overtake  them. 


224  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

We  live  in  deeds,  not  years;  in  thoughts,  not  breaths; 
In  feelings,  not  in  figures  on  a  dial. 
We  should  count  time  by  heart-throbs. 

He  most  lives, 
Who  thinks  most — feels  the  noblest — acts  the  best. 

Distances  are  of  little  interest  to  one  who  is  able 
to  travel  rapidly  and  easily  through  space,  there- 
fore mileage  is  never  referred  to,  though  it  ac- 
tually exists. 

RELIGIONS. 

In  the  astral  world  all  aspects  of  religions,  good 
and  bad,  are  to  be  found,  but  beyond  the  second 
sphere  there  is  a  tendency  on  the  part  of  all,  to 
hold  one  universal  kind  of  religion,  which  might 
be  termed  the  "Science  of  Right  Living."  In  the 
spiritual  spheres  are  to  be  found  people  of  every 
race,  creed,  and  color,  but  the  narrow  conceptions 
which  they  knew  on  earth  are  quickly  lost.  ^  Re- 
ligious bigotry  is  the  most  vicious  of  sins  to  eradi- 
cate, and  it  is  easier  to  redeem  men  from  almost 
any  other  sin  than  this  conception  that  God  speaks 
through  one  religion  alone."^  Upon  the  lowest 
spheres  of  the  astral  world  are  to  be  found  men 
of  the  time  of  the  Spanish  Inquisition,  still  intoler- 
antly seeking  to  force  others  into  their  belief,  and 
there,  some  of  them  are  likely  to  remain  for  hun- 
dreds of  years  yet,  before  they  rise  to  a  fuller 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT    SPHERES  225 

knowledge  of  truth,  love  and  justice.  Each  In- 
dividual is  naturally  permitted  to  worship  as  he 
thinks  fit,  and  gravitates  to  those  similarly  Inten- 
tloned,  but  after  passing  beyond  the  second  sphere, 
spirits  retain  very  little  of  any  exclusive  faith  Into 
which  they  were  born,  being  able  to  perceive  that 
they  are  children  of  one  origin,  sustained  by  the 
same  Power,  and  blessed  with  the  same  nature. 
(  Upon  the  lower  degree  of  the  second  sphere  is 
to  be  found  the  Paradise  of  the  churches,  where 
every  denomination  is  congregated  in  separate 
communities.  )  There,  one  finds  a  kind  of  con- 
tinual Sabbath,  where  church-going  is  the  chief 
occupation,  but  the  members  quickly  learn  to  rise 
beyond  their  narrow  conceptions,  and  move  on  to 
a  fuller  understanding  of  the  laws  of  life.  The 
prophets  and  saviors  of  every  religion  are  to  be 
found  dwelling  upon  the  highest  spheres,  har- 
moniously cooperating  with  each  other  for  the 
welfare  of  the  human  race. 

TRANSITION  FROM  SPHERE  TO  SPHERE. 

This  IS  a  most  Interesting  phenomenon  of  spirit 
life,  easy  to  understand  if  we  keep  in  mind  the 
fact  that  man  has  a  soul  composed  of  several  en- 
velopes or  bodies.  The  grossest  of  these,  which 
is  commonly  called  the  astral,  is  the  body  which 
man  uses  when  he  enters  into  the  astral  world 


226  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

called  the  first  sphere.  After  dwelling  upon  this 
sphere  for  some  time,  the  spirit  begins  to  act  as 
a  kind  of  chemical  purifier  upon  the  astral  body, 
reducing  it  in  density,  atom  by  atom,  by  a  kind 
of  chemical  evaporation,  and,  thus  freed  of  this 
gross  matter,  he  rises  to  a  higher  sphere  in  his 
refined  body.  This  body  is  further  purified  on 
the  sphere  above  and  allows  the  spirit  to  pass  into 
the  third  sphere,  and  so  on.  Such  is  the  transition 
from  one  sphere  to  another.  There  Is  a  theory 
held  by  certain  writers  of  the  Theosophlcal  So- 
ciety that  man  casts  his  astral  body  as  a  kind  of 
shell  as  he  passes  into  the  higher  spheres,  but 
through  many  years  of  practical  investigation  no 
such  evidence  has  ever  been  found.  Such  fairy 
tales  are  unworthy  of  acceptance,  for  they  are 
without  even  the  shadow  of  truth,  and  the  author 
can  only  conclude  that  these  took  their  rise 
through  some  error  of  observation  on  the  part  of 
the  earliest  teachers  of  that  movement,  or  that 
they  used  them  as  bogles  to  frighten  children  away 
from  psychic  investigation.  The  particles  of  the 
astral  body  are  disintegrated  before  ever  the  soul 
can  rise,  and  these  are  scattered  broadcast  and 
reabsorbed  upon  the  astral  plane.  The  soul  In  its 
ascension  from  the  second  to  the  third  sphere, 
or  from  the  third  to  the  fourth,  has  to  be  disin- 


LAWS    IN    SPIRIT   SPHERES  227 

tegrated,  particle  by  particle,  In  exactly  the  same 
manner. 

REINCARNATION. 

This  Is  Indeed  a  most  difficult  problem  and 
one  which  Is  outside  the  scope  of  this  treatise. 
No  satisfactory  evidence  has  yet  been  produced 
which  could  be  called  scientific,  either  for  or 
against  It,  although  there  Is  much  to  be  said  on 
both  sides,  but  this  must  be  left  for  another  oc- 
casion. In  the  meantime  the  author  proceeds  with 
his  Investigations,  seeking  for  some  evidence  for 
or  against  the  doctrine,  and  hopes  to  arrive  at  a 
satisfactory  decision  at  some  early  date. 


CHAPTER  IX 

"Life  After  Death" 

Gradually  we  may  hope  to  attain  some  under- 
standing of  the  nature  of  a  larger^  perhaps  ethe- 
rial  existence,  and  of  the  conditions  regulating  in- 
tercourse, across  the  chasm,  ^  A  body  of  respon- 
sible investigators  has  even  now  landed  on  the 
treacherous  but  promising  shores  of  a  new  con- 
tinent.— Sir  Oliver  Lodge,  Presidential  Address 
before  the  British  Association,  19 13. 

AN  earnest  attempt  has  been  made  to  de- 
scribe in  simple  language  that  part  of  man 
which  is  called  the  "soul,"  defining  how  it 
operates  within  the  physical  body  during  life,  and 
how  it  departs  at  death.  A  descriptive  table  of 
the  first  sev^en  spheres  has  been  provided  on  pp. 
202,  203,  capable  of  being  understood  by  every- 
one, with  two  maps  showing  the  geographical  po- 
sition of  the  spirit  world  in  its  relation  to 
the  earth.  With  anything  beyond  these  seven 
spheres  the  author  does  not  attempt  to  deal. 
That  there  are  spiritual  spheres  beyond,  is  un- 

228 


"life  after  death**  229 

doubted,  but  It  Is  enough  at  the  present  moment 
to  discuss  that  playground  of  man's  soul  where 
he  will  function  for  at  least  some  thousands  of 
years  before  passing  Into  a  more  perfect  life,  of 
which  very  little  can  be  grasped  by  human  un- 
derstanding. 

After  perusing  the  descriptive  table  of  general 
laws  operating  In  these  spirit  spheres,  the  reader 
may  welcome  a  fuller  account  of  man's  life  after 
death.  There  has  been  an  unfortunate  tendency 
on  the  part  of  many  writers  In  the  past  to  explain 
man's  superphyslcal  existence.  In  mystical  and  sym- 
bolic terms,  with  the  result  that  people  of  a  prac- 
tical mind  have  been  quite  Incapable  of  under- 
standing such  writings,  which  have  often  puzzled 
even  those  of  a  poetic  or  mystical  nature.  Many 
of  the  following  glimpses  of  superphyslcal  states 
record  actual  facts  which  have  been  related  by 
spirits  possessing  minds  of  a  scientific  bent,  while  j 
others  have  been  witnessed  by  the  author  while 
functioning  outside  his  physical  body. 

It  should  be  understood  that  the  structure  of         i. 
man's  post-mortem  home  Is  composed  of  matter  \ 

no  less  solid  than  Is  this  earth,  with  Its  mountains 
and  streams,  Its  cities  and  plains.  To  the  ordi- 
nary mind  of  man  this  sounds  Impossible,  especially 
when  he  Is  told  that  these  great  superphyslcal  con- 
tinents whirl  In  space  between  himself  and  the  sun. 


230  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

Fortunately,  scientific  minds  to-day  can  very  well 
grasp  such  a  possibility,  and  the  ordinary  man 
need  no  longer  stumble  over  it,  for  surely  it  is  no 
more  difficult  to  accept  than  was  the  statement 
made  to  man's  ancestors  that  this  great  physical 
globe  rests  upon  nothing,  but  continually  whirls  in 
space.  That  man's  spiritual  home,  after  all  the 
doubt  and  scepticism  exercised  regarding  it,  does 
really  lie  in  the  sky  overhead  is  quite  true,  and 
that  it  should  be  unseen  by  physical  sight,  and 
that  the  sun's  rays  should  penetrate  it,  is  no  more 
wonderful  than  that  X-rays  should  penetrate 
through  so-called  solid  matter.  These  super- 
physical  continents  are  to  man's  physical  senses 
but  as  ghosts,  while  to  the  Inhabitants  of  those 
states  the  so-called  solid  earth  also  appears  in 
ghostly  form.  For  some  this  conception  may  seem 
to  be  too  materialistic,  but  neither  for  the  sceptic 
nor  the  poet  can  the  facts  of  nature  be  altered. 
The  lowest  of  these  vast  planes  of  superphysical 
matter  lies  roughly  about  300  miles  beyond  the 
surface  of  the  earth.  It  would  be  well  to  point 
out  here,  that  between  the  astral  world  and  the 
earth's  surface  lies  the  animal  spirit  sphere,  oc- 
cupying a  space  of  about  seventy-five  miles  In 
depth,  and  lying  Immediately  below  the  astral 
world.  Within  this  belt  dwell  the  souls  of  all 
animals   recently   departed   from  earth,   but  this 


"life  after  death"  231 

interesting  sphere  of  nature  must  be  left  for  con- 
sideration in  some  future  treatise. 

The  astral  plane  is  extremely  gross  and  solid 
in  its  nature  in  comparison  with  the  more  distant 
spheres.  The  floor  or  basement  of  this  plane  is 
composed  of  solid  rocky  substance,  honeycombed 
with  deep  gorges  and  chasms,  in  which  are  to  be 
found  degraded  human  beings  who  once  dwelt  on 
earth.  In  ancient  days,  man  divided  the  spiritual 
world  into  three  parts,  hell,  purgatory  and  heaven, 
but  these  divisions  will  no  longer  serve  to  explain 
superphysical  states  or  spheres  to  the  twentieth 
century  mind.  By  reference  to  the  maps  on  pages 
197  and  198,  one  will  be  able  to  perceive  that 
there  are  seven  distinct  spheres,  each  quite  sepa- 
rate from  the  other.  Man  at  death  enters  into  one 
of  these,  and  continues  to  dwell  there,  passing 
from  the  lower  to  the  higher  by  slow,  gradual 
ev^olution,  taking  some  thousands  of  years  in  the 
process.  Around  each  planet  a  similar  world 
exists,  on  which  the  dwellers  pass  through  a  like 
education.  The  spiritual  worlds  of  each  of  the^^ 
planets  unite  at  the  seventh  sphere,  so  that  com- 
munication can  easily  take  place  between  residents^ 
of  one  planet  and  another  upon  the  seventh, 
sphere.  Some  considerable  amount  of  trouble 
has  been  taken  by  the  author,  working  in  conjunc- 
tion with  several  eminent  scientists  in  the  post- 


232  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

mortem  state,  to  arrive  at  the  approximate  depth 
of  the  various  belts  of  the  spirit  spheres  and  their 
distances  from  earth,  but  it  must  be  understood 
that  these  are  given  as  approximate  measurements 
only,  and  future  investigations  may  lead  to  a  more 
accurate  scale  being  supplied.  The  atmospheres 
of  these  various  planes  vary  in  density,  the 
heaviest  being  that  of  the  astral  plane,  called  the 
first  sphere,  while  the  most  refined  is  that  of  the 
seventh.  The  substances  or  superphysical  earths 
of  these  spheres  also  vary  in  density,  that  which 
is  most  gross  or  solid,  judging  from  this  plane  of 
matter,  being  that  of  the  first  sphere,  and  the  most 
refined  that  of  the  seventh.  Looked  at  from  the 
seventh  sphere,  earth  matter  appears  but  as  vapor, 
while  the  matter  of  that  sphere  is  to  its  inhabitants 
most  real. 

The  seven  spirit  bodies  of  man,  called  by  the 
author  "the  soul,"  are  each  adapted  to  dwell  upon 
one  of  each  of  the  seven  spheres;  the  first  or  outer 
soul,  called  the  astral  body,  being  that  used  upon 
the  first  sphere  or  astral  plane  immediately  after 
death.  In  course  of  time,  by  a  purification  of  that 
body  through  the  education  of  the  spirit  acting 
upon  the  soul,  it  rises  to  a  higher  plane,  the  second 
sphere,  and  there  continues  to  dwell  for  some  time 
in  its  second  soul  body.  There  its  evolution  pro- 
ceeds, the  grosser  particles  of  matter  being  refined 


"life  after  death"  233 

and  the  soul  purified  at  each  stage.  It  must  not  be 
understood,  however,  that  these  bodies  are  cast  off 
like  shells  or  carcases,  such  as  men  throw  off  at 
death  on  the  physical  plane,  for  each  of  the  bodies 
within  the  soul  is  purified  by  chemical  action, 
atom  by  atom  being  disintegrated,  and  nothing 
such  as  a  shell  or  a  husk  is  left  behind  man  when 
he  passes  to  higher  spheres,  as  claimed  by  some, 
as  his  coarser  spirit  body,  or  soul,  is  disintegrated 
and  reabsorbed  upon  that  plane  on  which  the  body 
has  functioned. 

The  matter  which  goes  to  compose  the  spiritual 
world  takes  its  rise  from  the  physical  earth,  as- 
cending continually  day  and  night  in  electrical 
streams  of  unseen  essences.  These  essences  are 
produced  by  chemical  action,  and  are  commonly 
referred  to  as  "decomposition"  or  "decay,"  the 
coarser  substances  falling  as  dust  upon  the  earth, 
while  the  more  refined  particles  rise  in  microscopic 
atoms  drawn  by  electrical  currents,  which  con- 
tinually ascend  from  earth  up  through  the  various 
spirit  spheres.  As  these  atoms  rise,  they  burst 
into  numerous  particles,  each  of  these  again  dis- 
integrating as  they  further  ascend,  until  they  hav^e 
reached  a  refinement  which  is  termed  spiritual. 
The  atoms  are  yet  of  various  grades  of  refine- 
ment, and  as  they  ascend,  the  grossest  of  these  ad- 
here to  the  first  sphere,  the  finer  passing  on  to 


234  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  second  and  third,  and  so  on  to  the  seventh, 
each  collecting  Its  particular  grade  of  matter  as  it 
ascends.     Practically  these  spheres  act  as  sieves, 
the  coarser  mesh  being  that  of  the  first  sphere 
which  catches  only  the  grosser  particles,  allowing 
the  more  refined  to  pass  through  and  on  to  the 
sieves  above,  the  finest  being  that  of  the  seventh 
sphere.     If  one  had  sight  sufficiently  developed 
to  see  the  decomposing  process  going  on  within 
the  physical  substances  of  earth,  a  living  chemical 
flame  would  be  perceived  burning  within  every 
article,  both  organic  and  inorganic,  for  every  sub- 
stance gives  forth  atoms  of  its  own  particular  na- 
ture, which  ascend  and  have  their  place  In  similar 
substances  on  spiritual  spheres.     It  may  be  good 
to  remember,  when  one  sees  precious  articles  grad- 
ually perishing,  that  these  are  going  to  the  build- 
ing of  a  future  home.    Millions  of  tons  of  matter 
are  thus  ceaselessly  passing  from  earth  to  heaven, 
and  forming  vast  continents  in  space.     The  es- 
sences condense  Into  solid  masses  of  substance,  and 
float  in  space  by  the  operation  of  similar  laws  to 
those  which  govern  our  physical  planets,  those  of 
centripetal  and  centrifugal  attraction  and  repul- 
sion, which  are  purely  magnetic  forces.     These 
celestial  continents  are  built  upon  foundations  no 
less  solid  than  Is  the  earth,  and  It  must  not  be 
thought  that  they  are  floating  like  clouds  on  a 


"life  after  death"  235 

summer  sky,  without  anchorage  of  any  kind.  All 
have  permanent  places  fixed  firm  and  sure,  both 
In  relation  to  each  other  and  to  the  earth,  so 
that  explorers  from  earth  may  In  future  be  able  to 
visit  these  new  shores  as  men  have  sought  new 
earthly  continents,  and  return  with  accurate  and 
minute  details  of  their  geographical  situation, 
giving  their  latitude  and  longitude,  and  build  up 
such  an  accurate  map  of  the  heavens  that  the 
ciwellers  on  earth  may  know  exactly  where  their 
departed  friends  and  relatives  reside.  Here  Is 
a  new  form  of  adventure  for  the  rising  generation, 
more  exciting  than  the  wild  adventures  of  Colum- 
bus or  Cook,  especially  now^  that  men  have  so 
nearly  completed  the  geographical  survey  of  the 
physical  globe.  This  Is  no  fairy-tale  or  allegory, 
but  a  common-sense  proposition  to  men  of  the 
future,  men  who  will  have  to  fit  themselves  by 
many  years  of  training  to  understand  some  of  the 
subtle  laws  which  will  enable  them  to  navigate 
the  unknown  currents  which  sweep  between  these 
continents  in  space,  and  by  such  labor  render  a 
service  of  incalculable  value  to  humanity.  It  must 
be  understood  that  these  countries  in  space,  which 
to-day  rise  Immediately  above  England,  will  be 
there  to-morrow;  they  were  In  a  similar  situation 
thousands  of  years  ago,  and  there  they  will  be 
thousands  of  years  hence,  for  they  are  interlocked 


236  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

with  the  earth,  and  revolved  through  space  to- 
gether. 

Shght  displacements  sometimes  occur  upon  the 
lowest  degree,  or  rocky  basement  of  the  astral 
world,  and  from  such  movements  great  earth- 
quakes take  place  within  Its  solid  foundations. 
Such  a  disturbance  recently  happened  at  the  out- 
break of  the  present  European  War,  and  con- 
tinued for  some  months  until  an  equilibrium  was 
brought  about.  This  disturbance  was  entirely  due 
to  powerful  emotions  in  the  minds  of  men  and 
women  on  earth,  which  caused  the  superphysical 
stratas  to  vibrate,  producing  great  rents  and  fis- 
sures, which  was  accompanied  by  thunderous 
noises,  greatly  perturbing  the  Ignorant  denizens 
who  dwell  within  the  gorges  of  this  rocky  region. 
Such  seismic  disturbances  are  temporally,  as  in  the 
case  referred  to,  where  the  sudden  and  violent 
emotion  ceased  a  few  months  after  war  started, 
and  allowed  the  superphysical  sphere  gradually  to 
recover  Its  equilibrium.  Here  we  have  a  strange 
demonstration  of  the  power  of  mind  over  matter, 
and  though  that  matter  Is  of  a  superphysical  na- 
ture, It  is  none  the  less  real. 

Man  at  death  rises  by  a  law  of  attraction  to  his 
appropriate  plane,  usually  that  of  the  second  or 
third  sphere.  If  the  reader  will  refer  to  the  dia- 
gram of  the  spheres  on  pages  197-8,  he  will  be  able 


"HFE   AFTER   DEATH'^  237 

to  follow  with  understanding  the  size  and  position 
of  these  with  their  varying  degrees.  Between 
each  sphere  there  exists  a  distinct  division.  The 
first  and  second  spheres  the  author  has  divided 
into  three  degrees,  but  these  degrees  are  purely 
artificial,  and  are  simply  used  for  convenience  in 
describing  the  different  forms  of  life  found  upon 
the  lower,  middle,  and  upper  degrees  of  the  first 
and  second  spheres. 

Regarding  the  inhabitants  of  these  seven 
spheres,  it  should  be  remembered  that  all  have 
once  been  human  beings,  have  lived  upon  earth, 
and  have  passed  through  the  change  called  death. 
Within  these  seven  atmospheres  around  the  earth 
no  angel,  god,  or  devil  is  to  be  found,  such  as  are 
pictured  In  Oriental  scriptures.  Something  much 
more  natural  and  Infinitely  more  Interesting  exists, 
and  that  Is,  the  spirits  of  men  and  women  on  their 
way  to  perfection.  Nor  are  there  to  be  found  In 
these  realms  strange  and  wonderful  beasts,  with 
seven  eyes,  six  wings,  three  heads  or  nine  tails, 
such  as  have  been  described  by  many  who  have 
professed  to  reveal  the  denizens  of  heaven  and 
hell. 

The  nearest  approach  to  a  devil  anywhere  to 
be  seen  Is  the  degraded  man  or  woman  on  the  low- 
est plane,  and  the  nearest  approach  to  an  angel 
is  seen  in  the  highly  developed  human  being  on 


238  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  seventh  sphere.  There  is  no  man-made  God 
sitting  on  a  big  white  throne  judging  the  people, 
but  an  Unseen  Power,  which  directs  with  certainty 
the  most  rebellious  sinner  into  the  path  of  perfec- 
tion and  holiness,  and  which  affords  the  good  a 
continuous  and  unfolding  happiness. 

THE  ASTRAL  WORLD. 

A  man  at  death,  who  has  lived  a  worthy  life, 
should  rise  by  a  law  of  his  being  into  the  third 
sphere,  but  only  a  limited  number  arrive  there, 
the  majority,  with  less  perfection,  remaining  upon 
the  first  and  second  spheres.  The  worst  of  hu- 
mans, at  death,  gravitate  to  the  lowest  astral 
plane,  where  conditions  are  most  disagreeable. 
There  the  atmosphere  Is  dark  and  foetid,  and  the 
inhabitants  dwell  in  rocky  gorges,  made  intensely 
unpleasant  by  the  emanations  from  their  bodies 
and  by  their  degraded  practices.  These  gorges 
vary  in  width  and  depth,  but  they  usually  meas- 
ure a  few  miles  in  width,  and  many  hundreds  of 
feet  in  depth.  They  are  natural  formations  In  the 
rocky  strata,  the  cliffs  rising  almost  perpendicu- 
larly around  them,  thus  acting  as  a  kind  of  prison, 
from  which  they  cannot  escape  but  by  self-purifi- 
cation. Moisture  drops  continuously  down  the 
sides  of  these  cliffs,  and  lies  in  large  pools  and 
lakes,  but  others  again  are  quite  dry.     No  vege- 


"life  after  death"  239 

tatlon  Is  to  be  found  beyond  clumps  of  fungus  and 
a  quantity  of  dark  mould  which  grows  at  the  base 
of  some  of  these  rocky  gorges. 

With  the  object  of  describing  the  varying 
amount  of  light  upon  the  spiritual  realms  it  will 
be  necessary  to  make  earth  sunlight  a  standard  of 
100  degrees.  Here  upon  the  cliff  heights  of  what 
we  may  call  the  lowest  astral  plane,  there  would 
be  about  10  degrees  of  light,  and  on  the  floor  of 
the  pits  probably  about  5  degrees,  decreasing  to 
total  darkness  in  the  crevices  and  tunnels  which 
run  within  some  of  these  gorges,  to  which  some  of 
the  most  degraded  beings  resort.  The  light  grad- 
ually improves  as  one  rises  from  the  lowest  re- 
gions to  the  upper  astral  regions,  where  it  reaches 
30  degrees.  These  astral  gulfs  Dante  called  hell, 
and  described  in  exaggerated  language.  He  un- 
doubtedly saw  these  by  means  of  soul  projection 
while  travelling  in  the  spiritual  spheres,  but  they 
might  more  fitly  be  named  nature's  reformatories. 
Nowhere  are  fiery  furnaces  to  be  found,  but  mag- 
netic fires  which  burn  within  the  souls  of  every 
living  being  were  doubtless  seen  by  Dante  clair- 
voyantly,  who  imagined  them  to  be  torturing  fires 
of  God.  There  are  also  certain  electrical  dis- 
turbances in  the  atmosphere  which  may  have  led 
him  to  Imagine  fiery  darts  sent  from  heaven  to 
plague  the  wicked  Inhabitants.    Since  Dante's  day 


240  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

man  has  learnt  that  such  uifllction  of  suffering  Is 
purely  artificial  and  valueless  as  a  remedy  for 
sin,  and  that  the  descriptions  of  the  Inferno  were 
but  vivid  imaginations,  partly  due  to  Dante's  re- 
ligious training,  which  colored  all  lie  saw. 

These  natural  pits  have  steps  cut  in  certain 
places  upon  their  rocky  sides  to  enable  the  in- 
habitants to  rise  and  escape  when  thoroughly  sick 
and  tired  of  their  environment  and  of  the  prac- 
tices which  have  kept  them  there.  The  manner 
of  entrance  into  the  lower  spheres  immediately 
after  death  is  partly  natural  and  partly  antificial, 
for  by  a  law  of  attraction  and  gravitation,  souls 
of  a  degraded  order  naturally  enter  these  realms, 
guided  by  spiritual  beings  unseen  by  them,  yet 
none  the  less  capable  of  controlling  their  move- 
ments, who  guide  them  to  that  particular  reform- 
atoi-y  most  suited  to  their  needs.  These  poor 
souls  are  not  all  herded  together,  but.  are  placed 
with  those  of  like  tastes  and  failings,  for  like  at- 
tracts like,  and  they  exercise  upon  each  other  a 
highly  profitable  influence,  which,  though  painful, 
is  corrective.  Within  their  limited  space  they  are 
allowed  considerable  freedom  to  live  their  lives  of 
debauchery  and  vice,  until  they  become  thoroughly 
sickened  of  such  vices,  and  learn  by  bitter  experi- 
ence that  sin  or  wrong  action  brings  its  own  pun- 
ishment.    Once  they  begin  to  realize  this  fact,  re- 


''life  after  death"  241 

morse  seizes  them,  and  they  seek  a  means  of  es- 
cape from  their  horrible  surroundings,  which  can 
only  be  found  by  personal  effort,  by  climbing  the 
rocky  walls  that  surround  the  pit  in  which  they 
dwell.  This  is  no  easy  task,  for  the  rocks  are 
practically  perpendicular  and  the  body  in  which 
they  function  is  so  gross  that  gravitation  affects  it, 
holding  it  down  to  the  base  of  the  pit.  By  strenu- 
ous effort  and  diligent  search  they  at  last  find  a 
particular  spot  from  which  it  is  possible  to  make 
the  ascent,  and  after  many  attempts  reach  the  cliff 
tops.  There  they  are  met  by  capable  guides,  who 
take  them  in  hand  and  help  them  to  reach  happier 
surroundings,  where  they  are  taught  the  laws  of 
life,  and  how  they  may  bring  their  actions  into 
conformity  with  true  happiness.  Spirits  within 
these  spheres  of  correction  are  truly  a  hell,  a  hell 
of  their  own  creation,  where  they  must  remain  un- 
til they  sincerely  desire  a  different  kind  of  life.  In 
the  case  of  some,  long  weary  years  are  required 
to  accomplish  this,  but  in  others,  the  medicine  re- 
ceived quickly  works  a  cure.  The  average  length 
of  time  spent  in  nature's  dark  "house  of  correc- 
tion" varies  considerably,  but,  speaking  generally, 
from  one  to  twenty  years  is  probably  about  the 
average  time  necessary  to  educate  the  spirits,  and 
allow  them  to  pass  on  to  the  second  and  higher 
spheres.     There  are  some,  however,  so  steeped  in 


242  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

ignorance  and  vice,  and  so  dead  to  higher  human 
instincts,  that  they  lie  upon  the  lowest  level  for 
hundreds  and  even  thousands  of  years.  In  these 
worst  cases,  spirits  have  sunk  so  low  that  con- 
sciousness seems  for  the  time  being  dormant,  and 
when  they  ultimately  reach  a  higher  sphere,  they 
look  back,  as  upon  a  painful  sleep,  on  those  long 
years  of  incarceration  in  the  bowels  of  the  astral 
plane. 

The  author  had  brought  to  him  one  unhappy 
soul  who  had  lived  a  most  tyrannical  and  de- 
bauched life  on  earth,  and  whose  name  in  history 
in  the  early  Christian  era  is  notorious.  This  man 
seemed  more  dead  than  alive,  and  when  asked 
why  he  did  not  make  an  effort  to  rouse  himself 
from  his  unhappy  state,  replied,  in  sad  and  hollow 
tones,  *'A11  may  rise,  but  for  me  there  is  no  re- 
demption." This  case  is  most  unusual,  but  not 
without  hope,  or  these  dark  prisons  might  well  be 
termed  the  hell  which  Dante  described,  as  having 
written  over  its  portals,  "Abandon  hope  all  ye 
that  enter  here." 

An  explorer  of  such  regions  was  asked  if  he 
could  tell  approximately  what  numbers  inhabited 
the  lower  spheres  of  the  astral  world,  and  his  reply 
was,  "I  do  not  know,  nor  is  there  anyone  who 
can  tell,  but  the  number  is  considerably  greater 
than  the  population  of  earth.     They  are  to-day, 


"life  after  death"  243 

howev^er,  considerably  smaller  In  numbers  than  In 
past  ages,  when  men  from  earth  were  more  de- 
graded, but  they  are  far  In  excess  of  what  they 
ought  to  be  considering  the  world's  age  and  ad- 
vancement. If  man  was  taught  on  earth  some- 
thing of  his  true  parentage,  that  he  is  indeed  of 
Divine  origin,  and  not  a  crawling  worm,  and  was 
shown  the  possibilities  within  his  soul  to  rise  into 
a  degree  of  perfection,  even  while  on  earth,  these 
gloomy  caverns  w^ould  not  find  so  many  occupants. 
We  have  great  hope  that  Spiritual  Science  will 
stimulate  and  ennoble  men  in  the  near  future,  and 
do  something  towards  limiting  the  numbers  who 
constantly  arrive  here." 

With  the  object  of  supplying  some  accurate  de- 
tails regarding  these  lower  spheres,  a  number  of 
able  spirits  assisted  the  author,  who  was  shown 
scenes  from  spirit  spheres  projected  upon  an  astral 
screen.  These  pictures  consisted  of  actual  occur- 
rences taking  place  at  the  time  they  were  shown, 
and  were  produced  by  the  help  of  many  spirits. 
While  these  were  being  shown,  an  explanation  was 
supplied  by  one  advanced  spirit  from  a  higher 
sphere,  who  has  worked  in  cooperation  for  some 
time  w^Ith  the  author.  It  will  only  be  possible  to 
give  a  very  brief  sketch  of  some  of  these  strange 
incidents  of  the  state  of  man  after  death.  Most 
disagreeable   pictures   were   shown   of  the   rocky 


244  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

astral  spheres,  where  were  congregated  the  souls 
of  men  and  women  lost  in  shame  and  misery,  seek- 
ing satisfaction  In  practices  of  the  most  degrading 
kind.  Some  were  shown  huddled  together  like 
flocks  of  sheep,  and  seemingly  quite  as  frightened. 
A  herd  of  these  was  shown  in  a  pit  measuring  some 
two  miles  in  width.  The  atmosphere,  thouf^h  dark, 
was  sufficiently  illuminated  to  show  In  outline  the 
surrounding  cliffs  which  towered  high  overhead. 
Near  the  centre  of  this  rocky  gorge  lay  a  dark 
cloud,  considerably  denser  than  the  surrounding 
atmosphere,  which  rose  as  an  emanation  from  the 
bodies  of  a  number  of  men  and  women  standing 
closely  huddled  together.  This  cloudy  matter  did 
not  pass  off  as  vapor  would  from  the  bodies  of  a 
flock  of  sheep  when  huddled  together  on  a  wet 
day,  but  hung  amongst  them  as  a  cloud  will  some- 
times hang  about  a  mountain  top.  Probably  one 
hundred  and  fifty  spirits  stood  thus  huddled  to- 
gether, their  bodies  in  some  cases  looking  per- 
fectly black,  while  others  were  slightly  luminous. 
These  wretched  creatures  In  this  particular  vault 
were  quite  unable  to  see  each  other,  but  were 
dimly  conscious  of  each  other's  presence.  Most 
of  them  were  even  Ignorant  that  they  had  passed 
through  the  change  of  death,  and  acted  very  much 
as  people  act  who  walk  In  sleep.  This  inability  to 
see  was  due  to  the  deadened  state  of  the  organs  of 


''life  after  death"  245 

sight,  which  kept  them  practically  blind  and  In 
darkness,  so  that  If  one  of  them  wandered  away 
some  little  distance  from  the  others  he  only  gravi- 
tated to  them  again  by  a  kind  of  magnetic  attrac- 
tion. Occasionally  one  would  creep  out  from  the 
crowd,  and  after  reaching  a  short  distance  would 
stop,  look  around,  and  then,  as  if  frightened, 
would  dart  back  again  into  the  middle  of  the 
group.  After  months  of  this  kind  of  existence 
these  spirits  begin  to  awake  to  their  surroundings, 
and,  like  sheep,  will  wander  away  one  by  one  from 
the  crowd,  returning  to  it  at  continually  wider  in- 
tervals, only  to  leave  it  again,  a  fuller  conscious- 
ness gradually  asserting  itself,  and  a  steady  im- 
provement in  the  power  of  vision  taking  place. 
When  separated  from  the  crowd,  they  perceive 
the  light  from  above,  and  endeavor  to  reach  it  by 
clambering  up  the  rocks.  Several  of  these  who 
had  detached  themselves  were  seen  climbing  the 
surrounding  cliff  at  various  altitudes,  seeking  a 
means  of  escape.  Rising  higher,  by  great  effort 
they  entered  an  atmosphere  both  light  and  pure 
in  comparison  with  that  which  they  had  experi- 
enced below,  and  a  desire  for  still  better  condi- 
tions sprang  up  within  them.  The  memory  of 
their  wretched  state  and  the  company  with  whom 
they  had  been  associated  so  long  became  repulsive, 
and  spurred  them  to  further  effort  to  reach  the 


246  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

cliff  top  which  towered  overhead.  In  these  efforts 
to  rise,  they  fell  from  giddy  heights  again  and 
again,  but  without  receiving  any  bodily  hurt, 
though  greatly  hurt  in  spirit,  and  undergoing 
agony  of  mind.  These,  as  they  fell  to  the  cliff 
base,  reminded  one  of  caterpillars  mounting  the 
rough  bark  of  a  fruit  tree,  falling  back  again  and 
again  In  a  vain  attempt  to  reach  the  leaves  or  the 
fruit  above,  but  rising  each  time  still  more  deter- 
mined to  reach  the  goal.  The  efforts  to  escape 
gradually  produce  a  striking  improvement  in  the 
bodily  appearance  of  the  spirits,  for  their  bodies 
and  clothing  while  with  the  crowd  presented  a 
black,  dense  appearance,  but  after  several  real 
attempts  to  climb  the  cliffs  these  became  consider- 
ably lighter  in  weight  and  color.  After  long  and 
anxious  effort  they  at  last  found  a  way  where  steps 
had  been  cut  In  the  rock  by  thoughtful  hands,  and 
this  giving  them  a  better  footing,  they  finally 
reached  the  summit.  These  rocky  gorges  com- 
municate with  each  other  by  narrow  passages  and 
tunnels,  which  are  seldom  used  by  spirits,  thus 
each  gorge  Is  practically  separated  from  the  others 
on  that  account. 

It  may  be  asked  why  helpers  do  not  enter  these 
gulfs  and  show  those  who  desire  to  leave  a  way  of 
escape.  There  are  several  reasons  why  this  Is  not 
done.     First,  it  Is  prohibited  by  the  higher  minds 


"life  after  death"  247 

who  control  these  spheres,  who  will  not  allow  a 
soul  to  be  helped  until  it  makes  a  real  effort  to 
help  itself.  Secondly,  the  effort  made  to  find  an 
exit  purifies  the  soul,  and  awakens  it  to  that  con- 
sciousness which  is  necessary  before  a  higher  spirit 
can  make  its  presence  known.  One  such  spirit  in- 
structor volunteered  the  information  that  it  was 
difficult  to  find  controlled  and  wise  helpers  who 
would  not  seek  to  assist  the  escape  of  residents 
prematurely  by  entering  these  pits  in  their  anxiety 
to  help  them.  They  had  learnt  through  long  years 
of  experience  that  until  one  is  fully  ripe  for  help, 
proffered  service  is  often  a  hindrance,  and  to  bring 
any  out  of  the  reformatories  before  their  time  is 
unwise,  and  disastrous  to  helpers  and  helped. 

SEXUAL  indulgence. 

Another  gorge  inspected  was  devoted  to  beings 
whose  lives  had  been  given  over  to  excessive  ani- 
mal lusts.  The  picture  here  described  is  of  such 
a  bestial  character  that  those  of  a  supersensitive 
nature  may  prefer  to  leave  the  next  few  pages  un- 
read. The  author,  however,  believes  the  subject 
too  important  to  be  omitted,  and  therefore  sup- 
plies a  few  details  of  what  life  in  spirit  spheres 
offers  to  those  whose  lives  on  earth  were  wholly 
centred  on  the  things  of  the  flesh.  Reformatories 
for  the  correction  of  sexual  vice  are  very  plenti- 


248  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

ful  on  the  lowest  sphere,  for  such  actions  lead  the 
human  family  into  the  most  degraded  depths  of 
the  spiritual  world. 

Within  the  shadows  of  a  wide  and  deep  gorge 
lay  a  large  lake,  from  the  black  water  of  which 
emanated  a  heavy,  steam-like  moisture,  with  a 
stench  similar  to  that  which  proceeds  from  a  cess- 
pool. Its  size  was  about  a  mile  square,  and  dotted 
over  its  surface  were  to  be  seen  a  number  of 
human  heads  in  pairs.  On  the  banks  stood  a  man 
and  a  woman  as  if  about  to  enter  the  water  to- 
gether, but  the  woman  seemed  loth  to  do  so,  owing 
to  the  disagreeable  odor  which  arose  from  its  sur- 
face as  it  was  disturbed.  Both  seemed  of  middle 
age;  the  man's  face  was  sullen  and  brutish,  but  the 
woman  was  horrible  and  ghastly  in  appearance. 
Her  jaw  had  dropped  on  one  side,  so  that  her 
chin  rested  upon  her  chest,  and  the  mouth  stood 
wide  open.  The  eyes  were  lustreless,  like  those 
of  a  dead  fish.  The  face  was  the  face  of  dead 
flesh,  and  the  hair  fell  over  it  in  loose  and  careless 
wisps.  The  woman  stood  irresolute,  as  if  w^ish- 
ing  to  turn  away,  but  the  man  ultimately  prevailed 
upon  her,  and  together  they  entered  the  pool. 
Several  of  the  older  residents,  standing  some  little 
distance  off  upon  the  bank,  jeered,  and  one,  point- 
ing his  hand  towards  them,  said,  with  a  scornful 
laugh,  "Ha !  these  poor  simpletons  imagine  they 


"life  after  death"  249 

can  play  the  old  game  of  earth  here.  They  will 
soon  realize  that  such  hunger  goes  unsatisfied  in 
this  dead  world." 

At  the  edge  of  the  pool  lay  a  woman  with  her 
head  upon  the  bank,  sick  and  groaning  and  asking 
to  die,  for  the  vapors  in  which  she  lay  seemed  as 
if  they  would  choke  her.  No  one  offered  her  help, 
for  all  were  too  self-centred  to  give  her  a  thought, 
and  anyone  whose  compassion  could  be  aroused 
at  such  a  sight  would  have  been  too  good  for  such 
a  place.  Compassion  does  sometimes  arise,  but 
it  is  a  sign  of  reformation,  and  when  it  appears, 
that  one  is  ready  for  a  higher  state. 

THE  drunkards'   PIT. 

A  dwelling  of  drunkards  was  shown,  where  men 
and  w^omen  were  congregated  in  varying  stages  of 
dejection  and  filth,  and  where  the  craving  for 
drink  was  felt  more  or  less  keenly.  Some  who 
had  been  there  for  years  were  beginning  to  lose 
the  desire  for  alcohol,  and  occasionally  interested 
themselves  in  others  around  them.  In  course  of 
time  this  awakened  interest  would  lead  them  also 
to  a  happier  state  by  lightening  the  spirit  body, 
and  enabling  it  to  scale  the  cliffs  which  kept  it 
prisoner. 

Attention  was  called  to  one  w^oman  who  was 
walking  to  and  fro,  demanding  from  others  how 


250  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

she  might  return  to  earth,  swearing  that  If  once 
there  she  would  be  able  to  find  her  thirst  for 
drink  satisfied.  Some  laughed,  telling  her  they 
believed  It  was  possible  to  get  there,  but  by  what 
means  they  did  not  know.  Learning  of  the  pos- 
sibility, she  became  more  and  more  determined, 
and  the  higher  watchers  helped  her  to  the  accom- 
plishment of  her  object,  seeing  that  only  In  this 
way  would  she  learn  her  lesson.  It  is  commonly 
supposed  that  evil  spirits  of  a  low  order  can 
leave  their  spheres  whenever  they  feel  disposed, 
and  haunt  the  neighborhood  where  they  once 
lived,  but  this  cannot  be  done  without  help  from 
others  who  know  the  way.  When  such  visit  the 
earth,  they  are  actually  unconscious  that  they  are 
being  helped  to  accomplish  their  purpose,  as  the 
guides  who  assist  them  are  unseen  by  them,  owing 
to  the  fact  that  these  guides  function  in  a  body  less 
dense,  and  so  are  invisible  to  their  sight. 

The  bodies  of  spirits  living  upon  the  astral 
planes  are  of  such  a  dense  nature  that  gravitation 
affects  them,  and  so  they  are  afraid  to  visit  the 
earth  by  flight,  even  If  they  knew  how  to  journey 
there.  Tippling  Nell,  the  drunkard  to  whom  we 
have  referred,  found  herself  one  night  upon  the 
earth  near  her  favorite  public-house,  but  how  she 
managed  it  she  could  not  say.  She  arrived  at 
"The  Red  Lion"  about  9  p.m.,  just  as  a  poor, 


"life  after  death"  251 

hard-working  charwoman  entered  for  some  re- 
freshment, determined  to  have  one  drink  and  no 
more.  Here  Nell  was  left  by  the  guide  who  had 
assisted  her  to  earth,  and  who  knew  how  and 
where  to  find  her  again  when  required.  Now 
began  a  drama  similar  to  many  that  are  enacted 
not  only  within  public-houses,  but  in  many  homes 
and  places  of  business,  though  realized  but  by  few. 
How  could  Mrs.  Brown,  the  charwoman,  quietly 
sitting  in  the  bar,  know  that  one  from  spirit 
spheres  stood  beside  her?  She  was  totally  Igno- 
rant of  the  fact,  and  altogether  unconscious  of 
the  latter's  power  to  influence  her  actions.  Mrs. 
Brown  had  half-a-crown  In  her  pocket  when  she 
entered  the  bright  and  comfortable  public-house 
where  she  Intended  to  spend  but  a  few  moments, 
as  she  knew  her  children  waited  at  home  for 
something  to  eat.  She  did  not  leave,  however, 
till  eleven  o'clock  that  night,  when  her  funds  were 
reduced  to  a  few  pence,  and  when  she  was  in- 
capable of  walking  straight.  Meanwhile,  the  un- 
seen occupant  of  the  saloon  had  endeavored  to 
enjoy  by  proxy  the  alcoholic  drinks  taken  by  Mrs. 
Brown,  but  although  Nell  tried  again  and  again 
to  gain  satisfaction  in  this  way,  each  drink  taken 
by  her  victim  only  tantalized  her  the  more,  and 
though  she  haunted  the  public-house  for  days  and 
weeks,  she  never  once  secured  that  pleasure  which 


252  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

she  had  so  long  anticipated.  Wearied  by  her  ef- 
fort, she  began  to  hunger  for  the  company  of  those 
whom  she  had  left  In  the  spiritual  world,  where 
she  was  able  at  least  to  see  and  communicate  with 
companions,  for  here  on  earth,  to  her  surprise, 
the  people  completely  Ignored  her,  for  to  them  she 
was  non-existent.  Her  wish  was  quickly  gratified 
through  the  agency  of  her  unseen  guide,  who  as- 
sisted her  return  to  her  lowly  place  In  the  heavens. 
When  Nell  had  settled  again  In  her  rocky  gorge, 
she  sulked  for  some  time,  and  more  and  more 
held  herself  aloof  from  her  companions.  Sitting 
thus  alone,  her  mind  wandered  back  to  her  early 
days  on  earth  when  she  was  a  child.  She  remem- 
bered her  mother's  cottage,  and  the  clean  and 
happy  life  she  lived  there,  and  comparing  It  with 
her  present  filthy  surroundings  and  her  degraded 
friends,  she  wished  that  she  might  be  a  child 
again.  How  long  this  mental  agony  continued 
it  would  be  difficult  to  say;  probably  weeks  and 
months  elapsed  while  she  sat  In  this  state,  until  the 
feeling  of  disgust  became  so  powerful,  that  she 
determined  to  make  an  effort  to  free  herself  from 
her  surroundings.  With  this  object  In  view  she 
diligently  sought  a  means  of  escape  by  the  only 
way  that  seemed  possible  to  her,  by  mounting  the 
rocky  walls  of  her  prison.  After  long  effort  she 
at  last  scaled  their  precipitous  steeps,  and  was  met 


"life  after  death"  253 

at  the  summit  by  one  who  to  her  Ignorant  eyes 
seemed  an  angel.  Grasping  the  extended  hand 
held  out  to  her  they  rose  together  Into  the  at- 
mosphere, Nell  surprised  at  the  lightness  of  her 
own  body,  which  until  then  she  had  scarcely  ob- 
served, but  which  had  gradually  been  purified 
during  the  months  of  mental  suffering  she  had  en- 
dured. After  travelling  for  some  considerable 
distance,  they  presently  drew  near  a  country  most 
beautiful  to  her  eyes,  and  she  longed  to  ask  ques- 
tions from  her  spirit  companion.  No  encourage- 
ment to  speak  was  given,  but  by  some  means  she 
was  able  to  recognize  that  the  Intentions  of  her 
companion  were  good,  and  that  she  was  being 
taken  to  friends  who  would  be  able  to  help  her 
to  begin  an  entirely  new  life.  Drawing  near  a 
little  cottage  situated  on  a  hlll-slde,  they  saw  one 
approaching,  who  seemed  to  Nell  to  be  her  own 
mother.  In  a  moment  she  found  herself  weeping 
in  her  arms,  while  her  guide  who  had  brought 
her  thus  far  In  safety  was  no  longer  to  be  seen. 
This  typical  Incident  In  the  translation  of  souls  as 
they  rise  from  dens  of  sin  and  Ignorance  to  higher 
spheres  of  light  was  an  ascent  from  the  lower  to 
the  upper  astral  plane,  passing  through  the  middle 
degree. 

The  question  may  be  asked,  "Why  should  such 
temptation  by  unseen  spiritual  beings  upon  mor- 


254  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

tals,  as  mentioned  in  the  above  Incident,  be  al- 
lowed?" First,  it  must  be  realized  that  no  spirit 
can  force  a  mortal  to  do  what  he  does  not  wish 
to  do;  and  secondly,  the  temptation  offered  is  ex- 
actly similar  in  kind  and  degree  to  that  which  the 
mortal  has  to  face  from  his  own  fellow-creatures. 

A  HELL  OF  THE  EPICUREANS. 

The  author  was  greatly  Interested  In  one  group 
of  would-be  aristocratic  souls  who  lay  around  in 
the  centre  of  a  large  lake  of  warm  water,  endeav- 
oring in  this  way  to  Isolate  themselves  from  those 
whom  they  called  "the  common  herd,"  people  who 
on  earth  practised  similar  vices  to  themselves,  but 
who  were  limited  In  wealth,  and  so  unable  to 
gratify  their  whims  to  the  same  extent.  The 
vices  of  the  poverty-stricken  herd  had  kept  them 
poor,  and  sick  and  ugly,  but  the  others,  by  means 
of  their  riches,  had  managed  to  cloak  the  results 
of  their  sins  from  the  outer  world. 

Some  of  the  proud  and  degraded  aristocrats 
had  passed  through  Universities  on  earth,  and  had 
received  what  Is  termed  an  expensive  education. 
Wherever  they  moved  they  picked  up  vicious  prac- 
tices, and  left  an  evil  trail  behind.  Their  whole 
lives  had  been  spent  In  trying  every  form  of  sense 
gratification,  and  they  were  extremely  bored  by 
everything  on  earth  except  virtue,  which  aroused 


"life  after  death''  255 

within  their  dilettante  natures  sarcasm,  fury,  and 
hate.  They  considered  it  a  real  disaster  to  meet 
anyone  of  a  virtuous  character.  Here  these  aris- 
tocratic souls  were  relegated  to  a  muddy  bath  in 
nature's  reformatory. 

The  author  makes  no  attempt  to  describe  the 
mental  suffering,  which  all  residents  experience 
before  rising  from  these  low  spheres.  A  pen  in- 
finitely more  capable  than  his  Is  necessary  to  de- 
scribe the  agony  of  remorse,  the  ghastly  fears, 
the  awful  soul  efforts  that  all  must  undergo  before 
a  purified  state  is  reached.  These  inner  states  of 
the  spirit  are  left  to  the  Imagination  of  the  reader, 
as  it  is  the  author's  task  at  present  to  describe 
chiefly  the  outer  framework  of  the  spiritual 
spheres,  and  some  of  the  laws  governing  life 
therein. 

THE  MIDDLE  ASTRAL  WORLD. 

The  conditions  of  life  upon  the  middle  astral 
are  considerably  less  objectionable  than  those  of 
the  lower  plane,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  light 
is  much  better  and  the  habitations  very  similar  to 
those  of  earth.  The  light  varies  on  the  lowest 
plane  of  the  middle  astral  from  thirty  to  fifty  de- 
grees, so  that  the  upper  plane  is  illuminated  with 
light  equal  to  one-half  the  power  of  earthly  sun- 
light.    Water  is  found  in  greater  abundance,  and 


256  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

the  landscape  is  broken  by  low  hills  and  large 
lakes,  and  a  green  carpet  of  moss  is  found  in  some 
places,  which  from  a  distance  has  the  appearance 
of  grass.  This  moss,  however,  is  the  only  kind  of 
vegetation  to  be  found,  as  grass  and  trees  are 
unable  to  grow,  probably  owing  to  the  lack  of 
light  and  the  poor  nature  of  the  soil,  which  is  of  a 
character  similar  to  shale  or  slag.  The  atmos- 
phere is  peculiarly  moist,  and  has  a  tendency  to 
produce  a  slime  upon  the  outer  walls  of  the  dwell- 
ings in  some  parts.  The  buildings  are  congregated 
together  in  large  cities,  so  that  one  may  enter  a 
town  and  walk  through  streets  of  houses  built 
after  the  pattern  of  earthly  dwellings.  The  su- 
perior spirits  who  govern  the  states  on  the  middle 
astral  plane,  seek  to  keep  them  in  every  way  sim- 
ilar in  appearance  to  earthly  conditions.  The  pur- 
pose of  this  will  become  obvious  to  the  reader  as 
he  proceeds.  The  author  has  on  several  occa- 
sions entered  these  spheres  when  out  of  the  body, 
and  has  been  particularly  struck  with  the  similarity 
of  the  structures  to  the  buildings  known  to  him 
on  earth.  Here  were  found  streets  of  working- 
class  houses  of  a  jerry-built  type,  with  slums  and 
tumble-down  buildings  in  a  state  of  disrepair  and 
ruin,  while  other  localities  presented  a  more  re- 
spectable appearance.  One  feature  of  this  pur- 
gatory or  paradise,  whichever  it  may  be  termed, 


''life  after  death"  257 

for  it  is  both,  was  the  marked  absence  of  children 
from  its  streets  and  dwellings,  for  only  on  very 
rare  occasions  did  one  find  a  child,  and  none  below 
the  age  of  ten  or  twelve  years. 

Let  it  be  understood  that  the  description  here 
given  of  the  astral  plane  applies  only  to  that  por- 
tion immediately  over  the  British  Isles.  The  ap- 
pearance of  architecture  and  life  would  be  alto- 
gether different  in  the  same  plane  over  India, 
China  or  America,  for  the  inhabitants  on  each  of 
these  spheres  create  their  own  environment,  and 
it  must  not  be  thought  that  Red  Indians,  for  in- 
stance, would  build  cities  and  houses  of  European 
character. 

The  spirits  upon  the  middle  astral  are  much  less 
debased  in  character  than  those  of  the  lower 
planes,  being  men  and  women  suffering  from  less 
sensual  vices.  Many  are  of  a  selfish  or  vain  dis- 
position, sometimes  deceitful,  ill-natured,  lazy, 
gluttonous,  or  bigoted,  too  good  for  hell  and  too 
bad  for  heaven.  The  length  of  years  spent  here 
varies  considerably,  as  it  does  on  the  lower  and 
upper  planes,  but  if  an  average  length  of  time  may 
be  given,  five  to  ten  years  would  probably  be  suffi- 
cient to  tire  them  of  their  evil  practices  and  teach 
them  the  folly  of  their  ways.  Some,  however,  are 
so  well  satisfied  with  conditions  on  this  sphere  that 
they  imagine  it  a   desirable  heaven,   and  would 


258  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

continue  to  reside  much  longer,  were  it  not  for  the 
elevating  and  encouraging  influence  of  spirits  of 
a  higher  order  who  visit  them,  these  being  not 
only  teachers,  but  relatives  and  friends  who  have 
themselves  advanced,  whom  the  middle  astral 
dwellers  once  knew  on  earth,  and  between  whom 
there  still  exists  a  bond  of  love  or  interest.  By 
such  an  influence  they  are  drawn  upwards,  and 
without  it  many  would  be  very  slow  in  attempting 
to  rise  above  their  dull  surroundings. 

The  guides  and  overseers  of  this  sphere  en- 
deavor to  gratify  all  the  whims  of  the  residents, 
so  that  one  might  say  it  is  a  kind  of  paradise  for 
them  for  some  time  after  their  arrival,  and  at  first 
they  imagine  they  are  in  heaven,  a  delusion  which 
does  not  long  continue.  Here  we  may  find  the 
lazy  man  whose  highest  ambition  was  a  week  of 
Sundays,  the  vain  woman  who  lived  only  for  dress 
and  flattery,  those  who  lived  for  power  but  were 
ignorant  of  how  to  use  it  aright,  and  those  who 
hungered  and  schemed  to  enter  society,  but  who 
were  incapable  of  knowing  how  to  make  them- 
selves fit  for  't,  and  here  also  may  be  found  some 
good  old  stock  of  blue-blooded  parentage,  who 
had  a  name,  but  failed  to  develop  corresponding 
virtues.  Some  actual  cases  may  now  be  given,  to 
enable  the  reader  to  understand  something  of  the 
life  on  these  planes. 


"life  after  death"  259 

the  retired  policeman. 

In  one  of  a  row  of  respectable-looking  suburban 
houses,  similar  to  those  occupied  by  the  better 
working  class,  with  bay  window,  two  rooms  and 
kitchen  on  the  ground  floor,  and  three  bedrooms 
above,  with  a  little  space  for  a  garden  in  front  and 
one  behind,  some  dwellers  are  to  be  found.  The 
house  can  only  be  distinguished  from  the  others 
on  the  right  and  left  by  the  number,  for  the  brick 
structure,  the  brass  knocker  on  the  door,  the  paint, 
and  even  the  curtains  in  the  windows  are  all  very 
much  alike.  The  only  difference  between  such  a 
street  and  one  on  earth,  is  the  marked  absence  of 
any  traffic,  for  here  come  no  milk  vans  or  news- 
paper boys,  with  a  rattling  of  tin  cans  and  noisy 
cries,  for  their  commodities  are  not  required.  The 
house  that  our  attention  is  directed  to  is  tenanted 
by  Mr.  Bates,  who  on  earth  was  a  police  con- 
stable, and  W'ith  him  dwells  his  wife,  a  highly- 
respectable  woman,  once  a  domestic  servant, 
whose  whole  life  was  devoted  to  polishing,  dust- 
ing and  scrubbing  from  morning  to  night,  both 
before  and  after  her  marriage.  Both  arrived  in 
the  middle  astral  plane  within  a  year  of  each 
other,  and  came  to  reside  in  this  dwelling,  finding 
in  it  exactly  such  a  house  as  had  been  their  highest 
earthly  desire.  While  in  the  police  force,  Mr. 
Bates'   greatest  ambition  was  to  put  in  enough 


260  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

time  to  gain  a  pension,  and  retire  as  the  keeper  of 
some  club  or  institution,  where  he  only  needed  to 
have  the  keys  brought  out  to  unlock  the  doors  in 
the  morning  and  close  them  again  at  night,  with 
nothing  to  wori*y  him  either  In  the  way  of  hard 
w^ork  or  disturbing  thought.  Here,  In  this  astral 
world,  he  has  been  living  a  "year  of  Sundays," 
and  Is  still  thoroughly  content,  occasionally  chat- 
ting with  his  next-door  neighbor  In  his  shirt 
sleeves,  but  not  even  troubling  to  explore  the  sur- 
rounding neighborhood.  One  day,  while  talking 
with  this  neighbor,  an  old  man  came  down  the 
street  wearing  a  garment  which  showed  him  to  be 
a  traveller  from  some  other  region.  Stopping  In 
front  of  Bates'  door,  he  smiled,  and  asked  if  he 
might  come  In  for  a  chat.  Bates  paid  no  atten- 
tion to  his  remark,  but  went  on  speaking  to  his 
neighbor,  and  as  the  old  man  continued  standing, 
waiting  for  an  answer.  Bates  looked  up,  eyed  him 
for  a  moment,  and  then  said  to  his  neighbor, 
"This  Is  one  of  them  bloomin'  missionary  chaps, 
ain't  It?  Why,  I  thought  those  coves  wouldn't 
be  wanted  'ere.  What  can  they  do  now  that 
we've  passed  Into  'eaven  and  are  'appy?"  Then, 
turning  to  the  old  man,  he  said,  with  a  grin  and  a 
wink  to  his  neighbor,  "No,  old  chap;  we've  no 
bottles  or  old  clothes  to-day."  The  traveller, 
without  a  word,  passed  quietly  up  the  street  and 


"life  after  death"  261 

stopped  at  a  door  some  little  distance  away,  where 
an  old  couple  stood.  Entering  into  conversation 
with  them,  they  welcomed  him  very  differently 
from  Bates,  and  together  they  retired  indoors,  for 
they  had  important  questions  to  put  to  their 
visitor.  They  had  been  living  for  some  consider- 
able time  in  this  villa,  and  had  grown  weary  of 
it,  and  had  begun  to  question  one  another  as  to 
whether  the  life  they  now  experienced  was  worth 
living  at  all,  even  though  they  had  got  exactly  all 
they  had  asked  for,  comfort,  quietness,  and  free- 
dom from  worry.  Undoubtedly  they  had  been 
somewhat  selfish  in  their  desires,  but  had  now 
reahzed  how  limited  was  the  life  they  had  imag- 
ined would  bring  lasting  happiness.  The  old  man 
told  them  of  a  greater  and  grander  life,  to  which 
they  listened  with  deep  interest,  asking  many  ques- 
tions, and  that  night,  while  they  lay  asleep,  they 
both  passed  into  the  second  sphere,  accompanied 
by  messengers  who  heard  the  prayers  which  they 
had  offered  together  some  few  hours  before. 
Strange  and  wonderful  is  that  elevating  force  in 
life  which  compels  the  human  soul  to  progress. 

Sleep  is  not  at  all  necessary  to  any  spirit  on  any 
sphere,  but  the  inhabitants  of  this  particular  para- 
dise have  become  such  automatons  that  they  feel 
sleep  to  be  a  necessity  of  their  existence,  so  in- 
grained has  the  habit  become.     Later,  Mr.  and 


262  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

Mrs.  Bates  will  pass  on  higher,  when  they  grow 
tired  of  the  monotony  of  their  present  existence. 
It  may  even  happen  that  one  will  go  before  the 
other,  for  many  a  natural  divorce  takes  place  be- 
tween married  couples  where  one  wishes  to  ad- 
vance and  the  other  refuses. 

VANITY   FAIR. 

Another  paradise  on  the  middle  astral  plane 
was  examined,  where  a  large  building  was  found 
devoted  to  the  use  of  a  colony  of  vain  men  and 
women  who  lived  for  one  object  only,  to  dress  in 
order  to  win  flattery  from  others.  Here  was  a 
room  of  lofty  dimensions,  with  windows  on  all 
sides,  and  mirrors  lining  the  walls  from  floor  to 
ceiling.  By  each  window  stood  a  dressing-table, 
with  a  large  wardrobe  on  the  right  and  left  loaded 
with  rich  garments  of  every  description.  Upon 
the  dressing-tables  stood  every  variety  of  beauty 
make-ups  that  the  mind  of  the  most  vain  could 
imagine,  and  with  the  exception  of  a  few  chairs 
no  other  furniture  was  to  be  seen.  Presently  a 
number  of  women  entered  the  room  and  began 
dressing,  until  at  last  there  were  upwards  of  fifty, 
each  busily  occupied  with  her  toilet.  A  chatter  of 
conversation  was  heard,  but  the  substance  of  the 
remarks  seemed  to  be  entirely  devoted  to  their 
personal  appearance  and  inquiry  by  one  and  an- 


"life  after  death"  263 

other  as  to  how  they  looked  in  their  new  dresses. 
Any  number  of  these  to  order  were  provided  for 
the  asking,  so  that  all  could  easily  vie  with  each 
other.  The  question  was  continually  asked  on  all 
hands,  ''Plow  do  I  look?"  and  was  only  answered 
by  the  question,  "Oh,  how  do  /  look?"  for  no 
one  would  gratify  the  other's  wish  and  offer  praise, 
so  greedily  did  each  seek  this  for  themselves. 
Their  whole  time  was  occupied  in  robing  care- 
fully and  then  passing  out  on  to  the  boulevards, 
where  they  met  over-dressed  fops  of  the  opposite 
sex,  whose  tastes  were  all  of  an  exactly  similar 
kind.  Returning  again  to  their  saloon,  they  dis- 
robed, rested  a  while,  and  re-robed  in  fresh  gar- 
ments, varying  the  round  with  an  occasional  visit 
to  a  concert-room  or  theatre,  where  people  of  a 
similar  nature  acted  before  them,  all  with  one 
object — to  secure  applause. 

One  woman  of  about  thirty-two  years  of  age, 
named  Vera,  rather  handsome  in  appearance,  had 
just  left  the  dressing-room  with  the  object  of 
spending  an  hour  in  the  company  of  others.  She 
was  gorgeously  attired  and  carried  a  sunshade, 
though  such  an  object  was  of  no  service  in  a 
world  where  no  sun  shines.  She  had  been  a  resi- 
dent in  this  home  for  six  months,  and  was  be- 
ginning to  weary  of  its  vani':y,  and  at  this  particu- 
lar moment  felt  extremely  irritable  with  the  num- 


264  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

ber  of  questioners  who  had  put  to  her  within  the 
last  hour  that  monotonous  query,  "How  do  / 
look?"  She  felt  in  a  rebellious  mood  and  some- 
what sick  of  life  as  she  went  out.  A  man  ap- 
proached— one  like  herself  in  aims — who  had 
spent  all  the  morning  in  his  gilded  cage  laboring 
to  find  a  tie  of  the  proper  tint  to  match  his  silk 
stockings.  He  adjusted  his  monocle  and  bowed 
to  Vera,  asking  with  a  vacant  smile,  "Well,  ducky, 
how  do  I  look?"  Poor  Vera!  Again  it  had 
come.  This,  she  felt,  was  the  last  straw,  and 
placing  her  face  suddenly  close  to  the  questioner, 
she  replied  with  great  emphasis,  "Rotten!"  ,  It 
acted  like  a  blow  of  the  fist  In  his  face,  for  he 
started  back  as  Vera  turned  on  her  heel  and  rushed 
to  her  dwelling.  Entering  the  mirrored  saloon, 
she  cast  her  outer  garments  one  by  one  on  the 
floor,  kicking  them  violently  under  the  dressing- 
table.  Before  the  mirror  she  wiped  away  the 
paint  and  powder,  and  revealed  her  own  face 
again.  Several  of  her  companions  entering  re- 
marked, "What  a  guy!  what  a  fright!"  driving 
the  wretched  woman  from  the  saloon  to  her  pri- 
vate room  upstairs,  where  she  could  be  alone. 
Here  she  began  to  ponder  over  her  present  life, 
and  her  past  one  on  earth,  and  to  despise  herself 
for  the  empty  life  she  had  led,  and  thus  brooding 
became  more  and  more  miserable.    Her  agony  in- 


LIFE   AFTER   DEATH  265 

creased  as  her  past  actions  rose  vividly  before  her, 
until  at  last  she  broke  Into  tears  and  moaned  out 
regrets,  beseeching  God,  If  there  was  such,  that 
she  might  have  a  new  start  In  hfe.  Many  days 
passed  while  this  tragedy  of  the  soul  proceeded, 
but  she  was  quite  oblivious  to  the  flight  of  time. 
Her  prayer  for  another  chance  w^as  uttered  vmh 
such  sincerity  that  It  seemed  to  create  a  disturbance 
In  the  atmosphere  Immediately  over  her  head,  and 
presently,  to  her  astonishment,  her  sister  Alice 
stood  before  her.  Somewhat  frightened  at  the 
appearance,  she  said,  "Why,  Alice,  how  Is  It  you 
are  here?  I  thought  you  were  dead.  I  am  quite 
aware  that  I  am  supposed  to  be  dead,  but  what 
brings  you  here?" 

"I  heard  your  call,"  said  Alice,  '*and  came  to 
help  you,  now^  that  you  are  willing  to  be  done  with 
these  stupid  vanities  that  have  been  your  downfall. 
I  would  have  helped  you  sooner,  but  could  not, 
so  self-centred  were  you  in  the  things  of  the  senses. 
If  you  really  mean  to  give  them  up  and  live  a 
sensible  life,  I  will  help  you  to  return  to  your  chil- 
dren, who  are  now  In  the  care  of  our  old  mother 
on  earth." 

Vera  was  startled,  and  looking  earnestly  Into 
her  sister's  face,  said,  "Is  it  possible  that  I  can  see 
them,  Alice?  Can  you  help  me?  I  have  been  such 
a  fool,  I  know,  but  do  forgive  me,  and  I  will  en- 


266  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

deavor  to  do  better.  Take  me,  If  you  can,  from 
this  wretched  place,  for  the  people  are  more  like 
dolls  than  human  beings.  I  know  I  have  been  one 
of  them,  but  I  am  heartily  sick  of  It  all,  and  am 
prepared  to  wash  and  scrub  the  floors  and  spend 
my  days  in  the  most  menial  service  if  only  I  can 
escape  from  It." 

While  this  scene  took  place,  the  soul  of  Vera 
gradually  underwent  a  change,  her  body  became 
brighter,  especially  during  the  latter  part  of  her 
tearful  remorse,  and  Alice,  stooping  down  with  a 
happy  smile,  took  her  sister  in  her  arms,  and  to- 
gether they  rose  into  the  atmosphere  and  disap- 
peared from  sight,  passing  into  the  second  sphere 
where  the  sister  had  her  home. 

Vera's  absence  was  noticed  but  for  a  few  days. 
A  question,  a  laugh,  a  shrug  of  the  shoulders,  and 
her  companions  ceased  to  discuss  her,  and  she  was 
soon  forgotten  as  one  who  had  probably  found  her 
way  to  some  new  pleasure  centre;  only  a  few  won- 
dered if  she  was  one  of  those  who  had  escaped  to 
the  higher  spheres,  which  rumor  claimed  existed. 

THE  HOUSE  OF  THE  HARPY. 

The  author,  travelling  on  one  occasion  through 
the  middle  astral  plane,  visited  a  city  which  had 
almost  fallen  Into  ruins,  the  houses  on  the  outskirts 
being  quite  impossible  of  habitation,  for  only  the 


LIFE   AFTER   DEATH  267 

walls  remained;  others  In  a  better  state  of  repair 
were  Inhabited  by  people  of  a  type  such  as  might 
be  met  with  on  earth  In  slum  neighborhoods.  The 
atmosphere  of  the  place  was  disagreeable,  and  In 
the  deserted  streets  from  time  to  time  one  could 
perceive  what  appeared  to  be  the  dead  bodies  of 
new-born  children  In  various  stages  of  growth. 
Entering  one  of  the  houses,  these  baby  forms  were 
everywhere  to  be  found,  let  Into  the  walls,  lying 
on  the  floor,  and  upon  the  beds,  so  that  there 
seemed  to  be  no  place  within  the  rooms  where  one 
could  sit  down  without  seeing  these  strange  crea- 
tions. In  these  homes  lived  women  whose  lives 
on  earth  had  been  devoted  to  the  procuring  of 
abortion,  and  who  had  to  suffer  the  annoyance  of 
having  these  baby  forms  continually  kept  before 
them  by  unseen  spirit  operators.  Before  sitting 
down  It  was  necessary  to  remove  them  from  the 
chairs,  and  they  frequently  cast  them  out  of  the 
windows  In  their  desire  to  be  rid  of  them,  but  no 
sooner  was  this  done  than  the  forms  were  returned 
to  the  old  position,  for  unseen  eyes  were  always 
watching,  and  brought  them  back  as  speedily  as 
they  were  got  rid  of.  These  were  artificial  crea- 
tions used  by  higher  spirits  as  object  lessons  to 
awaken  the  conscience,  and  arouse  these  women  to 
the  unnatural  enormity  of  their  past  evil  practices. 
This  Irritating  lesson  seldom  failed  to  bring  them 


268  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

to  an  understanding  that  what  they  believed  was 
dead  and  unknown  was  in  reality  alive  and  known 
to  all. 

THE  UPPER  ASTRAL  PLANE. 

Those  who  have  been  dwellers  in  the  dark  and 
rocky  gorges  of  the  lowest  astral,  and  have  at  last 
arrived  on  the  upper  astral  plane,  find  a  brighter 
state  of  existence,  where  life,  though  far  removed 
from  the  joys  of  higher  spheres,  at  least  supplies 
conditions  more  suitable  to  human  beings.  This 
plane  is  a  school  of  probation,  where  by  earnest 
application  minds  are  educated,  spirits  are  puri- 
fied, and  the  inhabitants  can  fit  themselves  to  be- 
come w^orthy  of  association  with  spirits  of  a  nobler 
order.  Work  which  they  are  capable  of  perform- 
ing is  allotted  to  them,  often  tasks  of  a  very 
menial  order,  and  by  means  of  these  they  receive 
from  their  teachers  instruction  In  the  art  of  right 
living.  Some  attach  themselves  to  organized 
bands  of  a  higher  order,  who  seek  to  help  the 
dwellers  of  earth,  or  who  visit  astral  planes  imme- 
diately below  them  with  a  similar  object.  The 
work,  though  difficult  at  first,  becomes  deeply  in- 
teresting, until,  after  some  time,  they  are  loth  to 
leave  it,  so  happy  are  they  in  their  new  occupa- 
tions. 

Pet  birds  and  animals  are  here  found  in  small 


"life  after  death"  269 

numbers,  and  vegetation  also  begins  to  show  upon 
the  higher  reaches  where  the  light  reaches  nearly 
seventy  degrees.  Shrubs  and  grass  are  somewhat 
Indifferent  In  color,  being  of  a  brownish-green. 
The  surface  of  this  plane  Is  considerably  varied; 
hills  range  to  a  height  of  about  500  feet,  and 
rivers  of  short  length  rise  from  springs  and  run 
into  lakes. 

Immense  hospitals  are  to  be  found  in  the  upper 
reaches  of  these  spheres,  to  which  many  are 
brought  who  have  just  died  on  earth.  Some  of 
these  weary  ones  continue  to  sleep  for  months  be- 
fore returning  to  consciousness.  These  hospitals 
are  supervised  by  doctors,  assisted  by  kindly 
nurses,  who  watch  over  their  sleeping  patients 
with  great  diligence,  making  preparations  for  the 
moment  of  their  awakening,  so  that  friends  and 
relatives  whom  they  can  recognize  may  be  at  the 
bed-side  to  welcome  them.  At  the  present  time, 
thousands  of  soldiers,  gathered  from  the  battle- 
fields of  Europe,  lie  sleeping  In  these  peaceful  hos- 
pitals of  the  soul,  and  many  sailors  also,  who  have 
recently  met  a  watery  grave.  These  are  provided 
with  separate  establishments  from  civilians,  as  the 
treatment  required  at  first  is  somewhat  different. 

No  adult  at  death,  whose  proper  home  is  in  the 
second  or  third  sphere,  ever  goes  directly  there, 
but  is  brought  to  the  upper  astral  plane  for  a 


270  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

time,  as  a  direct  journey  to  the  higher  spheres 
would  be  too  severe  a  shock  for  the  spirit.  The 
Inhabitants  upon  the  upper  astral  do  not  congre- 
gate together  in  cities  such  as  are  found  on  the 
plane  below,  but  dwell  in  small  communities.  The 
houses  are  simple  in  style  and  small  in  size,  for 
here  all  tendency  to  luxury  of  any  kind  is  avoided, 
the  principal  idea  being  to  train  the  inhabitants 
by  a  Spartan-like  system  of  life. 

SECOND  SPHERE. 

On  the  second  sphere  the  conditions  of  life  are 
still  further  improved,  the  light  ranging  from 
seventy  degrees  on  its  lowest  plane  to  ninety-nine 
degrees  on  its  highest,  which  is  practically  full 
sunshine.  Vegetation  is  still  somewhat  poor  on 
the  lower  planes,  but  improves  gradually  on  the 
upper.  Flowers  of  an  extremely  commonplace 
variety  are  found  at  the  lowest  degree,  lacking  in 
color  and  perfection  of  form,  but  these  improve 
very  considerably  on  the  upper  reaches.  Pet  ani- 
mals are  more  numerous,  and  the  singing  of  birds 
is  frequently  heard.  Many  who  come  to  dwell 
here  after  death  find  this  sphere  a  very  desirable 
spot,  for  It  offers  a  great  improvement  to  the 
physical  state  of  earth,  as  the  atmospheric  condi- 
tions are  stable,  and  the  temperature  warm  and 
pleasant. 


"life  after  death"  271 

On  this  sphere  are  to  be  found  the  headquarters 
of  every  religious  organization  known  on  earth, 
with  churches  and  flourishing  congregations 
served  by  ministers  who  still  preach  their  favorite 
doctrines.  This  rather  applies  to  the  lower 
planes,  for  on  the  upper  practically  nothing  of 
this  sort  is  to  be  found.  The  congregations  are 
considerably  greater  than  on  earth,  but  this  is  not 
due  to  the  larger  numbers  attending  church,  but 
owing  to  a  much  more  limited  supply  of  both 
churches  and  ministers.  Those  who  are  allowed 
to  preach  are  carefully  selected  by  wise  overseers, 
and  only  such  as  are  fit  to  be  teachers  of  advanced 
truth  are  permitted  to  occupy  these  posts.  They 
are  men  of  developed  character,  capable  of  under- 
standing the  natural  principles  within  their  reli- 
gion, and  blessed  with  a  loving  disposition  towards 
all  men.  These  various  bodies  are  not  allowed  to 
separate  from  each  other,  but  wherever  a  com- 
munity is  established  of  any  size,  the  various 
churches  are  clustered  together  and  compelled  to 
exchange  many  visits.  One  distinguishing  differ- 
ence between  churches  of  the  second  sphere  and 
those  of  earth  is,  that  while  in  the  latter  pastors 
impress  upon  their  congregations  the  necessity  of 
increasing  their  attendance  at  services,  the  former 
seek  to  instruct  their  congregations  to  open  them- 
selves to  the  divine  influx  of  spiritual  life  from 


272  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

higher  spheres,  and  to  become  less  dependent  on 
such  ministrations.  From  time  to  time  the  pulpits 
are  occupied  by  spiritual  instructors  from  the  third 
and  fourth  spheres,  by  whose  help  the  people  rise 
from  narrow  conceptions  of  God  and  the  Uni- 
verse, and  are  instructed  in  a  natural  religion. 
Some  interesting  facts  might  be  given  did  space 
allow,  to  show  the  surprising  position  of  some  of 
the  leading  dignitaries  of  the  churches,  who  on 
earth  were  considered  of  enormous  importance, 
but  here  have  to  take  a  very  lowly  place. 

A  visit  was  paid  to  a  large  institution  standing 
in  a  beautifully  cultivated  park,  surrounded  with 
high  walls.  Within  this  lofty  building,  rows  of 
small  rooms  were  found,  in  each  of  which  lived 
isolated  patients.  In  one  room  sat  an  old  man 
with  an  innocent  and  self-satisfied  look  upon  his 
face,  reading  a  religious  book.  His  conversation 
to  any  visitor  allowed  to  see  him,  was  somewhat 
as  follows,  "Ah,  my  friend,  I  am  pleased  to  meet 
you,  for  the  Lord  has  sent  you  my  way.  I  see  you 
are  not  one  of  us.  You  are  of  all  men  the  most 
unfortunate,  for  unless  you  live  within  these  sacred 
walls  you  cannot  know  eternal  peace,  for  here  we 
live  the  life  of  the  blessed,  earned  not  by  our  own 
efforts  but  through  the  virtues  of  another.  I  per- 
ceive you  are  an  Englishman,  therefore  the  oppor- 
tunity has  been  yours   of  learning  the   absolute 


"life  after  death"  273 

truth  by  which  your  admittance  to  these  heavenly 
states  would  have  been  secured.  Praise  the  Lord! 
my  dear  mother  showed  me  the  necessity  for  form- 
ing deep  and  impregnable  convictions  at  an  early 
age,  and  1  early  learned  to  reject  the  temptation 
that  others  fall  into,  of  building  their  lives  upon 
the  empty  conclusions  of  reason.  But  for  this  in- 
flexible determination  of  mine  to  rest  upon  the 
sure  and  certain  statements  of  God  revealed  in 
His  Word,  I  might  have  been  dwelling  with  those 
unhappy  souls  who  refuse  the  truth  which  I  so 
earnestly  on  many  occasions  proclaimed  to  them. 
Now  I  have  the  peace  and  satisfaction  of  knowing 
that  I  was  right,  and  they  will  have  an  eternity  of 
time  to  perceive  their  error,  and  to  realize  the 
folly  of  rejecting  the  gift  which  would  have  cost 
them  nothing  to  accept."  His  keeper  at  this  junc- 
ture entered  and  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  led 
him  out  to  the  garden  where  several  others  wan- 
dered about  suffering  from  the  same  disease,  but 
all  equally  content  with  their  lot.  This  man  on 
earth  played  a  prominent  part  in  religious  work, 
leaving  wherever  he  went  disturbed  minds  and 
casting  a  monstrous  shadow  which  caricatured 
the  divine  principles  of  life. 

Many  schools  and  colleges  are  to  be  found  on 
this  plane,  established  for  the  education  of  the 
people,  and  from  these  a  steady  stream  of  enlight- 


274  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

ened  souls  goes  forth  to  visit  the  earth  in  an  en- 
deavor to  free  the  minds  of  men  from  the  many 
superstitious  ideas  which  there  hold  sway. 

THIRD  SPHERE. 

That  natural  life  of  the  soul  which  man  ought  to 
inherit  immediately  after  death,  were  he  to  live  in 
more  harmonious  conditions  with  the  law  of  his 
being  while  on  earth,  is  to  be  found  on  the  third 
sphere.  One  finds  there  a  state  of  life  far  su- 
perior to  that  of  earth,  though  in  some  respects 
it  is  singularly  similar.  No  one  can  enter  this 
sphere  who  has  not  been  purified  from  those  weak- 
nesses which  cause  so  much  harm  and  discord  upon 
earth,  and  thus  the  companionship  is  of  a  very 
agreeable  kind.  The  name  "Summer  Land"  is 
most  appropriate,  for  the  fullest  sunlight  shines 
upon  the  mountains,  streams,  valleys  and  lakes  of 
this  delightful  region.  The  light  ranges  from  full 
sunlight,  TOO  degrees,  at  its  lowest  point,  to  no 
degrees  at  its  highest.  Children  in  all  stages  of 
growth  are  found,  especially  upon  the  lower  plane, 
many  of  these  living  with  their  own  parents,  while 
others  await  them,  meanwhile  remaining  in  the 
care  of  relatives,  friends,  nurses  and  instructors. 
The  little  ones  who  enter  spirit  realms  in  baby- 
hood, grow  up  with  a  beauty  strangely  different 
from  that  found  in  children  who  have  lived  some 


*'life  after  death"  275 

years  on  earth.  There  Is  a  purity  and  sweetness 
In  the  former  sometimes  lacking  In  the  latter,  but 
the  earth  child  has  other  compensations. 

The  homes  on  the  third  sphere  are  very  similar 
In  appearance  to  those  of  earth,  and  are  scattered 
amongst  gardens  of  great  beauty.  The  tendency 
is  to  dwell  together  In  family  groups.  There  are 
no  cities,  for  the  people  delight  In  rural  surround- 
ings, and  derive  much  benefit  from  this  association 
with  nature.  The  houses  vary  very  little  from 
earthly  models.  One  would  have  thought  that  in 
a  land  where  rain  Is  never  found,  sloping  roofs 
would  be  unnecessary,  but  here  the  great  majority 
of  the  houses  have  such  roofs,  which  leads  one  to 
suppose  that  the  eye,  so  long  accustomed  to  a  de- 
sign of  this  kind,  looks  for  it  as  necessary  to  Its 
correct  appearance.  Broadly  speaking,  the  houses 
on  this  plane  are  constructed  either  In  composition 
stone  or  in  brick,  but  more  generally  the  latter. 
The  brickwork  being  of  a  warm  red  color  gives 
an  extremely  pleasant  aspect  when  nestling 
amongst  green  foliage,  and  probably  for  this  rea- 
son is  more  generally  adopted.  The  influence  of 
color  is  a  most  Important  one  In  all  superphyslcal 
states,  especially  from  the  third  upwards,  and  all 
tints  are  selected  with  the  utmost  care,  with  the 
object  of  influencing  those  In  their  Immediate 
neighborhood.      Much    of    the    clothing    is    also 


276  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

chosen  with  the  same  object.  It  is  noticeable  that 
spirits  with  intellectual  aspirations  usually  se- 
lect the  stone  buildings  as  their  dwellings. 

Occupations  on  this  plane  are  much  more  varied 
than  on  earth,  and  everywhere  there  is  a  delight- 
ful activity,  very  different  from  what  one  is  led 
to  imagine  from  the  stories  which  purport  to 
describe  heaven.  Here  one  finds  an  absence  of 
all  rush  and  bustle,  everyone  taking  time  to  enjoy 
life  and  entering  Into  such  work  as  they  select 
with  deep  Interest.  No  one  Is  ever  in  too  great 
a  hurry  to  stop  and  help  or  entertain  a  fellow- 
creature.  A  gracious  familiarity  exists  between 
all  the  residents,  but  through  It  all  there  runs  a 
charming  privacy  wherever  it  is  desired,  for  all 
are  willing  to  accord  to  others  that  which  they  de- 
sire for  themselves. 

One  of  the  first  things  that  strikes  a  visitor  to 
this  sphere  Is  the  absence  of  shadow,  the  light 
being  of  a  peculiar  nature,  illuminating  an  object 
on  all  sides  equally,  so  that  light  Is  quite  as  clear 
below  a  spreading  tree  as  above.  Every  object  Is 
also  more  or  less  self-luminous.  Considered  by 
the  mortal,  this  absence  of  shadow  might  suggest 
a  lack  of  beauty,  but  one  has  only  to  witness  the 
scenery  of  these  upper  spheres  to  appreciate  a 
marvellous  beauty  of  landscape  beyond  anything 
known  on  earth.     Another  striking  feature  is  the 


*'life  after  death"  277 

total  absence  of  all  dust,  everything  having  the 
appearance  of  Immaculate  freshness.  Where  a 
leaf  Is  accidentally  detached,  the  particles  quickly 
disintegrate  by  chemical  action,  and  pass  into  the 
atmosphere,  and  become  re-absorbed  by  the  plant 
life  around.  There  Is  no  change  of  seasons,  the 
temperature  being  constantly  the  same,  neither  Is 
there  wind  or  rain.  There  Is  also  a  total  absence 
of  clouds  In  the  sky,  moisture  being  obtained  from 
the  atmosphere  in  regular  proportions,  but  the  sky 
does  not  lack  beauty  because  of  this,  for  there  Is 
an  ever-changing  electrical  action  in  the  upper  at- 
mosphere which  constantly  varies,  and  produces 
many  beautiful  colors.  One  is  struck  by  the  happy 
familiarity  of  the  Inhabitants  towards  each  other, 
though  no  one  intrudes,  and  a  strict  politeness 
governs  all  their  actions.  Entering  a  garden  with 
high  walls,  a  mother  and  her  child  are  found  liv- 
ing in  a  happy  retirement.  By  an  expressive 
glance  and  a  few  words  from  the  beautiful  woman 
who  Is  walking  within  the  garden,  one  learns  that 
she  passed  some  five  years  ago  into  this  sphere, 
in  giving  birth  to  the  child  now  by  her  side.  She 
has  little  interest  in  the  things  of  the  wider  world, 
as  she  Is  patiently  waiting  for  her  husband,  who 
still  dwells  on  earth,  to  join  her.  She  is  glad  to 
assist  with  the  education  of  several  children  who 
are  brought  to  her  from  time  to  time,  and  whom 


278  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

she  trains  along  with  her  own  child,  under  the 
guidance  of  teachers  experienced  in  this  important 
work. 

The  intimacies  of  earth  life  are  carried  on  for 
long  years  upon  this  plane  of  existence,  and  some- 
times extend  to  the  fourth  sphere.  These  intima- 
cies, however,  gradually  change  with  the  develop- 
ment of  consciousness,  and  the  human  traits  and 
earth-loves  widen  as  the  soul  evolves,  giving  place 
to  a  universal  love  which  embraces  all  humanity. 

Immediately  adjoining  this  home  lies  a  large 
park,  in  which  stands  a  public  building  devoted  to 
the  use  of  all  who  wish  to  enter  for  study  or 
amusement.  Separate  rooms  are  there  provided 
for  music,  painting,  modelling,  reading,  lecturing, 
etc.  In  the  large  entrance  hall  are  many  middle- 
aged  men  and  women  who  meet  there  for  an 
hour's  quiet  intercourse,  w^hile  younger  relatives 
walk  in  the  grounds,  and  amuse  themselves  as  they 
feel  disposed.  These  people  are  spending  some 
time  in  leisurely  recreation,  but  their  other  hours 
are  spent  in  useful  service.  Here  are  to  be  found 
many  who  have  been  working  on  the  earth  plane, 
quite  a  number  having  just  returned  from  labori- 
ous work  upon  the  battle-fields,  where  they  have 
been  helping  those  just  recently  passed  out  of  the 
body.  Further  on  was  established  a  large  college, 
where  students,  ranging  from  twenty  to  fifty  years, 


"life  after  death"  279 

were  gathered  together.  These  were  being  taught 
by  teachers  from  the  fourth  sphere,  who  instruct- 
ed them  in  the  laws  pertaining  to  that  sphere, 
and  also  taught  them  some  of  the  fundamental 
principles  of  psychology,  in  order  that  they  might 
become  teachers  amongst  their  companions.  In 
another  college  which  the  author  entered,  ad- 
vanced students  were  found  receiving  instruction 
from  teachers  from  the  fifth  sphere.  Their  prac- 
tice and  method  of  teaching  was  very  interesting, 
and  it  may  be  useful  to  briefly  explain  this. 
Shortly  after  the  students  were  seated,  seven 
teachers  from  the  fifth  sphere  appeared  instan- 
taneously upon  the  platform.  After  a  brief  in- 
terval three  descended  on  the  right  hand  and 
three  on  the  left,  the  seventh  remaining  seated. 
The  six  passed  along  the  side  aisles,  and  begin- 
ning at  the  back  of  the  hall  made  passes  over  the 
heads  of  the  audience,  touching  from  time  to  time 
the  heads  of  certain  students  who  sought  this  as 
a  favor,  and  thus  established  magnetic  cords  be- 
tween the  class  and  the  teacher  on  the  platform. 
These  passes  were  obviously  made  with  the  in- 
tention of  linking  the  minds  of  the  students  with 
the  mind  of  the  teacher,  for  the  six  assistants 
passed  their  hands,  after  they  had  magnetized 
the  audience,  over  the  head  of  their  chief,  and 
then  seated  themselves  again,  three  on  each  side. 


280  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

When  the  principal  began  his  instruction,  the 
students  seemed  to  be  able  to  enter  into  his  mind 
and  read  the  thoughts  clearly  which  he  expressed 
in  speech,  and  it  was  evident  that  they  gathered 
more  from  the  thought  than  the  actual  words, 
by  this  telepathic  transmission.  These  lectures 
seldom  extend  beyond  an  hour's  duration,  and 
are  often  considerably  shorter  than  this,  for 
thought  Is  much  more  speedy  than  anything  pos- 
sible to  men  on  earth. 

Entering  a  large  school  where  children  were 
being  instructed,  a  marked  peculiarity  was  notice- 
able in  the  many  miniature  rooms  arranged 
around  the  large  central  hall.  The  main  hall  had 
seating  accommodation  for  over  a  thousand  chil- 
dren, where  they  were  congregated  for  certain  ex- 
ercises and  for  singing,  but  each  individual  child 
had  a  separate  room  and  tutor,  the  teachers  being 
selected  to  suit  the  temperament  of  each  child.  A 
teacher  was  only  permitted  to  instruct  a  child  to 
whom  he  was  attached  by  a  close  bond  of  affec- 
tion. Elementary  general  instruction  very  simi- 
lar to  what  is  known  on  earth  was  given,  such  as 
reading,  writing,  spelling  and  arithmetic,  but  in- 
finite care  was  taken  in  the  training  of  thoughts 
and  emotions,  far  beyond  anything  attempted  on 
earth.  These  children  are  delightful  to  see,  and 
nowhere  are  there  any  signs  of  disobedience  or 


<<-.^-^^     .^^„_.    ^^.^^,n 


LIFE   AFTER   DEATH  28  I 

passion,  for  the  rule  of  love  sways  all  the  actions 
of  their  teachers,  and  in  children  passion  is  usu- 
ally the  outcome  of  disordered  physical  constitu- 
tions from  which  they  do  not  here  suffer. 

The  author  found  that  children  who  had  lived 
on  earth  for  some  years  were  instructed  in  sep- 
arate schools  from  those  who  had  entered  the 
spirit  world  in  early  infancy,  as  every  care  is  taken 
that  certain  habits  and  practices  learned  on  earth 
may  not  be  practised  on  these  spheres.  The 
growth  of  children  in  spirit  life  is  very  similar  to 
that  on  earth,  most  of  them  arriving  at  maturity 
in  about  twenty  years,  but  a  proportion,  under  the 
wise  training  and  care  of  able  guides  and  instruc- 
tors, are  fully  developed  at  from  twelve  to  fifteen. 
These  are  rather  exceptional  children  with  highly 
developed  mental  powers  and  vigorous  constitu- 
tions. 

Many  of  the  sports  of  earth  are  practised  in  this 
sphere,  but  any  form  of  sport  hurtful  to  either  the 
animal  or  human  kingdom  is  naturally  prohibited. 
Large  numbers  of  singing  birds  are  to  be  found, 
a  special  favorite  being  the  canary,  but  carrion- 
feeding  fowls  are  never  found.  Pet  animals,  such 
as  dogs,  cats,  birds  anci  horses,  and  a  limited  num- 
ber of  other  pet  animals,  are  often  to  be  seen; 
these  may  rise  with  their  owners  to  higher  spheres, 
but  only  in  a  few  instances,  as  association  with  ani- 


282  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

mals  Is  discouraged  on  higher  planes,  and  many 
of  them  gravitate  after  a  few  years  to  the  animal 
sphere.  The  souls  of  animals  which  enter  the 
human  spirit  world  are  enabled  to  do  so  through 
the  close  contact  with  human  beings  on  earth, 
which  enables  their  souls  to  develop  to  such  an  ex- 
tent that  they  become  refined  and  spiritualized  be- 
yond the  ordinary  animal  state,  but  no  sooner  are 
they  neglected  and  lose  the  close  contact  estab- 
lished by  love  and  human  Influence,  than  they 
gradually  lapse  back  to  their  original  conditions. 

Music  plays  an  important  part  in  the  elevation 
of  the  soul,  and  enters  not  only  the  ear,  but  plays 
upon  every  nerve  of  the  soul,  very  much  as  a 
breeze  plays  upon  the  surface  of  man's  body  in 
physical  life.  Nearly  every  Instrument  known  on 
earth  is  to  be  found,  and  a  great  variety  of  quite 
unknown  and  much  more  highly  evolved  instru- 
ments in  addition,  but  these  it  is  impossible  to  de- 
scribe here. 

The  people  dwelling  on  this  sphere  are  fully 
conscious  of  all  that  goes  on  upon  earth,  not  only 
regarding  their  relatives,  but  also  in  connection 
with  the  general  movement  of  its  education  and 
progress.  It  must  not,  however,  be  supposed  that 
the  sorrows  of  mortals  constantly  disturb  the  in- 
habitants of  the  first  heaven,  for  they  can,  when 
they  feel  disposed,  make  themselves  positive  to  all 


"life  after  death"  283 

that  takes  place  on  earth,  otherwise  their  exist- 
ence would  be  unbearable.  Many  are  glad  to  visit 
the  earth  environment  from  time  to  time  to  gain 
experience,  but  others  have  no  desire  whatever  to 
approach  that  school  of  experience  which  they 
were  heartily  glad  to  leave  behind. 

FOURTH  SPHERE. 

Life  on  the  fourth  sphere  is  quite  as  varied  as 
that  on  the  third,  but  the  habits  and  thoughts 
of  the  people  are  much  more  spiritual,  and  when 
one  enters  into  these  spheres  contact  with  earth  is 
kss  close,  and  the  mind  of  man  is  directed  to  the 
consideration  of  problems  considerably  in  advance 
of  those  which  claim  his  attention  either  on  earth 
or  on  the  third  sphere.  Much  attention  is  devoted 
to  a  comparison  of  experience,  and  an  endeavor 
to  ascertain  the  cause  of  these  differences.  En- 
tering one  of  the  schools  one  finds  men  and  women 
of  an  elevated  nature,  detailing  their  past  lives 
and  describing  their  actions,  some  of  them  being 
of  a  most  disreputable  nature,  yet  they  do  this 
without  a  shadow  of  shame,  for  they  have  paid 
the  full  penalty  of  any  wrong  action,  otherwise 
they  would  not  be  in  their  present  developed  state. 
They  quietly  discuss  their  reason  for  seeking  hap- 
piness by  the  methods  they  adopted  when  on  earth, 
and  what  the  results  of  such  action  have  been  in 


284  SPIRIT  INTERCOURSE 

each  sphere  as  they  passed  upwards.  After  com- 
paring notes,  each  individual  endeavors  to  ar- 
rive at  an  understanding  of  the  principles  that 
were  at  work  within  his  life,  and  one  from  the 
fifth  sphere,  who  acts  as  a  kind  of  judge,  helps 
them  to  their  conclusions,  and  throws  light  upon 
some  of  the  problems  which  puzzle  and  confuse 
them.  The  nearest  approach  to  such  a  class  on 
earth  is  a  debating  society,  but  the  whole  spirit 
of  the  gathering  is  quiet,  and  free  from  all  pas- 
sionate discussion  or  tendency  to  score  one  against 
the  other,  or  to  throw  dust  in  each  other's  eyes,  for 
all  are  anxious  to  arrive  at  truth.  On  this  sphere 
the  tendency  is  for  the  Inhabitants  to  dwell  in 
brotherhood  communities,  the  family  gathering 
no  longer  being  found. 

FIFTH  SPHERE. 

This  might  be  termed  the  sphere  of  contempla- 
tion, where  the  inhabitants  seek  to  digest  their  past 
experiences.  No  animals  of  any  kind  are  to  be 
found  here,  but  birds  are  numerous,  though  very 
different  in  appearance  from  those  of  earth,  being 
of  a  peculiar  transparent  nature,  flashing  In  many 
brilliant  colors,  which  seem  to  emanate  from  them. 
These  are  also  to  be  found  on  the  sixth  sphere, 
but  there  have  more  the  appearance  of  an  ani- 
mated jewel  than  of  a  living  creature.    In  the  fifth 


"life  after  death"  285 

sphere  one  finds  temples  built  of  material  of  the 
appearance  of  precious  stones,  with  a  beauty  of 
form  and  composition  unknown  to  human  mind. 
These  are  constructed  from  substances  drawn 
from  the  atmosphere  but  are  still  composed  of 
blocks,  whereas  those  on  the  sixth  and  seventh 
spheres  are  constructed  in  one  piece.  Houses  are 
still  to  be  found,  but  greatly  altered  in  design 
from  those  known  to  man.  The  inhabitants  of 
this  sphere  are  much  more  severely  intellectual 
than  those  of  the  sixth  and  seventh,  and  the  pas- 
sage to  the  upper  spheres  can  only  be  procured  by 
the  development  of  the  love  principle.  There  is 
a  great  similarity  between  this  sphere  and  the  one 
above,  except  in  this  respect,  thus  demonstrating 
that  love  is  superior  to  intellect. 

SIXTH  sphere. 

This  may  be  termed  the  sphere  of  love.  The 
vegetation  here  takes  upon  itself  a  beauty  of  form 
and  coloring  that  no  earth  language  can  express. 
The  light  is  of  so  dazzling  a  nature  that  the 
human  being  could  not  enjoy  it,  as  it  ranges  from 
150  to  180  degrees.  Temples  of  all  kinds  are 
extremely  numerous,  and  devoted  to  many  differ- 
ent practices.  These  are  often  built  in  various 
colors,  but  In  the  main  a  building  is  of  one  colored 
material,  so  that  it  has  the  appearance  of  a  ruby. 


286  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

emerald,  topaz,  sapphire,  amethyst,  or  crystal. 
One  of  the  buildings  examined  seemed  to  be  built 
In  one  piece  as  if  cut  from  a  solid  ruby.  These 
superb  temples  of  one  color  are  often  relieved  by 
a  lighter  shade  of  the  same  material.  One  can 
but  dimly  Imagine  the  beauty  of  such  a  building, 
where  the  windows,  floors,  steps,  walls,  and  high 
domed  roof  are  all  constructed  of  the  same  pre- 
cious stones.  The  walls  being  of  a  great  thickness, 
allow  only  a  dim  light  to  penetrate,  but  the  win- 
dows admit  plentiful  light  which  makes  a  play  of 
colors  almost  Impossible  to  Imagine.  The  con- 
struction of  these  buildings  Is  unique,  the  matter 
composing  them  being  drawn  from  the  atmosphere 
In  fine  dust-like  atoms,  which,  congregating,  form 
the  structure.  The  workers  mould  it  with  the 
help  of  their  hands,  and  solidify  it  by  the  power  of 
their  minds.  The  construction  of  the  buildings, 
however,  is  carried  out  In  harmony  with  natural 
principles,  and  they  are  not  built  magically  as  we 
have  been  too  often  led  to  suppose.  It  is  strange 
to  see  the  manner  in  which  the  foundations  of 
such  temples  penetrate  the  ground,  almost  similar 
to  the  roots  of  a  tree. 

SEVENTH  SPHERE. 

This  Is  frequently  spoken  of  as  *'The  Christ 
Sphere,"  where  the  finished  product  of  evolved 


'life  after  death  287 

humanity  Is  to  be  found  so  far  as  our  earth  Is  con- 
cerned. Here  no  vegetation  of  any  kind  is  to  be 
seen,  as  the  matter  which  constitutes  the  ground- 
work of  the  sphere  is  of  a  crystalline  nature,  and 
incapable  of  producing  vegetation.  Looked  at 
with  human  eyes,  its  foundations  seem  to  be  of 
variously  colored  precious  stones,  and  the  streets 
as  If  manufactured  from  blocks  of  gold.  This  de- 
scription, however,  is  unsatisfactory,  for  it  has  the 
appearance  of  crystalline  gems  congealed,  so  that 
as  one  walks  upon  It  the  various  facets  sparkle 
with  a  dazzling  radiance  as  of  frosted  gold  and 
precious  stones.  The  body  of  man  on  this  sphere 
Is  of  so  light  a  nature  that  it  is  easier  to  float  than 
to  walk,  and  an  effort  Is  necessary  to  keep  on  the 
ground.  The  author  possesses  no  language  to  de- 
scribe some  of  the  scenes  and  the  habits  of  the 
people,  so  this  must  be  left  to  one  more  capable. 
In  a  conversation  between  the  author  and  one 
cooperating  with  him  from  the  fourth  sphere, 
and  who  was  allowed  on  one  occasion  to  visit  the 
seventh  sphere,  a  remark  was  made  which  de- 
scribes the  difference  between  man's  consciousness 
and  that  of  the  dwellers  on  the  highest  sphere. 
He  said,  "I  did  not  enjoy  my  visit  to  the  seventh 
sphere.  It  was  much  too  pure,  cold  and  dazzling, 
and  the  companions  who  took  me  round,  though 
they  were  undoubtedly  the  personification  of  love. 


288  SPIRIT    INTERCOURSE 

I  did  not  care  for,  as  I  felt  I  could  not  be  chummy 
with  them,  so  far  did  they  transcend  my  nature." 
He  went  on  to  relate  the  passage  of  a  number  of 
singers  whose  voices  created  a  strange  double  ef- 
fect, for  as  they  sang  the  vibration  from  their 
voices  created  an  echo  immediately  overhead,  as 
if  an  invisible  choir  sang  above  them.  This  echo 
was  caused  by  the  vibration  of  their  voices  upon 
the  crystalline  streets.  Following  these  singers, 
he  found  himself  near  a  magnificent  temple,  which 
many  were  approaching  from  different  directions 
in  variously  colored  costumes.  The  temple  being 
open  on  all  sides  he  watcheci  wath  interest  some  of 
the  ceremonies,  which  both  surprised  and  influ- 
enced him  deeply.  One  of  a  superior  character 
appeared  on  a  raised  dais  in  a  blaze  of  light,  and 
spoke  to  the  vast  assembly.  He  turned  his  face 
for  a  moment  upon  the  visitor,  and  holding  his 
open  palm  towards  him,  seemed  to  cast  forth  a 
beam  of  light,  which  apparently  permeated  his 
being,  for  he  was  suddenly  conscious  of  a  great 
peace,  which  has  powerfully  influenced  his  life  and 
thought  since  that  moment.  This  plane  of  being 
holds  the  blossoms  of  earth  which  might  be 
termed  the  super  supermen. 


CONCLUSION 

ExA.DERS  who  have  carefully  perused  the 
foregoing  pages  must  agree  that  If  the 
facts  are  as  stated,  psychic  research  es- 
tablishes upon  a  scientific  basis,  without  any 
shadow  of  doubt,  the  fact  that  man  lives  beyond 
death.  It  also  proves  that  his  immediate  post- 
mortem dwelling-place  lies  around  this  planet, 
where  he  continues  to  dwell  for  some  thousands 
of  years.  But  his  origin  and  final  destiny  are  still 
enshrouded  in  darkness.  Life  is  a  series  of  rid- 
dles, and  the  key  to  one  riddle  but  opens  the  door 
to  another.  The  facLs  revealed  in  this  treatise 
are  too  startling  for  some  to  believe,  and  for 
others  not  startling  enough,  the  latter  asking  for 
definite  statements  regarding  the  origin  and  ulti- 
mate end  of  things.  The  psychic  scientist  does 
not  attempt  to  explain  the  universe;  that  Is  left 
to  enthusiastic  children.  It  is  enough  If  men  can 
advance  one  step  at  a  time  and  explain  some 
natural  laws  to  this  generation,  which  were  un- 
known or  only  guessed  at  by  men  of  the  past. 
It  Is  now  known  what  happens  to  man  at  death, 
and   when    he    arrives    in    his    future    home    and 

289 


290  SPIRIT  INTERCOURSE 

reaches  his  six  hundredth  year  doubtless  his  view 
of  the  future  will  be  vastly  extended,  and  his 
origin  may  then  also  be  known  to  him. 

Man  In  western  Europe  has  accumulated  his 
knowledge  of  the  soul  and  a  post-mortem  state, 
with  slow  and  painful  steps  until  the  present  cen- 
tury, but  now  a  rapid  advance  is  assuredly  being 
made.  A  National  College  of  Psychic  Science, 
now  in  process  of  formation,  will  shortly  be  estab- 
lished in  London,  where  students  of  the  subject 
may  receive  instruction,  and  where  demonstra- 
tions will  be  given  by  the  most  eminent  mediums 
drawn  from  every  part  of  the  world.  Here  an 
opportunity  will  be  found  to  investigate  psychic 
phenomena  under  ideal  conditions  upon  scientific 
lines  and  under  careful  guidance.  At  present, 
students  who  wish  to  Investigate  the  subject  are 
greatly  handicapped  through  the  loss  of  time  oc- 
casioned in  travelling  over  wide  areas  to  meet 
with  demonstrators  of  psychic  phenomena,  and 
only  those  who  are  extremely  enthusiastic  and 
possess  wealth  and  time  can  surmount  the  diffi- 
culties which  stand  in  the  way  of  an  exhaustive 
study  of  the  subject. 

Ignorance  is  the  cause  of  all  men's  sufferings, 
and  therefore  opportunities  for  knowledge  should 
be  provided  for  seekers.  For  years  the  facts  of 
human  life  are  hidden,  until  someone  comes  along 


CONCLUSION  291 

and  reveals  one  and  then  another,  and  then  men 
are  amazed  that  they  were  so  long  blind.  Accord- 
ing to  temperament  they  may  exult  and  shout  with 
joy  over  the  new-found  truth,  sometimes  suffering 
a  kind  of  madness  from  excess  of  light,  or  they 
may  seek  to  blame  those  whom  they  think  might 
have  enlightened  them  earlier,  angry  that  so  much 
good  time  has  been  lost.  But  man  himself  must 
be  blamed,  for  no  more  truth  can  be  conveyed 
than  the  mind  can  receive.  When  one  is  ready 
for  it  the  truth  is  at  hand.  There  is  nothing  in 
nature  that  can  be  given,  for  all  things  are  sold 
or  earned,  therefore  if  anything  w^ould  be  known, 
man  must  pay  the  price.  What  is  the  price? 
Hard  work  and  steady  application. 

Within  these  pages  sufficient  Information  is 
given  to  enable  anyone  to  prove  the  reality  of  a 
spiritual  world.  Many  are  quite  indifferent  as  to 
what  becomes  of  them  after  death,  and  to  those 
this  book  will  make  no  particular  appeal,  but 
everyone  who  hungers  for  such  knowledge  can 
have  their  appetite  appeased,  for  nature  does  not 
implant  desires  which  cannot  be  satisfied.  Buddha 
Is  claimed  to  have  said:  "To  feed  one  good  man 
is  Infinitely  more  meritorious  than  attending  to 
questions  about  heaven  and  earth,  spirits  and 
demons."  But  the  author  claims,  that  to  open  up 
friendly   relations  with   spirits   and  demons  will 


292  SPIRIT   INTERCOURSE 

enable  one  to  know  how  to  manufacture  a  good 
man. 

Ancient  religions  have  lost  their  power  to  ap- 
peal to  the  soul  of  man  to-day.  A  silent  revolu- 
tion has  undermined  them  all,  and  made  it  impos- 
sible for  men  to  rest  In  the  theories  of  their  great- 
grandparents.  The  spirit  that  dwelt  In  them  has 
glided  away  to  animate  other  activities,  and  "they 
who  enter  the  old  shrines  find  apes  and  players 
rustling  the  old  garments."  Men  must  construct 
a  new  church  and  a  new  religion  to  satisfy  the 
demands  of  their  souls  if  they  would  play  the 
part  of  real  men  In  the  world  of  to-day,  a  church 
whose  roof  and  foundation  must  Include  all 
heaven  and  earth,  and  whose  teaching  must  be 
founded  on  moral  science.  The  greatest  change 
that  man  has  ever  known  Is  slowly  taking  place 
through  the  agency  of  science,  which  teaches  men 
that  the  ultimate  court  of  appeal  in  religion,  as  In 
every  other  branch  of  life,  is  through  observation 
and  experiment,  and  not  through  authority.  Re- 
ligions of  the  past  have  been  cribbed,  cabined,  and 
confined  by  priestly  exponents  who  have  forbidden 
their  improvement,  and  thus  brought  about  their 
death,  forgetting  that  the  law  of  evolution  neces- 
sitates change. 

Men  to-day  must  advance  from  the  church  of 
the  past  to  the  church  of  the  future.     "O  Thou, 


CONCLUSION  293 

that  pinest  In  the  imprisonment  of  the  Actual  and 
crieth  bitterly  to  the  gods  for  a  kingdom  wherein 
to  rule  and  create,  know  this  of  a  truth,  the  thing 
thou  seekest  Is  already  with  thee,  here  or  nowhere, 
couldst  thou  only  see." 


LITERATURE 

Letiers   from    a   Living   Dead   Man.   Written   down   by   Elsa 

Barker. 
War  Letters  from  the  Living  Dead  Man.  Written  down  by 

Elsa  Barker. 
Letters   from    Harry  and   Helen.     Written   down   by   Mary 

Blount  White. 
Miracles  and  Modern   Spiritualism.  Alfred  Russel  Wallace, 

F.R.S. 
Spirit  Teachings.     W.  Stainton  Moses,  M.A. 
Psychic   Philosophy   as   the    Foundation   of   a   Religion    of 

Natural  Law.    V.  C.  Desertis. 

NfOOTFALLS    ON    THE    BOUNDARY    OF    ANOTHER    WORLD.       R.    Dale 

Owen. 

Researches  in  the  Phenomena  of  Spiritualism.    Sir  William 

Crookes,  F.R.S. 
Psychical  Research  and  Survival.    J.  H.  Hyslop,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 
Psychical  Research.    Sir  W.  F.  Barrett,  F.R.S. 
Letters  from  Julia.    W.  T.  Stead. 
W.  T.  Stead  the  Man.    Miss  E.  Harper. 
Spiritual  Science:  Here  and  Hereafter.     Sir  William  Earn- 

shaw  Cooper. 
Scientific  Basis  of  Spiritualism.    Epes.  Sargent. 
Incidents  of  My  Life.     D.  D.  Home. 
Through  the  Mists.    R.  J.  Lees, 
Arcana  of  Spiritualism.    Hudson  Tuttle. 
Invisible  Helpers.     C.  W.  Leadbeater. 
Astral    Plane:    Its    Inhabitants    and    Phenomena.      C.    W. 

Leadbeater. 
Death  and  After.    Annie  Besant. 
Events  in  the  Life  of  a  Seer.    Andrew  Jackson  Davis. 
The  Divine  Harmonia.    Andrew  Jackson  Davis. 

294 


LITERATURE  295 

Ghost  Land,  or  Researches  into  the  Mysteries  of  Occultism. 

E.  Hardinge  Britten. 
Intercourse  of  the  Soul  and  Body.    Emanuel  Swedenborg. 
Our  Life  after  Death.    Rev.  A.  Chambers. 
A  Guide  to  Mediumship.    E.  W.  and  M.  H.  Wallis. 
Scientific   Demonstration   of   a   Future   Life.     Thomas   Jay 

Hudson. 
Spirit  Photography.    James  Coates. 
Glimpses  of  the  Next^ 

State.  ^Vice-Admiral  W.  Usborne  Moore. 

The  Voices. 

J 

Materializations.     (In  German.)     Dr.  Schrenck-Notzing. 


ONE  MONTH  USE 

PLEASE  RETURN  TO  DESK 
FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

EDUCATION-PSYCHOLOGY 
LIBRARY 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

1 -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-4209 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior 

to  due  date. 

ALL  BOOKS  ARE  SUBJECT  TO  RECALL  7  DAYS 
AFTER  DATE  CHECKED  OUT. 


L 


FEB  2  3  197fi 

FEB  2  5  REC'D -2  ri- 

\  .  A      y   !  •  ;; 

1 

[ 

h 

SENT  ON  ILL 

\\ 

DEC  2  1  199^ 

U.  C.  BERKELE"^ 

r 

\ 

1 

1 

General  Library 
LD  21A-30m-5,'75                        University  of  California 

(S5877L)                                                Berkeley                        i 

(B1321S10)476                                        .-.uivcxaiiy  v^i  -oiUiiv/iiiia 

Berkeley 

U.C  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CD3Db737M7 


1 


